Home

PROFIBUS-DP Master Module User's Manual

1. switched each other continuing communications lt _3 Section 4 8 Zz fe b System switching is available when an error occurs in the QJ71PB92V or in z communication with a DP Slave o Ee The systems can be switched when an error occurs in the QU71PB92V or in 28 communication with a DP Slave e When the QJ71PB92V detects a critical error n 6 Control system Enor in ASe system Continues communication E 4 QJ71PB92V ea New standby system New system 9 3 Tracking A Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 2 O R pa apa DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB 200 939 Figure 1 2 When the QJ71PB92V detects a critical error g a fa FO Wo gt When the QJ71PB92V detects a communication error of a DP Slave ope Control system a system 4 Continues communication S New standby system New ee system Lx E oe g w E Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator o zZ 5 Communication 9 failure a Figure 1 3 When the QJ71PB92V detects a communication error of a DP Slave P ae EG a BZ 1 1 Features 1 5 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries
2. d Parameter settings in GX Developer a lt Intelligent function module switch setting gt z Lu g for I O and intellige on mod 5 Input format HEX Slot Type Model name Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 o PLC PLC Q25PRHCPU 1 joo Empty Q25PRHCPU Set a standby master 3 1001 E FDL address 3 a2 Input DXA g 4 363 o qe pS ee 2S Do Select Device detail 2 settings g No tracking All tracking device capacity or K word amp Do tracking Device total increases 16K word 2 Device detall settings O Tracking lock No M a a Sane block No 1 a Device range settings Points Start Stat End Set tracking devices Yee fer File register file settings Target memory File name 2 e E O Tracking characteristics setting E Synchronized tracking mode T ake more scan time Program priority mode 26 ge Figure 7 34 I O Data Exchange Parameter Setting Example GX Developer a D g ZPE FE 1 For tracking devices used for continuing respective functions of the QJ71PB92V refer to 4 in this 25 m section and sections 7 9 2 to 7 9 7 E RAA Nan CD Sooo ooo coco oreo o i n zZ For details on tracking setting refer to the user s manual for the redundant system E Lu for the CPU module used 2 Lu eeeeeeeeaeseseeoeaeaoses ee eeoeeeseeeeeeeseeeoeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaoeeeee bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examp
3. 12 Zz status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 are updated e i O The following is an example Z TE QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP M a g fad 28 L DP Slave DP Slave Be DP Slave ASIEN DP Slave DP Slave SEW Soe FDL address 1 FDL address 4 rp address 6 Foariesn g O ades Aan Normal DP Slave Tenparatiy sewe i Normal DP Slave Reserved station eupoay Save 203 i reservation i reservation ES Pao2 ses C a 5 1st module 2nd module 3rd module 4th module 5th module oa Results stored in Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 g m Address 2 DEC HEX 615 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO w WW 23048 5A08u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 7 1 0 Z Figure 3 18 An Example in Slave Status Area Reserved Station Setting Status o z 5 Fs ed a Yn a ae a BZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 31 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 32 MELSEC TE eries 3 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 The information on diagnostic status of each DP Slave is stored in this area When the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned OFF all the information of the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 is cleared
4. Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave QJ71PB93D MELSEC ST System mente Rhee CEC Myiaccnes gi iii H 5 Figure 1 1 PROFIBUS DP Using QJ71PB92V DP Slave Bus terminator DP Slave Bus terminator MELSEC TE eries OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC A ni lt MELSECNETI H remote I O network gt Remote master station QJ71LP21 25 ea Teie a ler MELSECNET H Remote I O network Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave MELSEC ST System DP Slave Bus terminator E Bus terminator Figure 1 1 PROFIBUS DP Using QJ71PB92V Continued The QJ71PB92V has a function for replacing the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible function When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJ71PB92V using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Table1 1 Reference Manuals PROFIBUS DP Master Module User s PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Manual Purpose Using the functions of the QJ71PB92V Details Re
5. Table8 3 Device Usable in the BBLKRD Instruction ai gt Usable device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Index Set data System user File function Constant i register fet won register module device a K H LAGI ai z 5 iy O O Z o D O Zg 20 n2 O I O nO no Instruction Execution symbol condition z Command g G BBLKRD _ G BBLKRD un m x2 i N Figure 8 3 BBLKRD Instruction Set data Table8 4 Set Data in the BBLKRD Instruction 7 z Set data Description Setting range Data type QJ71PB92V module start I O number 5 Un o T i 0 to FEH i z Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation BIN 16 bits n1 Start address of reading data Specified device range A D Start No of the device to which read data are stored Specified device range Device name SZ mife n2 Number of read data 1 to 4096 word BIN 16 bits a oS 250 28s FOL Function F re wn wn This instruction allows data reading from the buffer memory of a specified module with data consistency ensured g E Error m An operation error occurs in the following instances Error code 4101 m e When a value outside the setting range is set to the set data field 3 e When the size which is obtained by adding the number of read data to the start address of reading data exceeds the buffer memory size e When the points available for the start address of reading data
6. QCPU QJ71PB92V Device Buffer memory Reading of Input data from input data Input data area DP Slave for mode 3 Y Device Writing of Output data to output data Output data area DP Slave for mode 3 Input data No input data Input data E E Output data Output data No output data DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 125 Figure 4 1 I O Data Exchange 1 Reading writing I O data a Buffer memory Read or write I O data from the following buffer memory in the QJ71PB92V e Input data Input data area for mode 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 e Output data Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 b Read write methods Read or write I O data from the buffer memory to devices in QCPU by the following methods Table4 2 Read Write Methods Read Write Methods Setting Location Data Consistency Function Automatic refresh GX Configurator DP Dedicated instructions Available Sequence program BBLKRD BBLKWR MOV or FROM TO instructions Sequence program Not available 4 2 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 1 I O data exchange 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries 2 Starting and stopping I O data exchange a Write the initial value of the output data to the Output data area for mode 3 gt Un G14336 to Un G18431 z b Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 c When I O data exchange is started after turning
7. Ho M303 M304 i h o y hko gt 7P RENFR JO K KI HO K23040 D200 K25 M1008 Reading Slave status area M1008 M1009 SET M304 Processing for failure of Slave status area reading Jo a m ete ees ee ce les eee ee Pa he te ey fee eh a Program for control of DP Slaves lt 3 Section 7 1 1 2 a ee ee ee ee ee ee eas EE MO M304 k H HH RTO J K1 K1 HO K14336 D100 K96 M1010 me mo n RST M303 Writing output data To M304 ary Processing for failure of A output data writing W300 be m o o o o m o m o m o m o aum ee ee eee ee ee er eie s IF a a a L o a a a R EE E 0 eo eeesl I Not required when initial settings are not changed Figure 7 25 Program Example for the I O Data Exchange Function When Mounted on a Remote I O Station Continued 7 65 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING M ELS 26 Fel ceries 7 8 2 Other precautions When programming for the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H remote I O station pay attention to the following OVERVIEW 1 QJ71PB92V I O signals I O signals of the QJ71PB92V are refreshed into link devices LX LY on the remote I O station and then transferred to the remote master station Make the link devices LX LY of the remote master st
8. 4 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 S i A a This area stores the diagnostic information generated on DP Slaves during gt communication z Information of 125 modules is stored in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 in the same order for each module Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO fe 23072 5A20n Diagnostic information The status 3 information Whether The FDL address of the 1st g area of 1st module or not any extended diagnostic module is stored z0 23073 5A21h information other than the one sent Initial value 001 F z 23074 5A22h p mi this time is stored in the DP Slave In the normal status 00n is stored DO RT a 23072 5A20x of the 1st module is stored aa ras tee Peet 23075 5A23H Initial value 00x Hito AnD to 125 FDL address 3 00x Other extended diagnostic to information exists 80H No other extended o diagnostic information 2 exists S PRE UB TCH Diagnostic information The status 1 information of the 1st The status 2 information of the 1st 5 a of 125th module module is stored module is stored a 23321 5B1 9 23073 5A211 Initial value 00H Initial value 00x 00H Normal 00H Normal V Other than 00H lt gt b Other than 00H lt gt b Figure 3 25 Diagnostic Information Area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING
9. 26688 6840H 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK T 34 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA cries b When failed Table7 32 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26446 674En An error code is stored lt gt Section 9 5 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave from which the alarm was read is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 See below Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 b0 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed LOrE Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed
10. 3 58 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area MELSEC TE eries 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 5 Processing Time MalAY3aAO This section explains the bus cycle time and transmission delay time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time NOLLVYNSISNOO oo 1 When a single DP Master is used Time PSG Sa AE Hee oe aoe eee eee eee SEES ee ee oe eee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eae WALSAS QJ71PB92V Buffer memory SNOILVOISIDAdS Internal buffer DP Slave 1 DP Slave 2 SNOILONN4 NOILYHY3dO WALSAS 3840439 SAYNGADOYd ANY SONILLAS z I 5 TERANE AEAT D 2 2 YE mF J x eA i S z Ss N a o Tepe pee es NE ty ee My cea gs HE Az Haj o gt ne D aq T 3 5 A P enrera ga o D Oo N ne sal D ao gt a NS no o o i 3 Sa eee gt 5 n EEEE 2 amp g g E S e ole S 1 a oO m al DP Slave 3 ONILLAS YSLaWVavd Figure 3 38 Bus Cycle Time DP Master 1 DP Slave 3 1 MSI Minimum polling cycle or Total of Treq Max_Tsdr and Tres whichever is greater is Bc Bus cycle time lt 37 1 a in this section 2 If MSI Minimum polling cycle is greater than Total of Treq Max_Tsdr and Tres the QJ71PB92V transfers data from the internal buffer to the buffer memory within the MSI Minimum polling cycle O NINWYH9OHd SNOILONUYLSNI daivoldad 3 59 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus
11. PROFIBUS DPVO I O data exchange o O oO ia Acquisition of 2 diagnostic and 2 2 o extended diagnostic O O O Ed information Global control function O O Oo PROFIBUS DPV11 Acyclic communication x with DP Slaves 2 i Alarm acquisition O x x Support of FDT DTM O x x technology PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP Slaves O x x Data swap function O O x Data consistency function O O o Output status setting for the i O o X case of a CPU stop error Temporary slave O x x reservation Redundant system support O x x function QJ71PB92D compatible function G O Available x Not available 1 They are different in the number of connectable DP Slaves and I O data size lt 3 1 in this appendix 2 Extended diagnostic information cannot be read from any station 3 Data consistency function by the FROM TO instruction only is executable Data consistency function by automatic refresh or dedicated instructions is not executable 4 Set by the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer lt gt gt Section 6 7 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 3 Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons APPENDICES MELSEC LAY ceries Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system POINT The Communication mode mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 and DPV2 functions Because of this the bus cycle time is increased compared wit
12. COO0O OO0000 2 p QJ71PB92V U Figure 5 3 QJ71PB92V Appearance Table5 2 Names of Parts No Name Description These LEDs indicate the operation status of the QJ71PB92V For details refer to 1 in this section 2 PROFIBUS interface connector This connector connects the PROFIBUS cable to the QJ71PB92V 1 Indicator LEDs 5 5 5 3 Part Names and Settings SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC HY cence 1 Indicator LEDs QJ71PB92V RUN O OTEST SD RD OTOKEN READY PRM SET RSP ERR O O FAULT Figure 5 4 Indicator LEDs Table5 3 Indicator LEDs E B Status Description Reference RUN ON Normally operating OFF Hardware error watchdog timer error or power failure Section 9 1 ON Section 4 1 1 SD RD Flashing Exchanging I O data or during acyclic communication Section 4 2 1 OFF Not communicating with DP Slave or being in the standby system ON Ready to communicate or communication being performed READY OFF Not ready to communicate or no communication ON A communication error has occurred Section 3 4 6 RSP ERR OFF No communication error ON Executing self diagnostics or flash ROM initialization section 3 4 Section 9 6 TEST Flashing Executing self diagnostics Section 5 4 OFF Not executing self diagnostics or flash ROM initialization ON TOKEN Flashin
13. gt Section 2 2 Section 2 3 Yes No Has each station connected to PROFIBUS DP been powered ON Power ON each station Yes Hardware failure of the QJ71PB92V Please No consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Is the RUN LED on QJ71PB92V ON Yes The PRM SET LED is ON Write the parameters to the QJ71PB92V No The PRM SET LED is flashing Is the PRM SET LED on QJ71PB92V OFF The written parameters are invalid or corrupted Refer to Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions and take corrective actions lt 3 Section 9 1 Yes Is the FAULT LED on QJ71PB92V OFF No Check the Local station error information area and take corrective actions Yes 1 Figure 9 5 Troubleshooting When Communications with DP Slaves Are Not Possible 9 6 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 26 Cel ceries 1 o Z E e e T mo wW l faa gt O Are the parameter settings consistent with actual slave configurations Correct the parameters and write them again yn WwW O Is the QJ71PB92V s Data exchange start Turn ON the Data exchange start request z request signal Y00 ON signal Y00 t Check the diagnostic information of the faulty DP Slave and take corrective actions When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is
14. 3 Executing the global control function Execute the global control function by the following procedure a Write the service to be sent and the target group to the Global control area Un G2081 b Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 c When global control processing is completed the Global control completed signal X04 turns ON If the processing failed the Global control failed signal X05 turns ON d After confirming completion of the global control turn OFF the Global control request signal Y04 K POINT To execute the global control function to all DP Slaves including DP Slaves for which group No is not set set Os to all of b15 to b8 in the Global control area Un G2081 For program examples on the global control function refer to the following e Single CPU system gt Section 7 3 e Redundant system 5 Section 7 9 3 eeeeeeevseeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeoeee eee 4 10 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions POINT E 1 To utilize PROFIBUS DPV1 functions use a DP Slave that supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When using the PROFIBUS DPV1 function set a Min slave interval value z greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr lt gt Section 5 3 5 1 Dg If the Min slave i
15. Initializes Diagnostic info I invalid setting area Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area Lo J Sets conditions for system q switching Sets a system switching 1 DP Slave 1st 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary J slave reservation Turn OFF Y00 to Y1F Writes the initial output data value I O data exchange y start processing ee ol el el a ie ee U ey ce U Se eel ee ee Figure 7 35 I O Data Exchange Program Example Automatic Refresh 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING M ALS 26 Fel ceries b When using dedicated instructions This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP F z Slaves using dedicated instructions s x W Not needed when the initial setting is not changed 3 fie ee a a T N s402 T 1 Turn ON the initial I L setting execution command W400 X1B XID XIF X0 Yo UO Initializes Di tic inf 5 ipa y v2 MoV HOBO 62080 1 Initializes Diagnostic info invalid setting area ie i W Initializes D f Z0 HOY K20 G2084 I nitializes Diagnostic info non wir I notification time setting area 25 UO Be ro Ko 623648 l Sets conditions for system I switching P Uo Sets a system switching i MOY H1 G23649 DP Slave 1st
16. To the next page 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries Table3 4 List of I O Signals Continued Signal Direction QJ71PB92V QCPU Signal Direction QCPU QJ71PB92V gt X1A Use prohibited Y1A X1B Communication READY signal Y1B X1C Use prohibited Y1iC a Use prohibited X1D Module READY signal Y1D z XIE Use prohibited YIE X1F Watchdog timer error signal Y1F st POINT oO Among the I O signals for the QCPU do not output turn ON the signals indicated as Use prohibited If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the programmable controller system may malfunction Remark eeeeeaeeaeseoceaeeooeaeweoeaeeaeeoeoeaseeeeceoeoeecee eae eee e eeeoeoeaeoe eee For how to use the output signals to continue or reexecute respective functions in event of system switching in the redundant system refer to Section 7 9 7 Z O lt Q u 3 w a Oo eeeeeeeecoeoeeocoeoeosceeeeecoeaoeseeeeeeeeeoeaoseeecoeoeoeeaeeeeeaeoeeaeeeeeeeee FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 5 3 3 1 List of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 1 Data exchange start request signal Y00 data
17. b When failed Table7 23 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 0H An error code is stored 3 Section 9 5 3 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H 1 When E482h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 1 is stored lt gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 3 3H 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored _ Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0nH Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 4 4H 1 When E4824 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored _ Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E482h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 26 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION
18. smsis xp EE EEE TE EET Reexecution is prevented 7 l f f RST X25 1 when system switching ee A a G E E a E a a a a l i J occurred S l Program for global control gt 37 Section 7 3 5 A Figure 7 38 Program Example for Global Control Function DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 82 7 9 3 Program example for global control function PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves If a system switching occurs the function of the acyclic communication with DP Slaves cannot be continued In redundant systems do not use the acyclic communication with DP Slaves To use the function pay attention to the descriptions given below and fully examine the possible operations in advance 1 Application types and precautions The Acyclic communication with DP Slaves must be utilized for temporary applications If it is used for a constant application 2 system switching causes the new control system to operate in the manner shown in a and b Therefore fully examine the system for any problem 1 Parameter settings of DP Slaves temporary status monitoring etc 2 Constant status monitoring etc a When using Class 1 service When system switching occurs during acyclic communication with DP Slaves and if an error occurs states of communication with DP Slaves are initialized Inputs and outputs are tu
19. 5 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 This area stores the latest extended diagnostic information occurred during communication Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO The FDL address of the DP Slave that notified of the latest extended diagnostic information in addresses 23328 5B20x 23329 to 23454 5B21H to 5B9En is stored Initial value O000n 0000 to 007D 0 to 125 FDL address The data size of the latest extended diagnostic information in addresses 23330 to 23454 5B22h to 5B9En 23329 5B21n iS stored Initial value 00001 0006n to OOF 4n Data size of extended diagnostic information unit byte The latest information of status 1 is stored The latest information of status 2 is stored Initial value OOH Initial value OOH 23330 5B22n 00u Norm l 00u NOrmal Other than 00x K gt This section 4 b Other than 001 lt 3 This section 4 b The latest status 3 information Whether or notany The latest FDL address of the DP Master is stored extended diagnostic information other than the one Initial value 00x 23331 5B23x sent this time is stored in the DP Slave is stored For the DP Slave that has not started I O data Initial value 00x exchange FFu is stored 00n No other extended diagnostic information 00x to 7Dx 0 to 125 FDL address exists 80x Other extended diagnostic information exists 23332 5B24H The latest ident No of the
20. CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO By setting the FDL address is set in the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 and turning ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 the extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 7 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo 2 Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 The execution result of the extended diagnostic information read request is stored in this area 9 x z If the request failed the values in address 23458 to 23583 5BA2H to 5C1FH become 2 O OH 5 m Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO m The read result is stored Initial value 00001 26 23457 5BA1n A2001 Normally completed 3 le Other than A200n Failed Error code lt gt Section 9 5 1 lt 4 a fp 8 The data size of the extended diagnostic information in addresses 23459 to 23583 5BA3x to 5C1F is stored zZ m a 23458 5BA2n Initial value 00001 F 22 naw 0006n to OOF 4n Data size of extended diagnostic information unit byte The information of status 1 is stored The latest information of status 2 is stored Initial value 00H Initial value OOH o 23459 5BA3x Go Normal 001 Normal a Other than 00H gt Section 3 4 6 4 b Other than 00H LF Section 3 4 6 4 b Ww x The status 3 information Whether or not any The
21. Start Steps shown in C are the same as those for the QJ71PB92D y Replace the QJ71PB92D mounted on the base unit with L gt PROFIBUS DP Interface Module the QJ71PB92V User s Manual 5 1 Procedures before Operation y Turn on the power y Enable the QJ71PB92D compatible function with GX Developer and write PLC parameters to the QCPU a Slag See y Reset the QCPU Is the QJ71PB92D compatible function enabled CF 4 in this section Perform self diagnostics on the QJ71PB92V In GX Configurator DP set the PROFIBUS DP parameters Select QJ71PB92D as the module for the GX Configurator DP project No Check the parameter settings L 5 in this section Use output status No setting for the case of a CPU stop error Set the output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error by GX Developer and write the PLC parameters to the QCPU Reset the QCPU 1 Figure 4 34 Procedures before System Operation 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 FUNCTIONS M ELS eG lA eries OVERVIEW Connect a PROFIBUS cable to the QJU71PB92V lq le Connect the PROFIBUS cable to a slave station and start up the slave station y Change the operation mode of the QJ71PB92D to a mode s that allows communications with slave station srs F Section 6 2 Start the I O data exchange
22. the time data read request again E602H E603H i Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure PEP _ E604H explaining a detailed description of the problem E605H a Modify it so that the time master can read it out and then E606H A set value of the time master is invalid retry The UTC second value set in the Time control setting Check if the UTC second value is correct and retry E611H request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 is out of the i jange lt Section 7 6 2 E612H E613H E614H E615H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure sy fagi E622H explaining a detailed description of the problem E623H E624H E625H E626H Incorrect Year At the time of write request E627H Incorrect Month At the time of write request E628H Incorrect Day At the time of write request E629H Inconsistent Date At the time of write request E62AH Incorrect Hour At the time of write request Check if the request data is correct and retry E62BH Incorrect Minute At the time of write request E62CH Incorrect Second At the time of write request Clock data is out of the range At the time of write E62DH request 9 5 Error Codes 9 23 9 5 5 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error codes generated when executing time control o Z E e e T mo wW l a O hd APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries Error codes F100H
23. 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value 00H to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H 1 When E403h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 1 is stored S Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 3 3H 4 4H 1 When E403h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored gt 37 Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E403h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 3 is stored gt gt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4034 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH T 19 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEGC KE eries 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE This section explains the reques
24. 26802 68B2H 26803 68B3H The hour is stored Stored value 0 to 23 The minute is stored Stored value 0 to 59 The second is stored Stored value 0 to 59 1 1000 second is stored Stored value 0 to 999 The UTC second year month day hour minute second is stored The stored value 9DFF4400H represents January 1st in 1984 00 00 00 Stored value 9DFF4400H to FFFFFFFFH 26810 68BAn to UTC nanosecond ms to ns setting is stored 26811 68BBu Stored value 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH The clock status is stored b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5b4 b3b2 b1 bO 6 5 o 4 3 0 2 0 1 26804 68B4H 26805 68B5H 26806 68B6H 26807 68B7H 26808 68B8H to 26809 68B9H 1 Synchronous setting with the time master is stored 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Time resolution minimum unit setting is stored 00 ims 01 10ms 10 100ms 26812 68BCH 11 1s 3 Summer Winter time setting is stored 0 Winter time setting 1 Summer time setting 4 Advance notice of summer winter time switching is stored 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour 5 Time difference the time to be added or subtracted is stored The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Stored value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Time calc
25. 2nd byte of 1st module 1st byte of 1st module Input data of 1st module 6145 1801H 4th byte of 1st module 3rd byte of 1st module to Input data length 23 bytes 6156 180CH g O 61S NB0DH Input data of 2nd module N 6155 180Bn 22nd byte of 1st module 21st byte of 1st module 9 to Input data length N 6156 180CH 00H 23rd byte of 1st module 2 7 bytes 6160 1810H 6157 180Dh 2nd byte of 2nd module 1st byte of 2nd module 6158 180EH 4th byte of 2nd module 3rd byte of 2nd module Be x 6159 180FH 6th byte of 2nd module 5th byte of 2nd module He a to 6160 1810H 00H 7th byte of 2nd module A i a W ES amp Input data of n th module TAR 10239 27FFH Figure 3 9 Example of Input Data Assignment 1st module 23 bytes 2nd module 7 bytes 2 POINT If a DP Slave with no input data is assigned its space in the input data area is 3 taken over by the next station with input data as shown below Each DP Slave setting Assignment result in Input data area of QJ71PB92V 1st module Input data Set piaadean H Input data of 1st module S 2nd module Input data None Input data of 3rd module 3rd module Input data Set 2 Input data of 5th module amp 4th module Input data Set Data length 0 Because of no input data setting for 2nd and 4th modules no area is assigned for them 5th module Input data Set Yn 6 a EO a HZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 25 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 S
26. 3 DP Slave FDL address 2 DP Slave FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 4 AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D o Input 0 points Input 16 points Input 1 word Output 16 points Output 0 points Output 2 words 2 i n AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D Output data size byte 2 0 4 Input data size byte 0 2 2 Figure 3 42 System Configuration Example FUNCTIONS 1 TcpuA ms value TcpuA ms 5 3 8 ms 2 Tsw ms value Table3 32 Tsw ms value re PE nS oa The following is calculated based on the case where signal flow memory is not zu m tracked Foo ens a 20 5 ms 2an The following is calculated based on the case where redundant CPUs are used and the number of words to be auto refreshed is 5 g Tam 27 us 6 us x Number of words to be auto refreshed Tam ms 27 us 6 us x 5 word y 57 us u 0 057 ms The following conditions are applied Signal flow memory is not tracked No SFC program is executed No PID control instructions PIDINIT S PIDINIT are executed e Tracking devices are DO to D31 32 points g Troms Number of tracking blocks is 1 3 One tracking device range setting Trc 1 32 x 0 09 x 10 1 x 4 x 103 1x 1x 10 1 00788 1 01 ms Tsw ms TEAD Tsw 20 5 0 057 1 01 21 567 ms o 3 z5 BZ 3 5 Processing Time 3 67 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system
27. 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 67 66 65 96 83 82 81 112 99 98 97 4 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23615 5C3Fn are fixed to 0 115 114 113 the n th DP Slave Figure 3 33 Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries When the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned ON the DP Slaves specified in the Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 become temporary slave reservation i gt Temporary slave reservation Specifies temporary slave reservation s request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 ON OFF z Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON l OFF E Data exchange start completed signal X00 28 i Executes NC lt temporary slave reservation K 25 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 and Stores status data Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 Figure 3 34 Operation in Temporary Slave Reservation Request Area 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo POINT 1 Set values in the Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 while the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Value
28. MELSEC TA eries Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result The length of the alarm data is stored Unit byte Stored value 1 to 64 The alarm type is stored Alarm data No 1 Stored value Alarm type A510 Diagnosis alarm A5111 Process alarm Pull alarm Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer specific alarm The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 bO ee p 1 Alarm details category is stored No additional information Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 The alarm data are stored 26453 6755x Alarm data 2nd byte Alarm data 1st byte 26454 6756x Alarm data 4th byte to 26484 6774n Alarm data 64th byte Alarm data 63rd byte b15 b8 b7 bO Alarm data 3rd byte To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING Table7 37 Response Format When Norm
29. N YO Yo gt XO X1B X1D X1F 1 H an mo gt 9 9 a M100 E 4 7 H FROM HO 1KO 1 K4x100 K a ra x AW AW W100 EPEN p t T0 HO K960 j K4 100 KI a Change the buffer memory address in the input area Change the buffer memory address in the output area INDEX XIB XID XIF x20 x0 Bl 1 rae F TOP HO 1K14336 1 KAY100 KI Yo l Co 3 Xo X1B XID XIF 1 H rai mo J M100 2 FROM HO 1 K6144 1 K4x100 KI M100 F l H To HO 1K14336 K4Y100 KI A J Figure APPX 10 Changing Input and Output Areas Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 17 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC LAY eries d Changing a program for input and output data Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 In the following example the sample program in section 7 2 is replaced Processing at input data reception Processing at output data reception _ 2 So N gt lt gS o Y o Y Add the program for reading the each station status from Slave status area Normal communication detection Add the status read from Slave status area Normal communication detection to the interlock FROM HO K23040 D2000 KI Processing at input data reception ST ot l T E he lt a Processing at
30. address The actual order of assignment can be checked in Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Documentation of I O Mapping of GX Configurator DP FDL Addr Name Slave_Nr_002 Slave_Nr_001 Slave_Nr_003 Model QJ71PB93D AJ95TB32 16DT 8 DI 8DO 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s in GX Configurator DP the order of the assigned DP Slaves is changed After modifying parameters check the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program gt Section 6 5 1 Temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 This area is used to set DP Slaves to Temporary slave reservation using the temporary slave reservation function Initial value 0000n 0 Not specify the DP Slave to Temporary slave reservation 1 Specify the DP Slave to Temporary slave reservation b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 6 15 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 4 Each bit represents 32 31 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 57 56 55 54
31. det ius E4DCH Verify that another Acyclic communication or alarm executed to the same DP Slave request has been completed and then retry E4DDH There is no executable resource E4DEH There is an invalid parameter setting Check the parameter settings and then retry 9 18 9 5 Error Codes To the next page 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA ries Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action 1 Check the PROFIBUS cable wiring status and start completion status of the DP Slave and then retry For the start completion status of the DP Slave refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When Acyclic communications have been 1 The DP Slave is not able to respond continuously executed to the same DP Slave check 2 Because of current processing of a Class2 service D the execution intervals and retry the DP Slave cannot handle the next service er For the execution intervals of the Acyclic 3 The INITIATE service has not been executed aa E4DFH ace communication refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 A transmission timeout has occurred after execution of A 3 Retry after execution of the INITIATE service the INITIATE service A N a 4 Increase the set transmission timeout value of the 5 A system switching occurred during service execution f INITI
32. 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23591 5C27n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 20 Parameter setting status area Active station Un G23584 to Un G23591 25 23589 5C25H 23590 5C26H 23591 50271 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo 5 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Un G23592 to Un G23599 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to Reserved station by the slave parameters Initial value 00001 The set data are stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON FUNCTIONS pa S3 n E 0 Normal DP Slave or not configured station 9 oe Lu 1 Reserved station BES Oas 2uq Eob Address i amp gt DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO wee 23592 5C28x 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 51 4 4 3 2 14 Each bit represents the n th DP Slave 23593 5C29n 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 g 23594 5C2An 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 n 23595 5C2Bn 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 v m 23596 5C2Cu 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 Z
33. 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 68 3 Tp ms value Tp 2 2 4 2 x 0 01 3 x 1 0 35 38 1 ms 4 Scan ms value Scan 5 ms 5 Nand value Nand 3 From the above 1 to 4 Tscu ms is Tscu TcpuA Tsw Tp Scan x 2 8 21 567 38 1 5 x 2 77 667 ms Therefore the redundant system switching time Tsca ms is Tsca Tscu Nand x 20 77 667 3 x 20 137 667 ms 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system MELSEC TE cries 4 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER4 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the QJ71PB92V Table4 1 Function List eLS eG Q series e Boge Reference Function Description Section PROFIBUS DPVO _ Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QU71PB92V enabling the I O data exchange of max 8192 bytes I O data exchange we Section 4 1 1 Note that when QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units in a redundant system up to 124 DP Slaves can be connected Acquisition of diagnostic Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slaves and extended diagnostic during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O Section 4 1 2 information signals g By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a Global control function i Section 4 1 3 group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available
34. DP Slave 30 modules Segment 2 L DP Slave DP Slave ieee DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 Repeater 2 L A DP Slave 30 modules Segment 3 L DP Slave DP Slave eddi DP Slave FDL address 61 FDL address 62 FDL address 89 Repeater 3 1 N 7 J Repeater 3 2 DP Slave 29 modules Segment 4 Segment 5 Ll DP Slave Teses DP Slave DP Slave oeae DP Slave FDL address 90 FDL address 120 FDL address 121 FDL address 125 J J R4 y DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave 5 modules Figure 2 3 When 125 DP Slaves are connected 1 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 4 When multiple DP Masters are connected Multi master system More than one DP Master with different FDL addresses can be connected to the same network 2 8 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 fel series 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration OVERVIEW This section explains configuration of a redundant PROFIBUS DP system in which the QJ71PB92Vs are mounted For the redundant system using the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 4 8 2 rA O F 1 System equipment O mS The following table show
35. DP Slaves repeaters 2 lt 32 1 Including the QJ71PB92V 2 A repeater is counted for both segments c Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJ71PB92V and any DP Slave d Number of connectable DP Slaves per QJ71PB92V Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V e Multi master system When a communication chip of ASPC2 STEP C mode or equivalent is used the DP Master cannot be connected to the PROFIBUS DP in which the QJ71PB92V is included To use a DP Master with such a communication chip configure another network For the communication chip currently used consult its manufacturer 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC KE eries 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 1 Maximum configuration with no repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 31 OVERVIEW 2 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted Z as number of modules E ao Power 11QJ71 o supply QCPU pagay be module 38 Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave ae DP Slave 2 FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 31 2 X J ra v DP Slave 31 modules D Figure 2 1 Maximum Configuration With No Repeater Connected 1 When using redundant CPUs c
36. PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area This area stores diagnostic information settings and actual diagnostic information 1 Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 The time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON is set in this area Initial value 20 seconds Table3 15 Diagnostic Information Non notification Time Setting Area Un G2084 Description Set the time during which diagnostic information is not notified Unit seconds Set Value 0 to 65535 This setting prevents temporary error detection e g when turning ON a DP Slave after turning ON the QJ71PB92V When diagnostic information is generated within the time duration set by this setting the conditions are as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e No error code and detailed data is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G2307 to Un G23321 and or Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 POINT Set a value into the Diagnostic info
37. Watchdog for time sync x POINT Set the time during which the transmission interval of the clock data sent from the time master is monitored Setting range 0 to 65535 Unit x 10 ms Default 0 x 10 ms 4 The upper limit of the setting range varies depending on the QCPU mounted with the QJ71PB92V For details refer to the manual for the QCPU used 1 When Error action flag is checked outputs of all DP Slaves are cleared when a communication error occurs even in one DP Slave To restart output perform either of the following operations e Turn OFF the Data exchange start request signal Y00 and then turn it ON e Reset the QCPU 2 When using the PROFIBUS DPV1 or PROFIBUS DPV2 function set a Min slave interval value greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr C gt Section 3 5 1 If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV1 or PROFIBUS DPV2 function may take time 6 7 6 3 Master Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG lA cries 6 4 Bus Parameters Set the PROFIBUS DP parameters gt Normally the bus parameters are used as default values 3 When changing some of the bus parameters make sure of the PROFIBUS DP standard in advance 1 Start procedure l Click the Bus Parameters button in the Master Settings window s Be O n r nO 2 Setting items
38. eG Q series b Information of status 1 and 2 The diagnostic information generated on DP Slaves is stored to status 1 and 2 and corresponding bits turn ON 1 I O data exchange between a DP Master and DP Slaves is continued even if any of the following errors occurs The following table lists the meaning of each bit actions to be taken and the station where the diagnostic information is detected Table3 17 Diagnostic Information Item Bit Description Action Detected in 1 When I O data exchange is started Normally operating This occurs every time I O Requesting transmission of parameters from DP data exchange is started bO DP Slave Slave 2 While I O data are exchanged Check the DP Slave status and communication line b1 Diagnostic information read request Check the DP Slave status DP Slave b2 0 Fixed Bene b3 The DP Slave is monitored by the watchdog timer Normally operating DP Slave atus b4 The DP Slave entered FREEZE mode Normally operating DP Slave b5 The DP Slave entered SYNC mode Normally operating DP Slave b6 0 Reserved 1 When I O data exchange is stopped Normally operating This occurs every time I O Excluded from I O data exchange according to the data exchange is stopped b7 f DP Master parameter settings 2 While I O data are exchanged Check if any parameter has been changed from the DP Master Class 2 on the network Check the DP Sl
39. gt Section 9 5 4 26488 6778h 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 1 eRe aay tO Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0h ere lS Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8h 26569 67C9n to 26608 67F0H Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869h to 26688 6840H 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Failed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750n is OFF 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 40 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY eries 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm read request with ACK 1 Request format Table7 36 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value 26432 6740H
40. hov H2 aa slave reservation RST 4400 I Turn OFF the initial setting J execution command X1B X1D XIF X20 x0 UO Writes the initial H H __ 4 __ FHOVP KO G14336 K906 eai PEA cyo I O data exchange X0 X1B X1D X1F start processing Hene h lt aitio MO UO m E G6144 DO k96 Reading input data Uo emoy 623040 D200 K25 Reads Slave status area Program for DP Slave control gt Section 7 1 1 2 a NO uoy Bwov D100 614336 K986 Writing output data Program for reading diagnostic information lt 5 Section 7 1 1 2 b Program for changing the operation mode Self diagnostics mode lt _ gt Section 7 1 1 2 c aia eg a Gages gS a A TEND d Figure 7 11 I O Data Exchange Program Example MOV instruction 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T7 12 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le eries 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information 1 Assignment of devices in program examples The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 9 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Extended diagnostic information rea
41. i amp o Z O O Z Le Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator lt gt io f PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION SETTINGS AND ononon ooo000 ononon ouonod ouon0u omonod ooo0o00 ouonod ouon0u ouonod ouonou 000000 ds ononon ouonod DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB Figure 4 30 System Switching due to QJ71PB92V Error PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 31 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC A ni The following lists the QJ71PB92V errors that may cause system switching Table4 9 Errors by Which System Switching Request is Automatically Generated Error Code Error Description E4E2u Hardware failure E5A1H F101H No DP Slaves are set to perform I O data exchange in the parameter settings F10En F10FH Hardware failure F1FFH An error has occurred during processing of system switching Standby system papi Control system 1 Systems are not switched when the power turns OFF and then ON or in Separate mode For details on the error codes refer to Section 9 5 eeeeeeeveeaeeeoevoeeaeoeeoeeoevoeeeoeeeeeeeeoeeeeeeeaeeneeeaeeeeeoee ee 0 4 32 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 F
42. 2048 QO6UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH z Q26UDEH Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU 9 MELSECNET H remote I O station 256 m rd SZ ea ane Zujw zu 20 i nee now o z FE m n a Lu D Fa 0 rA Fa 0 O o a a wk 795 Sk ae 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 20 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 2 Number of automatic refresh parameter settings for the QJ71PB92V The number of automatic refresh parameter settings for the QJU71PB92V varies depending on the automatic refreshing setting method for I O data a When Block Transfer is used When the automatic refresh of I O data is set by Block Transfer i e I O data of all DP Slaves are refreshed into the same kind of device up to five automatic refresh parameters can be set per QU71PB92V oP Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access Enter the device addresses for buffering 1 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer fate DO D15 Block Transfer aren D5000 D5015 D10000 D10249 Up to 5 automatic refresh V Comm Trouble Area parameters can be set V Extd Comm Trouble Area D10300 D10426 D10500 D10524 IV Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and master module using C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh I Consistency PLC code options C Data transfer only C User variables AIDUTs Contents of user library start of data t
43. 22 21 20 19 18 17 s ii 23651 5C63x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23652 5C64H 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23653 5C65 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23654 5C66 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23655 5C67H 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23656 5C68x 1 1 1 1 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b12 of address 23656 5C68x are fixed to 0 Figure 3 35 System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 By turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 the DP Slaves specified in the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 become the target for system switching System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Specifies system switching condition Un G23648 to Un G23656 ON OFF Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON OFF Data exchange start completed signal X00 system switching _ condition eed hehehe System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection Un G23664 to Un G23672 Figure 3 3
44. 23597 5C2Dn 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 lt 23598 5C2En 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23599 5C2Fu 1 1 4 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23599 5C2Fn are fixed to 0 Figure 3 21 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Un G23592 to Un G23599 g Z 0 O a oO no 6 ay Se Q HZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 33 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 6 Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to temporary slave reservation by the temporary slave reservation function Initial value 0000H The setting is stored when the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON c Section 3 4 13 0 Normal DP Slave reserved or not configured station 1 Temporary slave reservation Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23600 5C30n 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 Each bit represents 23601 5C31H 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 penin PE Sigve 23602 5C32x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23603 5C33u 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23604 5C34n 80 79 78 7
45. 9 QJ71PB92D can be easily replaced with QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V has a function for replacing the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V lt gt Section 4 9 Since the existing network configuration and sequence programs for the QJ71PB92D can be utilized a faulty QU71PB92D can be smoothly replaced with the QJU71PB92V QJ71PB92D failed oooo00 G amp 5 QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible function Replaced L Figure 1 4 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 1 1 Features 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the QU71PB92V 2 1 Applicable System Programmable controller CPU Mountable CPU module This section describes applicable systems 1 Mountable modules No of mountable modules and mountable base unit a When mounting to CPU module The following shows the mountable CPU modules No of mountable modules and mountable base unit of the QJ71PB92V module Power shortage may occur depending on the combination with other mounted modules or the number of mounted modules When mounting modules pay attention to the power supply capacity When the power shortage occurs review the combination of modules to be mounted Table2 1 When mounting to CPU module No of mountable Available base unit modules QOOJCPU U
46. 98 97 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 23044 5A04n 23047 5A07n 1 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23047 5A07u are fixed to 0 Figure 3 14 Slave Status Area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 Each bit indicates the n th DP Slave Turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 updates the information in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 turning ON 1 the bits of the DP Slave currently exchanging I O data Data exchange start yoo CFF request signal Slave status area OFF Normal communication detection ON ON Figure 3 15 Operation in Slave Status Area Normal communication detection When I O data exchange is normal When an I O data communication error occurs on a DP Slave the corresponding bit turns OFF 0 and it turns ON 1 again when normal status is restored Data exchange start yo9 2E request signal Slave status area OFF Normal communication detection ON ON a I O data exchange error occurred Restored from I O i data exchange error Figure 3 16 Operation in Slave Status Area Normal communication detection When I O data exchange error occurred 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 2 Slave status ar
47. Address DEC HEX 23057 5A11H 23058 5A12n 23059 5A13H 23060 5A 141 23061 5A15x 23062 5A16x 23063 5A17H 23064 5A 18x a All stations diagnostic status Un G23056 b This area stores the diagnostic information detection status of all DP Slaves Initial value 0000H If diagnostic information is detected in any one of the stations in Each station s diagnostic status Un G23057 to Un G23064 1 is stored in All stations diagnostic status Un G23056 0 All DP Slaves normal 1 Diagnostic error information detected Each station s diagnostic status Un G23057 to Un G23064 This area stores the diagnostic information detection status of each DP Slave Initial value 0000H 0 Normal including reserved temporary slave reservation and or not configured stations 1 Diagnostic information detected b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 6 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 Each bit indicates 32 the n th DP Slave 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 12 111 110 109 108 107 106
48. Comm Trouble Area Un G23321 Extd Comm Set the automatic refresh target device of Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Trouble Area Un G23454 Set the automatic refresh target devices of the following areas Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and master module Set a communications method between the DP Master module and the QCPU using Copy Instructions Select this item in case of communication using the FROM TO MOV instruction and dedicated instruction Select this item in case of communication using the automatic refresh With this item selected automatic refresh parameters will be written to the QCPU when a project is downloaded AutoRefresh When automatic refresh has been set for another intelligent function module using GX Developer specify the GX Developer project in the Project Properties window lt gt GX Configurator DP Operating Manual Doing so will update the automatic refresh parameters of the specified project when the project is downloaded Select this checkbox to use the data consistency function during automatic refresh 5 Section 4 5 Consistency This item can be selected while AutoRefresh is enabled De
49. D DP Slave ETER DP Slave DP Slave Taari DP Slave FDL address 90 FDL address 120 FDL address 121 FDL address 125 J J Y Y v DP Slave 31 modules DP Slave 5 modules Z 5 Figure 2 6 When Connecting 124 DP Slaves Non Redundant DP Slaves Only g A no 6 a EG 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 13 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 14 2 When using only redundant DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 30 Connection points counted as number of modules DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 a Redundant QU71 a Redundant QJ71 module CPU PB92V module CPU PBIAY Tracking cable Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 L J DP Slave FDL address 31 V DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 7 Maximum Configuration with No Repeater Connected Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units MELSEC TA eries 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 fel ceries 3 When using redundant and non redundant DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 Redundant DP Slave 29
50. Reads the alarm mov 26417 K4N200 J status of each station MO M200 Y18 X18 UO ht mov H1502 626432 Request code is set 1502H UO The FDL address of the HOV K1 G26433 target DP Slave is set FDL address 1 U0 MOV KO G26434 Empty area 0 SET Y18 Executes alarm read MO X18 UO 1 f mov 626446 D4000 Reads the respons code and error code UO D4000 HOA502 BHOY G26447 D4001 K322 Reads the execution result RST 18 Alarm read completion processing UO Reads detailed error lt gt D4000 HOA502 G26447 D4001 code Processing for failed completion Alarm read completion processing Figure 7 17 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition Alarm Read with ACK 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 48 7 5 4 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves This section explains the request and response formats in the time control function providing a program example 1 Making a sequence program For details on the program example refer to Section 7 6 4 I O data exchange normal Y19 X19 Time control execution command I O data exchange normal X19 Normally completed Un G26800 Response code Failed lt
51. Redundant Executes system Redundant FUNCTIONS supply CPU switching supply CPU module module Tracking cable mm DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 Bus terminator SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION failure Before recovery of the switching target DP Slave an S error occurred at another DP Z SENGS a x Lu m New standby system New control system z a Redundant QJ71 e Redundant QJ71 adile CPU PB92V switching mod le CPU PB92V Tracking cable o zZz 5 Fs Bus terminator 2 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave g FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 failure failure D 6 a SE a HZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 57 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 4 System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection Un G23664 to Un G23672 a System switching condition setting result Un G23664 The results of the setting in the System switching condition Un G23648 are stored 0 OR condition 1 AND condition b System switching DP Slave specification result Un G23665 to Un G23672 The results of the setting in the System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 are stored 0 Not system switching target 1 System switching target Address DEC HEX
52. SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a 7 Z O lt Q u 3 w a 2 Global control function f Section 4 1 3 group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available PROFIBUS DPV1 Acyclic communication This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing Suona zi i 2 with DP Slaves independently of I O data exchange ae This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have Alarm acquisition Section 4 2 2 been generated on any DP Slave 7 Support of FDT DTM Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the slave parameters and Section 4 2 3 i 2 technology monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V 2 PROFIBUS DPV2 E Time control over DP This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of Section 4 3 1 i 3 Slaves each DP Slave m This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and A Data swap function Section 4 4 We received 20 W When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory this SER k function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed 2 m ii Data consistency function f Section 4 5 Bos e Automatic refresh setting GX Configurator DP WW amp gt e Dedicated instructions BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions This function sets wheth
53. Set value 1400H 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE Set value 1410H 1 1H 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00x to 7Dx 0 to 125 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave Set value 00x to 7Du 0 to 125 2 Set CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value 00H to 7Ex 0 to 126 0 to 126 2 2H Set the length of the data to read Unit byte Set value 1 to 240 3 3H Set the slot No to read Set value 0 to 254 4 4H Set the index to read Set value 0 to 255 5 5H to 127 7FH T 17 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE Empty area Write 0000n Set value Fixed to 0000H PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 2 Response format a When normally completed gt W Table7 16 Response Format When Normally Completed o Offset Address Result A response code is stored 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE 0 0H Stored value A400H 2 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE Stored value A410H Bo 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE ao b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored z Stored
54. When using automatic refresh MELSEC TE eries This section explains a program for the case where the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using automatic refresh 1 Setting automatic refresh parameters The setting is the same as in Section 7 1 1 1 2 I O data exchange program example Automatic refresh Not needed when the initial setting is not changed Program for DP Slave control lt 3 Section 7 1 1 2 a SM402 SET 400 M400 XIB XID XIF x0 Yo uoy ji t h 4 MOV H289 62080 g uoy Mov K20 G2084 uoy Nov KO 623648 g uoy fHoy HI 623649 g uoy mov H2 623608 RST M400 SMI518 XIB XID XIF uoy po py ge 7 Ty 62080 uoy Ww o G2084 uoy mov Ko 623648 p uoy mov HI 623649 N uoy Mov H2 623608 Poy HO Kayo K2 X1B XID XIF x20 x0 uoy t FNOVP KO G14336 K968 Yo cyo x0 XIB XID XIF H r j CHO Program for reading diagnostic information gt Section 7 1 1 2 b T 77 END J Turn ON the initial E setting execution command Initializes Diagnostic info 1 invalid setting area Initializes Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area Sets conditions for system I switching J Sets a system switching DP Slave 1st 7 Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation Turn OFF the initial setting execution command
55. and set correct parameters without oe Hep cRR LERON There is a DP Master or DP Slave that has duplication l a duplicated FDL address on the same line When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system reset Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting 3 Section 6 7 F122H Check the wiring status of the bus terminator s An error has been detected on the line and PROFIBUS cable s F123H RSP ERR LED ON Or some master parameter is not If the terminating resistor and PROFIBUS cable appropriate wiring status is correct increase the set value of F124H the master parameter Min slave interval Since Error action flag is check marked in the The DP Master is in the clear request master parameter settings the clear request has F125H RSP ERR LED ON D been sent to all DP Slaves transmission status e To disable transmission of the clear request uncheck Error action flag F1FEH FAULT LED ON Hardware taiiire Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative F1FFH explaining a detailed description of the problem The standby master FDL address is out of Reset Switch 1 in the intelligent function module FBOOH FAULT LED ON the range switch setting L37 Section 6 7 Reset the following items e FDL address in the master parameter setting of The FDL address of the control master is j FB01H FAULT LED ON GX Configurator DP lt gt Section 6 3 duplicated with that of the standby master e Switc
56. cries 2 Acyclic communication request execution instruction area Un G23808 Set the execution instruction for acyclic communication in this area When a bit is turned ON 1 the request instruction corresponding to the bit is executed Initial value 0000n 0 Not execute 1 Execute Address DEC HEX b15 to b8 b7 to 23808 5D001 00n Fixed See below Bit Description Initial value bO Execution instruction of request instruction No 1 0 b1 Execution instruction of request instruction No 2 0 b2 Execution instruction of request instruction No 3 0 b3 Execution instruction of request instruction No 4 0 b4 Execution instruction of request instruction No 5 0 b5 Execution instruction of request instruction No 6 0 b6 Execution instruction of request instruction No 7 0 b7 Execution instruction of request instruction No 8 0 Figure 3 30 Acyclic Communication Request Execution Instruction Area Un G23808 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 This area stores the request acceptance status and request execution completion status of acyclic communication 3 Address DEC HEX b15 to b8 b7 to bO 25120 6220H See below See below T
57. for mode 3 3 4 4 address of the input data of each DP Slave 22909 to 22911 System area Use prohibited _ 597Du to 597FH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is utpu i 22912 to 23036 Output data start address area Section used to store the start address buffer memory 0 R 59804 to 59FCn for mode 3 3 4 4 address of the output data of each DP Slave 23037 to 23039 System area Use prohibited 59FDu to 59FFu 23040 to 23047 Slave status area Normal This area stores the communication status of Section 0 R 5A00x to 5A07H communication detection each DP Slave 3 4 5 23048 to 23055 Slave status area Reserved This area stores the reserved or temporary 0 R Section 5A08x to 5AOFH station setting status slave reservation setting of each DP Slave 3 4 5 23056 to 23064 Slave status area Diagnostic This area stores the diagnostic information 0 R Section 5A10x to 5A18 information detection generation status of each DP Slave 3 4 5 23065 to 23070 System area Use prohibited 5A19x to 5A1Ex 23071 Local station error information This area stores the error information of the 0 R Section 5A1FH area local station QJ71PB92V 3 4 2 In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 23072 to 23321 Diagnostic information area used to store the diagnostic information of the 0 R Section 5A20x to 5B19x for mode 3 error occurred on each DP Slave during 3 4 6 communication 1 This
58. refer to section 7 9 1 EJPOINT The program for the temporary slave reservation must be executed before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 s gt Section 7 9 1 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T7 86 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC TE cries CHAPTER8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS A dedicated instruction is defined as an instruction designed to make programming easy for use of the intelligent function module functionality This chapter describes the dedicated functions available for the QU71PB92V 1 List of dedicated functions The following list shows the dedicated instructions available for the QJ71PB92V Table8 1 List of Dedicated Instructions Dedicated Cres Reference 3 Description g instruction section Reads data from the buffer memory of a specified module ensuring data f BBLKRD Section 8 2 consistency Writes data to the buffer memory of a specified module ensuring data BBLKWR Section 8 3 consistency 2 Usable devices The following devices are available for dedicated instructions Table8 2 Usable Devices Internal device File register Constant 1 o R ZR K H T ST C D W 1 Available devices are given in the Constant field in each
59. sent to group 3 5 6 Bus terminator Bus terminator 3 i g Group 8 Group 3 Group 3 Group 3 D DP Slave n DP Slave 1 DP Slave 2 DP Slave 3 ian o Z O O Z Le nA Input image memory data are refreshed at all times by polling ae lt cara 939 28s 4 During UNFREEZE execution Default gt Actual input data are input to the input memory E or without being changed Normal status Be g ya lt During FREEZE execution gt Actual input data are input only once to the input image memory at the timing of the FREEZE service 9 FREEZE service Issued within the same group i m o i Input to external device a Figure 4 7 FREEZE UNFREEZE o z Ss Fs 0 fe oO no 6 QE z5 SE a az 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 9 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY eries 2 Group setting Set groups using the slave parameter Slave Settings window in GX Configurator DP Up to eight groups groups 1 to 8 can be set Multiple groups can also be assigned to a single DP Slave or Slave Parameters Wizard Slave Settings Model QJ71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION AA Slave Properties Name Slave_Nr_OO1 FDL Address 0 125 min T_sdr IV Slave is active I Ignore AutoClear Initialize slave when failing to respond F Swap O Bytes in Master Figure 4 8 Group Setting GX Configurator DP
60. window Selecting the Block Transfer radio button will set the same automatic refresh device for all DP Slaves Slave Specific Transfer o zZ E w o a im w 3 This allows reduction in the number of settings gt Section 6 6 4 Edit Devices button Displays the Save Specific Buffer Devices window lt 3 2 in this section To the next page PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 16 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Cel series Table6 8 Automatic refresh setting items Continued Item Description Buffer Devices Select this radio button to set the same automatic refresh device for all DP Slaves Devices are set in the following Input or Output Input Device used for the communication of input data is set Default D1000 For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points To use I O Mapping set a word device Block Transfer Output Device used for the communication of output data is set Default D2000 For a bit device setting must be made in units of 16 points To use I O Mapping set a word device Automatic refresh target for each module can be checked in Documentation of I O Mapping For details on Documentation of I O Mapping refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual Set the automatic refresh target device of the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to
61. 0 set refresh target devices storing data 35 gt Section 6 6 2 other than I O data 1 To the next page Figure 6 8 Automatic refresh parameter setting procedure o zZ E w o a im w 3 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 14 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter setup procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING Is the auto refresh to be set for an intelligent function module NO other than the QJ71PB92V using GX Developer or GX Works2 When using GX Developer Specify a GX Developer project in the Project Properties window When using GX Works2 Operate both GX Configurator DP and GX Works2 with reference to the method described in the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual GX Configurator DP Operating Manual In the CPU Device Access window select AutoRefresh When using the data consistency function enable the Consistency setting in the Master parameter settings Write the auto refresh parameters to the QCPU 1 Completed L gt Section 6 6 2 gt Section 6 3 lt gt Section 6 6 3 Figure 6 8 Automatic refresh parameter setting procedure Continued M ELSEG seres 1 When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system write the same parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 6 15 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter s
62. 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 3 alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 4 alarm data No 8 26448 6750H b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Bit Bit Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 3 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK 1 45 Completion status of response to alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed To the
63. 1 Bus terminator DP Slave FDL address 31 pi V DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 4 Maximum Configuration with No Repeater Connected Non Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 11 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units SETTINGS AND OVERVIEW N z O T 5 o Le Z Q SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES BEFORE PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 12 b Maximum configuration with a repeater connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 60 Repeater 1 Connection points counted as number of modules DP Master Class 1 DP Master Class 1 Control syst Standby syst oniro SSE FDL address 0 any System FDL address 1 Power Redundant QU71 Power Redundant QU71 supply Cpu pBg2v supply cpu PB92V module module Tracking cable Segment 1 Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave wae ee DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 30 pa Repeater 1 v DP Slave 29 modules Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave PEPEE DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 61 X vV J DP Slave 31 modules Figure 2 5 Maximum Configuration w
64. 1 services due to the following being exchanged with DP Slaves may be initialized Inputs and outputs are turned OFF e Cable fault influence of noise gt Sections 5 5 1 and 5 5 2 e System switching occurred in redundant system Especially when this occurs in redundant system switching outputs of the relevant DP Slaves momentarily turn OFF Therefore fully examine if the system has no problem K gt Section 7 9 4 For program examples on the acyclic communication refer to the following e Single CPU system 3 Section 7 4 e Redundant system L gt Section 7 9 4 SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 13 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have been generated on any DP Slave DP Master Class 1 Power QU71 supply QCPU pBg2 module I Alarm generation DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 8 Figure 4 10 Alarm Acquisition 1 Requests available on the QJ71PB92V There are the following two ways for acquiring alarms using the Alarm read request without ACK and Alarm ACK re
65. 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23064 5A18n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 19 Each Station s Diagnostic Status Un G23057 to Un G23064 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 4 Parameter setting status area Active station Un G23584 to Un G23591 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are set to Normal DP Slave by the slave Fi parameters Initial value 0000n The set data are stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON 3 0 Reserved or not configured station 1 Normal DP Slave z z Address g DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Tg 23584 5C201 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6l5 4 3 2 1 Each bit represents 28 the n th DP Slave 23585 5C21H 23586 5C22H 23587 5023H 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23588 5C24n 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 4
66. 12 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Items For the QJ71PB92D compatible function z ire Set whether to continue or stop the I O data communication with the DP Slave when the CPU stop error occurs Switch 1 tw Continue No setting blank 9 Stop 0001H as zee eco Switch 2 9244H 6B 2 zZ oO ii Fob Switch 3 Wo gt 7 No setting blank Switch 4 If any setting exists delete it Switch 5 o zZ E w o a im w 3 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer 6 24 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability of the program and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 4 POINT When QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on extension base units in a redundant system dedicated instructions for the QJ71PB92V cannot be used The following lists the installation positions of the QJ71PB92V and corresponding program examples shown in this chapter lt Single CPU system configuration gt Remote master station lt MELSECNET H remote I O network configuration gt Power Power J71 supply QCPU eae supply module module QJ71 LP21 QJ71 PB92V QCPU Remote I O station Power supply module QJ72LP25 25 QJ71 PB92V lt Redundant system configuration QJ71PB92
67. 12 Procedure Using Alarm Read Request with ACK SPECIFICATIONS 2 Executing alarm acquisition Execute alarm acquisition by the following procedure a In the Slave status area Alarm detection Un G26416 to Un G26424 identify the DP Slave where an alarm is occurring o Z O O Z Le b Write the request data to the DP Slave into the Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 tw 26 c Turn ON the Alarm read request signal Y 18 oa el i d When alarm reading is completed the read result is stored in the Alarm response gas area Un G26446 to Un G26768 and the Alarm read response signal X18 turns Fob ON Ooo e Check the alarm stored in the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 x and turn OFF the Alarm read request signal Y18 a we POINT In redundant systems do not use the Alarm acquisition lt gt Section 7 9 5 5 For program examples on the alarm acquisition refer to the following S Single CPU system lt gt Section 7 5 Z e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 5 2 Or BG az 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 15 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 2 3 FDT DTM technology Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the slave parameters and monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V For details of the FDT DTM technology refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual CommDTM Personal
68. 2 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries Table6 1 Parameter Writing from GX Configurator DP Continued Target for parameter writing Description Debug mode MELSOFT GX Configurator DP 1 Only the directly connected PLC will be updated When clicking the _OK _ button parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU where cables including RS 232 cable or USB cable are connected O Writable X Not writable 1 Parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU that is set in Target System of the Transfer Setup dialog box However when Not specified is set in Target System parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU where cables including RS 232 cable or USB cable are connected EJ POINT When a tracking cable is not connected to the redundant CPU regardless of operation mode of the redundant CPU parameters are written to the system of the redundant CPU where cables including RS 232 cable or USB cable are connected Target for parameter writing When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system write the same parameters to systems A and B When some parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s The buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting el
69. 2 1 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 1 When E4434 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 1 is stored 5 Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E443 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 2 2H 1 When E4434 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 2 is stored lt 5 Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E4434 is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 3 3H 1 When E443h is currently stored in offset address 0 0H Detailed error code 3 is stored lt Section 9 5 3 2 When a value other than E443n is currently stored in offset address 0 0n Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 4 4H Empty area ban lS O EGEN Stored value 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE T 22 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC kaser 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_ SERVICE This section explai
70. 2nd module 12 Item Description FDL address FDL address 2 9 F Input data size 1 words 2 bytes ra I O data size Output data size 1 words 2 bytes tw 28 a ane Zujw zu Zou hee nan o zZ E m n ad W m PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T7 A PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY series c Parameter settings on GX Configurator DP lt Master parameters gt DP Master Parameters Wizard Master Settings The transmission speed is set a PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 1 5 Mbps v Bus Pardmeters Set the FDL address of the QJ71PB92V FDL address 0 0 125 Starting 1 0 number ooo 0x0 OxFEO ia ite ue No of the QJ71PB92V TONA ETE n IgIts 9 Min slave interval M Calculate time 94 1 65535 IV Use Min slave interval for Target Token Rotation Time T_tr Polling timeout 50 1 65535 IV Slave watchdog MV Calculate time 5 1 65025 Estimated bus cycle time 9 376 ms Watchdog for time sync 0 0 65535 Cancel Default lt Slave parameters gt pp Slave Parameters Wizard Slave Settings Model aan Revision Vendor RERKRKXX KEKE Slave Properties Name Slave _Nr_001 Set the FDL address of the DP Slave FDL Address 1 0 125 thin T_sdr 11 1 255 Group identification number I Gpl l Gp2 l Gp3 l Gp4 l Gp5 l Gp amp l GipZ l Gps Set this for normal DP Slave ia iz Ignore AutoClear I Initialize slave when failing to
71. 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU SYSteM 0 cece tettee eee etie ee eee eneeee eee teeeeeeetaeeeeeeeteeeeeeee 5 2 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system ccceeeeeeeeeeteee eee ettne ee eee eeeee eee eaeeeeeeeteeeeeeesnaeeeeeee 5 3 9 8 Part NAaMeS aNnd Settings satara rrei A EART ERE E AE AAE O R ER 5 5 54 SOMACIAQGNOSUICS see celes assets dy ceeletteny cectethed ives tedysidletiepbi ides ned obecte a sl Mhedegeess a Micepebectet lames 5 7 Dido WIIG Ae A igs cane O O A EAEE OE sta AE a OA O GAA 5 9 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable Wiring ennea enaa anaa AAAA RAA EA EEA EAI TARAA ETNIA A AARAA TE 5 9 Saz Wining PRECAUTIONS rten a A E AAEE E E EE 5 12 CHAPTER6 PARAMETER SETTING 6 1to 6 24 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure siraan diniati atd ideaa aia idi innies 6 1 6 2 Operation Mode Setting neari T e E OREI EA A N 6 4 63 Masto Parame to e a E E E a N E E 6 6 6A Bus Farametel g erinra ar r r a e N ard eceeeeiinseee 6 8 6 5 Slave Paramotis endr a AAT a AA AA tists 6 10 6 6 Automatic Refresh ParameterS essiccsssrneeissrneessrrsnnsinnnaddstenadasttinnesittnanastaaaadattananaaddnaanatananaanan 6 14 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter Setup procedure 2 eccceeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecesnecaeeeeeeeeeeees 6 14 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings cece ceeceeeee eee eeeenneeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeessenteeeeeseaes 6 16 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters cc ccceec
72. 75kbps 187 5kbps 500kbps 1 5Mbps 3Mbps 6Mbps 12Mbps 100 m to 1200 m Differs depending on the transmission speed Max no of repeaters 3 repeaters Number of connectable modules Per segment 32 per segment including repeater s Number of connectable modules Per network 126 per network total of DP Masters and DP Slaves Max no of DP Slaves 125 per QU71PB92V 1 60 per QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D 1 In normal service mode Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes Max 32 bytes per DP Slave per DP Slave 2 In extended service mode Max 1920 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave Input data I O data size Output data 1 In normal service mode Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes Max 32 bytes per DP Slave per DP Slave 2 In extended service mode Max 1920 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave No of occupied I O points 32 I O assignment 32 special 32 I O assignment 32 intelligent points 9 i 9 points points 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves when QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units in a redundant system AP PX 2 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries 2 Functional comparisons TableAPPX 4 Functional Comparisons Function QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D TROUBLESHOOTING
73. 9 27 I INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE eseeseseeseese 7 23 Input data area for mode i 3 25 Input data start address area for mode 3 eesees9 3 28 I O data exchange Cvccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccocs AD I O data exchange arca cccccccccccccccccccccccscsccces 3 24 INDEX 1 TROUBLESHOOTING n Ww fal Z i a a lt T L List of I O signals ccoooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000 3 4 Local FDL address display area seeseeseeeeseeseesees 3 22 Local station error information area eeeeeseeeeeeeee 3 21 Local station information areareeeccccceccceccceceeeee 3 21 M Master parameters POCCOOO COOOL OOO OOOO OOO OCOOOLOOOOOOOOOCE 6 6 Max bus cycle time COCCOOOO CEO COOO OOO OOO OO OOOO OOOOOLOOE 3 44 Min bus cycle time POCCOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOO LOCOCO OOOO OOLEE 3 44 Module READY signal X1 DB 3 16 0 Offline test status areae eeeeeeeecceoooo00000000000000 3 22 Operation mode change area seeeeeeeseeesseeeseee 3 23 Operation mode change completed signal X11 3 14 Operation mode change request area eeseeseeee 3 23 Operation mode change request signal Y11 3 14 Operation mode change result area seeeeesseeee0 3 23 Operation mode setting cooocooooooooooooo00000000000000 4 Operation mode signal X10 eceececcccccccccccccccocs 3 13 Output data area for mode 3 eeeeceeecceeececceeeeee 3 26 Output data start address area for mode 3 e e 3 28 Output status setting for the case of
74. Bus Parameter Settings Bus Parameters for 1 5 Mbps Slot Time T_sl 37 16383 0 200000 ms z min T_sdr 11 1023 0 007333 e z max T_sdr 37 1023 0 100000 ms 5 Pee 0 127 0 000000 ms 5 Setup Time T_set 1 255 0 000667 ms Target Rot Time T_tr 256 16777215 6 600000 ms GAP factor 1 100 HSA 2 126 2 Max retry limit 1 7 2 O Cancel Default Figure 6 4 Bus Parameter Settings window WwW Table6 4 Bus Parameter Setting Items S UE Item Description 9 2 lt Set the slot time maximum time for waiting for a response 2 Slot Time T_sl If this set time is exceeded an error will be detected E aE wn Setting range 37 to 16383 Unit x Teit Default Depends on the transmission speed TAR Set the minimum response time of responders Setting range 11 to 1023 Unit x Tpit Default 11 x Tit Set the maximum response time of responders Setting range 37 to 1023 Unit x Tit Default Depends on the transmission speed Set the repeater switching time the time required for switching the transmission direction of the repeater Set 0 when the network does not contain a repeater Setting range 0 to 127 Unit x Tit Default Depends on the transmission speed Set the setup time Setting range 1 to 255 Unit x Tsit Default Depends on the transmission speed min T_sdr max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui o zZ E w o a im w 3 Setup Time T_set Set the target t
75. DP Slave is stored Initial value 0000x 23333 5B25n to The latest extended diagnostic information max 244 bytes is stored Initial value 0000x 23454 5B9En Figure 3 26 Extended Diagnostic Information Area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 KJ POINT 1 The information in Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 is not cleared even if corrective action is taken for the relevant error that has occurred on a DP Slave To clear the information in Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 2 When b11 of the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 is set to ON 1 information is not stored in the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 3 42 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area This area is used to read the extended diagnostic information from DP Slaves OVERVIEW 1 Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose extended diagnostic information is to be read Initial value FFFFH Table3 18 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Request Area Un G23456 Set Value Description 0000 to 007DH Set the FDL address of the DP Slave 0 to 125
76. DP Slaves Item Description When DP Slave has no Hold Clear function for output data Disable the watchdog timer for the DP Slave The watchdog timers of all DP Slaves are batch disabled Even if the Hold Clear selection for output data is not allowed for the DP Slave its output can be held Example Watchdog timer setting example J Master Parameters Wizard Master Settings Name PROFIBUS Master Bus Parameters Baudrate 1 5 Mbps zl FDL address fo 10 125 Starting 1 0 number Enor action flag Min slave interval M Calculate time 0x0 OxFEQ I Goto Clear State 63 1 65535 Use Min slave interval for T arget Token Rotation Time T_tr Polling timeout 50 1 65535 Uncheck Slave watchdog J the checkbox Estimated bus cycle time Watchdog for time syne 0 65535 cn o Default When DP Slave has Hold Clear function for output data Set the Clear Hold setting for output data to Hold for the DP Slave Output data can be held with the DP Slave s watchdog timer enabled Example Hold Clear setting of output Data for ST1Y2 TE2 i Slave Parameters Wizard Slave User Parameters Select module 2 ST1Y2 TE2 272 Module Parameters Clear Hold setting Set it to Hold Clear Hold setting Enish Default POINT Whether or not output data are output from each DP Slave to external devices after stop of I O data exchange differs dependin
77. DP Slaves lt 126 1 Including the QU71PB92V b Number of connectable modules per segment DP Master DP Slaves repeaters lt 32 1 Including the QJ71PB92V PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION c Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJ71PB92V and any DP Slave d Number of connectable DP Slaves per QJ71PB92V Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V PARAMETER SETTING e Multi master system When a communication chip of ASPC2 STEP C mode or equivalent is used the DP Master cannot be connected to the PROFIBUS DP in which the QJ71PB92V is included To use a DP Master with such a communication chip configure another network For the communication chip currently used consult its manufacturer PROGRAMMING 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 A repeater is counted for both segments 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 DEDICATED 1 INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 1 2 5 4 _ 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network Section title The section of the current page is shown e Description of a redundant system Unless otherwise specified a redundant system in this manual is a system where QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on an exten
78. DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on extension base units The network configuration examples of when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on an extension base unit are the same as those of when the module is used in a single CPU system or multiple CPU system lt gt gt Section 2 2 2 For precautions on when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on an extension base unit refer to the following lt gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used 2 16 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 3 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on extension base units 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M eLS 26 Fel series 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No This section explains how to check the function version and serial No of the QJ71PB92V OVERVIEW 1 Checking the Rating plate on the side of the module The serial No and function version of the module are printed in the SERIAL section of the rating plate N MELSEC Q MITSUBISHI MODEL Serial number Function version Peres 1 i lt lt Relevant regulation standards a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Figure 2 9 Rating Plate z O T 5 o Le Z Q SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 2 Checking through GX Developer The following explains how to check the serial No and function version of the module through GX Developer The serial No and function ve
79. Description PROFIBUS DP processing time for the DP Master to perform cyclic communication with each DP Slave FDT Field Device Tool A tool by which the following operations are performed to DP Slaves on the PROFIBUS DP via a DP Master e Writing or reading parameters of DP Slaves e Monitoring DP Slave status etc DTM Device Type Manager A file in which communication settings and slave parameters are defined when FDT is used The DTM consists of CommDTM and DeviceDTM An abbreviation of Communication DTM CommDTM CommDTM is a file used to define the communication settings needed for transmission via a DP Master DeviceDTM Device DTM is a file in which parameters to be set for a DP Slave are defined ident N A specific number for each module that is connected to PROFIBUS DP HS Ident No is described in a GSD file of each module The UTC is based on the UTC which stands for Coordinated Universal Time UTC In order to adjust the time gap with the GMT Greenwich Mean Time the leap second has been added Time master A master station that can send a request for time control QJ71PB92V etc System A The system to which the system A connector of the tracking cable is connected System B The system to which the system B connector of the tracking cable is connected Control system The system that is controlling the redundant system and performing network communication Standby system The system for backup
80. Example 1 MSl ms value MSl ms 80 x 100 us 8 0 ms 2 Ptj ms value 7 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo Table3 25 Pt i Value DP Slave 2 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 108 0 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 108 4 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 108 S Treqw ms 0 081 0 066 0 095 R Response umel 150 150 150 Tst of i th station m fo Zz 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 150 x 10 1 5 x 10 0 1 150 x 10 1 5 x 108 0 1 He Max_Tsdrj ms 20 ha 0 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 106 2 9 x 11 x 103 1 5 x 106 2 9 x 11 x 10 1 5 x 108 Bee Tresw ms 0 066 0 081 0 081 For Ptw ms Bao TED 0 081 0 1 0 066 0 247 0 066 0 1 0 081 0 247 0 095 0 1 0 081 0 276 3 Tsdi m ms value S a Request response processing time Tsi of DP Master QJ71PB92V 200 i Tsdi ms 200 x 10 1 5 x 106 0 13 i 4 Lr ms value Lr ms 5 50 3 x 150 x 103 5 95 S Using the values obtained in above 2 to 4 3 2 Pta Tsdi my Lr Pt 1 Tsdi my Pt 2 Tsdi my Pt 3 Tsdi m Lr g i 1 S 0 377 0 377 0 406 5 95 1 16 5 95 7 11 Therefore the bus cycle time Bc value is as follows 3 Bc ms Max MSI 2 Pt Tsdi m Lr i 1 Max 8 7 11 2 8 ms ae z9 Or ob az 3 5 Processing Time 3 61 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Cel ries 2 When multiple DP Masters are used The bus cycle time Bc can be obtained
81. Flowchart Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA ries 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions This section explains how to check errors by the LEDs or by checking the LED status on GX Developer 1 Causes and actions The following table summarizes causes that can be thought from the LED status of the QJ71PB92V and corrective actions to be taken Table9 1 Causes and Actions LED RUN Status OFF Cause The watchdog monitoring time has been exceeded Action Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem RSP ERR ON A communication error has occurred Read the diagnostic information from the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 TOKEN OFF The token is not being rotated 1 e Check the PROFIBUS cable connections gt Section 5 5 1 e Check if the bus terminator is connected lt gt Section 5 5 1 e Check if the FDL address of each station is unique lt 3 Section 6 3 and 6 5 e Check if the FDL address does not exceed the HSA lt gt gt Section 6 4 PRM SET Flashing Parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted Initialize the QJ71PB92V initialization of the flash ROM and write parameters again L gt Section 9 6 Parameters of the QJ71PB92D were written with the QJ71PB92D compatible function disabled Parameters of the QJ71PB92V were written with
82. HEX b15 b8 b7 bO 3 22528 5800n FDL address of 1st module The FDL address of the 1st module is stored Initial value FFFFu z d a a a pS 22529 5801x I O data length of 1st module 22528 58001 0000H to 007Dx 0 to 125 FDL address 26 22530 5802n FDL address of 2nd module FFFFu No FDL address assigned The input data length of the 1st The output data length of the 1st 3 22531 5803n I O data length of 2nd module module is stored Initial value module is stored Initial value FFH 1 FFH 1 to 22529 5801H OOH to F4 Input data 00H to F4x Output data a length length 22776 58F8n FDL address of 125th module unit byte unit byte lt 22777 58F9u 1 O data length of 125th module FFu Input data not assigned FFn Output data not assigned x W a N Figure 3 11 Address Information Area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 1 The difference between 00 and FF is as follows 00H means that input or output data are assigned with the data length set to 0 FFu shows that assigned input or output data do not exist FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 27 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address DEC HEX MELSEC TA eries 4 Input data start address area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the start address
83. L Slot No is set 0 Index is set 1 Empty area 0 Executes Acyclic communication Request instruction No 1 is executed Reads the response code and error code Reads the execution result Acyclic communication completion processing Reads detailed error code Acyclic communication completion processing Figure 7 15 Program Example for Acyclic Communication READ service Class1_SERVICE 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 30 7 4 5 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le ceries 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition The following explains the request and response formats in alarm acquisition providing a program example 1 Making a sequence program For details on the program example refer to Section 7 5 4 I O data exchange normal Reads alarm status of each station Un G26417 to Un G26424 I O data exchange normal Y1 8 X1 8 Writes request data Un G26432 to Un G26434 Alarm generation SET Y18 O data exchange normal X18 Read the response code and error code Un G26446 Normally completed Reads the execution result Un G26446 Response code Un G26447 to Un G26768 Fail
84. Mbps Default 1 5 Mbps Name Baudrate Bus Parameters button Set bus parameters lt gt Section 6 4 Set the FDL address station number Setting range 0 to 125 Default 0 FDL address To the next page 6 3 Master Parameters 6 6 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o zZ E w o a im w 3 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING Item Starting I O number MELSEC TA eries Table6 3 Master Parameter Setting Items Continued Description Set the start I O number of the QJ71PB92V in three digits Setting range 0004 to FEO Default 000 Error action flag Check this checkbox when sending a clear request to all DP Slaves from the DP Master When a communication error occurs even in one DP Slave the clear request is sent to all DP Slaves Default not selected Not checked The clear request is not sent to all DP Slaves Checked The clear request is sent to all DP Slaves Min slave interval Set the minimum required time from the slave polling cycle to the next one This set value is enabled on all connected DP Slaves Set a value for the DP Slave that needs the longest time Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 100 us Default 80 x 100 us Calculate time Select this checkbox to automatically set Min slave interval bas
85. PROFIBUS DPV1 Acyclic communication This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing Santina 2A i 2 with DP Slaves independently of I O data exchange ae This function enables acquisition of up to 8 alarms or status information data that have Alarm acquisition Section 4 2 2 been generated on any DP Slave Support of FDT DTM Using a commercially available FDT reading writing the slave parameters and Section 4 2 3 i 2 technology monitoring the DP Slave status are executable via the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of Section 4 3 1 i 3 Slaves each DP Slave This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and s Data swap function Section 4 4 received When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to the buffer memory this function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed i Data consistency function i Section 4 5 Automatic refresh setting GX Configurator DP e Dedicated instructions BBLKRD BBLKWR This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is Output status setting for the mounted Section 4 6 case of a CPU stop error When the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system I O data exchange with DP Slaves
86. Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 1 When E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 1 is stored lt 3 Section 9 5 4 26449 6751H 2 When a value other than E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 2 is stored 137 Section 9 5 4 26450 6752h 2 When a value other than E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Response result Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 3 is stored lt gt Section 9 5 4 26451 6753H 2 When a value other than E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 26452 6754h to Empty area 26484 6774h Stored value 0000H 26485 6775n to Empty area 26488 6778n Stored value 0000H 26489 6779h to Empty area 26768 6890n Stored value 0000H 7 35 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING Buffer memory address 26432 6740H 26433 6741H eG Q series 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request 1 Request form
87. SOH SOSH HSH SOS OSHOHOHHOHOHOHHOHOSOHSSOHSHSHSOHSHO HEH OOOSHOSOOS 3 42 Extended diagnostic information read area esses 3 43 Extended diagnostic information read request area COCOOOO OOOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OCOOOOOOOEE 3 43 Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 COCO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOEEOOCE 3 1 2 Extended diagnostic information read response area COCOC OOOO COO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OO OOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOE 3 43 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 COCOCOO OOOO OOOOH OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOOE 3 1 2 F FDT DTM technology COCeececccccccccccoocooscocooooole 4 16 Flash ROM storage mode coooooooooooooooo00000000000 3 7 Function VETSION ceccceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvccces 2 17 Functions COCCOOOOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOOOOOOEOOOOOCE 4 1 G Global control area eeeccceccccccccccccccccccccccscvccces 3 45 Global control completed signal X04 scsseseseseeee 3 10 Global control failed signal X05 essssesseseseeeeee00 3 11 Global Control FUNCTION eeeeececccccccccccccccccccccccccce 4 7 Global control request signal Y04 esssessesesesee00 3 10 G BBLKRD eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccccesces 8 4 G BBLKWR ecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccceesces 8 65 H How to return the QJ71PB92V to Its factory set conditions COCOCOOOOOOO OOOO OOOOH OOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOOOOOOE
88. Sth byte of 2nd module to 14352 3810H 00H 7th byte of 2nd module Output data of n th module 18431 47FFH Figure 3 10 Example of Output Data Assignment 1st module 23 bytes 2nd module 7 bytes 4 POINT If a DP Slave with no output data is assigned its space in the output data area is taken over by the next station with output data as shown below Each DP Slave setting 1st module Output data Set 2nd module Output data None 3rd module Output data Set 4th module Output data Set Data length 0 5th module Output data Set 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area Assignment result in Output data area of QJ71PB92V 14336 3800n Output data of 1st module Output data of 3rd module Output data of 5th module Because of no output data setting for 2nd and 4th modules no area is assigned for them MELSEC TA eries 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA cries 3 Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the FDL address and I O data length of each DP Slave are stored in this area n z 5 gt Information of 125 modules is stored in the Address information area for mode 3 in the same order for each module Information for reserved or temporary slave reservation is also stored Pe Address 2 DEC
89. Table6 5 Default Values of max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui and Setup Time T_set Default Values of QJ71PB92V 187 5kbps 500kbps 3Mbps or less 60 100 150 250 450 800 0 0 0 3 6 9 1 1 1 4 8 16 max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui Setup Time T_set 6 9 6 4 Bus Parameters PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Aeres 6 5 Slave Parameters a Set parameters for each DP Slave i 1 Start procedure Right click the DP Slave icon in the PROFIBUS Network window Slave Settings Zz O E z ae 25 us Duplicate Slave Remove Slave o Zz Figure 6 5 Slave Settings window start procedure z 2 Setting items m 7 a Slave Settings window DP Slave Parameters Wizard Slave Settings 0 Model QJ 71PB93D Revision Ver MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION jaa 9 Slave Properties rT Name Slave _Nr_001 FDL Address 1 0 125 A ad min T_sdr T1 1 255 g Group identification number Gpl f Gp2 f Gp3 f Gp4 2 2 l Gp5 l Gps l Gpz l Gps SER a IV Slave is active Syne Output Freeze Input ES J Ignore AutoClear Initialize slave when failing to respond m g A M Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master o zZ E w o a im w 3 Default Figure 6 6 Slave Settings window Table6 6 Slave Parameter Setting Items a Item Description Model Displays the model name of the DP Slave Vendor Displays the vendor of the DP Slave Q A Revision Di
90. When normally completed Table7 19 Response Format When Normally Completed MELSEC TE eries Offset Address Result 0 0H A response code is stored 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE Stored value A401H 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE Stored value A411H 1 1H 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H The length of the written data is stored Unit byte Set value 1 to 240 3 3H Set the written slot No Set value 0 to 254 4 4H Set the written index Set value 0 to 255 5 5H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH T 21 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING eG Q series b When failed Table7 20 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 On An error code is stored lt _ 3 Section 9 5 3 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO 0 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO
91. When using the data consistency function automatic refresh by the GX Configurator DP turn OFF the Data consistency start request signal YOC Data consistency Data consistency start start request request signal YOC Data consistency requesting signal XOC Ie Data consistency function enabled Figure 3 7 Data Consistency Start Request Signal YOC Data Consistency Requesting Signal X0C 8 Restart request signal YOD a If the QJ71PB92V has gone down for some reason the FAULT LED ON the module READY signal X1D OFF turning the Restart request signal YOD OFF ON and OFF again restarts the QJ71PB92V b After the QJ71PB92V is restarted the status is the same as the one after e The programmable controller is turned OFF and back ON again e The QCPU is reset 9 Operation mode signal X10 This signal indicates whether or not the current operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 Table3 6 Operation Mode Signal X10 ON OFF Status Description ON Other than Communication mode mode 3 OFF Communication mode mode 3 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 13 3 3 2 Details of I O signals OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt Q u w a 2 PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 10 Operation m
92. a 1 Nation NG StationNo Y A X xX Total stations 1 Points Stat End Points Start End Points Start End Points Stat End Group No 1 32 1000 1mF ooo Pome f s2 1000 101F 32 oo00 Pomir Station No ls Mode Online Refresh parameters Interrupt settings E E Network parameters MNET 10H refresh parameters Module No 1 aes TEENAA ae P Transient transmission error history status oints Start PS 5 Overwrite C Hold Start End Link side PLC side Figure 7 23 Network Parameter Setting 3 PROFIBUS DP settings The parameter settings on QJ71PB92V DP Slaves and GX Configurator DP are the same as those explained in Section 7 1 7 61 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING Device MELSEC TE eries 4 Assignment of devices in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 60 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Description Device Description X1000 Data exchange start completed signal Y1000 Data exchange start request signal X101B Communication READY signal X101D Module READY signal X101F Watchdog timer
93. a CPU stop error COCO OOOOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OOOO OOOOH OHO OO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO 4 24 P Parameter SEttingerccccccccccccccccscccccccccccocsccccecs 6 1 Parameter setting status area Active station 3 33 Parameter setting status area Reserved station Performance specifications coooooooooooooooooo000000000 3 Pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface CONNECtOr eecccooco00000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 0 Processing TIME eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccece 3 50 PROFIBUS Cable eeceeccccccceccccccccccccccecocceeseees 5 10 PROFIBUS DP network configurationsessssesesesses 2 6 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions eeccceccccccccccccccccccee 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions cecececccccccccccccccccee 4 11 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions eecccecccccccccccccccccee 4 17 Q QJ71PB92D compatible fUNCtionssseseseseesesese000 4 39 R READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE sssssceseececceecccccccccccceeeseceee 7 17 Redundant system support function eeseeeeeeeeeeeee 4 29 Restart request signal YOD evccccccccccccccsoscccces 3 13 S Self diagnostics ccooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000000 D_7 Serial NO seescccccoco00000000000000000000000000000000000 2 17 Slave parameters cooooooooooooooo00000000000000000000000 10 Slave status area eccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcvccces 3 20 Slave status area Alarm detection sessessesseseeee2 3 35 INDEX 2 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection COCOCOOO OOOO OOOO O
94. and connectors access the following website e PROFIBUS International http www profibus com 3 Operation mode setting Set the operation mode for the QJ71PB92V using a sequence program 4 Configuration software Use GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later for setting QU71PB92V parameters Use of PROFIMAP or GX Configurator DP Version 6 or earlier is not allowed 5 Parameters a Parameter conversion Convert parameters of former models using GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later Parameter conversion can be executed by Change Master Type on GX Configurator DP After modifying parameters be sure to check the parameters b Auto refresh parameter check for the QJ71PB92D only If refresh target devices for other than I O data are set up in the QJ71PB92D check the refresh ranges The refresh ranges are different between the QJ71PB92D and QJ71PB92V or Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access Enter the device addresses for buffering I 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer Input Block Transfer Output Comm Trouble Area D10000 D10249 M Extd Comm Trouble Area pi0300 D10428 EE Refresh ranges are different Slave Status Area D1050 w poa between the QJ71PB92D and Data Transfer between CPU and master module using QJ71PB92V Copy Instructions AutoRefresh I Consistency PLC code options Data transfer only C User variables AllDUTs Contents of user library st
95. are not executable They are not processed SZ Dedicated instructions are executable if the data consistency function is disabled 4 o g A in the automatic refresh setting lt oe Oas 2W ii d MOV or FROM TO instruction Eog The data consistency function is not usable when data refresh are performed ee between the QCPU and the QJ71PB92V buffer memory by the MOV or FROM TO instruction S z n m i Z Fs S a 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 23 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error This function sets whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when a CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is mounted POINT 1 When the QJ71PB92V is installed in a redundant system the setting described in this section is not required The QJ71PB92V continues I O data exchange with DP Slaves until systems A and B go down regardless of the setting shown in this section 2 When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled the setting described in this section is invalid When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is used set the output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error by the intelligent function module switch setting gt Section 6 7 1 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error On GX Developer set the output status for the case where a CPU stop error occurs Set desired output
96. area Un G25121 to Un G26144 The execution result of acyclic communication is stored in this area Initial value 0000n For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 4 Address DEC HEX 25121 6221h to 25248 62A0u 25249 62A1n to 25376 6320n 25377 6321h to 25504 63A0u 25505 63A 1H to 25632 6420n 25633 6421n to 25760 64A0n 25761 64A1n to 25888 6520x 25889 6521n to 26016 65A0x 26017 65A1H to 26144 6620x Response area for request instruction No 1 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 2 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 3 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 4 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 5 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 6 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 7 Data size 128 words Response area for request instruction No 8 Data size 128 words Figure 3 32 Acyclic Communication Response Area Un G25121 to Un G26144 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 3 4 11 Alarm area This area is used for the alarm acquisition ai 1 Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 Set request data for alarm acquisition in this area Initial value 00001 For the reque
97. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO 23665 5C71n 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 14 Each bit represents the n th DP Slave 23666 5C72n 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23667 5C73x 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23668 5C74n 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23669 5C751 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 714 70 69 68 67 66 65 23670 5C76n 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23671 5C77n 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23672 5C78n 1 1 1 1 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b12 of address 23672 5C78n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 37 System Switching DP Slave Specification Result Un G23665 to Un G23672 POINT In either of the following cases check the System switching condition setting Un G23648 again A value other than 0 and 1 is stored in the System switching condition setting result area Un G23664 e Although setting is made in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 data in the System switching DP Slave specification result area Un G23665 to Un G23672 are all Os
98. buffer memory address for each DP Slave s input data is stored in this area Creating a sequence program utilizing the Input data start address area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 allows address specification of the Input data area without consideration of the input points for each DP Slave Information of 125 modules is stored in the Input data start address area for mode 3 in the same order for each module b15 bO 22784 5900x Input data start address of 1st module 22785 5901n Input data start address of 2nd module 22908 597CH Address DEC HEX Input data start address of 125th module 22528 5800x The start address buffer memory address of the input data of the 1st module is stored Initial value FFFFn 1800H to 27FFH_ Input data start address FFFFH Input data not assigned Figure 3 12 Input Data Start Address Area for mode 3 Un G22784 to Un G22908 5 Output data start address area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 the start address buffer memory address for each DP Slave s output data is stored in this area Creating a sequence program utilizing the Output data start address area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 allows address specification of the Output data area without consideration of the output points for each DP Slave Information of 125 modules is stored in the Output data start address
99. by the following calculation formula when there are multiple DP Masters on the same network TBc ms Bc i i 1 n Number of DP Masters Bc Bus cycle time of each DP Master 1 in this section The following shows an example where two DP Masters exist on the same network DP Master 1 executes polling DP Master 2 executes polling DP Master 1 executes polling DP Master 1 bus cycle DP Master 2 bus cycle time Bc 1 time Bc 2 Time TBc y Spy Wi te Figure 3 40 Bus Cycle Time When Two DP Masters Exist on the Same Network 3 62 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M ELS eG cries 3 5 2 Transmission delay time The transmission delay times of the input data and output data vary depending on the data ai consistency setting i The calculation formulas for the transmission delay time are shown in 1 and 2 below Note that the following symbols are used in calculation formulas 1 and 2 Bc Bus cycle time i Scan Scan time 1 When multiple DP Masters exist on the same network replace Bc with TBc i fae pS 1 When the data consistency function is disabled 26 When reading writing I O data by automatic refresh data consistency function disabled the MOV instruction or FROM TO instruction the transmission delay time is as shown below 25 a Output data delay time Table3 26 Output Data Delay Time Data consistency function disabled I
100. computer Ethernet PROFIBUS DP Power QJ71 QJ71 DP Slave status monitoring and supply QCPU E71 100 Pg92y parameter setting are available via module the QJ71PB92V I DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave supporting FDT DTM 4 POINT Figure 4 13 FDT DTM Technology Once system switching has occurred the function of the FDT DTM technology is disabled and cannot be continued When using the function of the FDT DTM technology in the redundant system pay attention to the following and fully examine possible operations in advance 1 A commercially available FDT must be connected to the control system The FDT DTM technology cannot be used in the standby system 2 The FDT DTM technology must be utilized for temporary applications If it is used for a constant application 2 when system switching occurs execution of the FDT DTM technology may be disabled even after reconnection to the new control system If this occurs wait for several minutes and then retry the execution 1 Parameter settings of DP Slaves temporary status monitoring etc 2 Constant status monitoring etc 3 The time during which the FDT DTM technology is re executable varies depending on the DP Slave If not re executable retry until it becomes executable 4 16 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 3 FDT DTM technolog
101. configuration check if the FDL address of the control master is duplicated with that of another DP Master If the same error occurs again after performing the above please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJU71PB92V Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 26 Fel series 9 6 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions This section explains how to return the QJ71PB92V to its factory set condition This procedure initializes the flash ROM of the QJ71PB92V Perform the following procedure for example when parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted The PRM SET LED is flashing o Z E e e T mo wW l faa O 1 Stop the QCPU 2 Connect the GX Developer to the QCPU and perform the following steps a to k by using the Device test on the GX Developer APPENDICES a Write 9 to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V b Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 INDEX d Write Fx to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V e Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 f When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 h
102. divided generating inconsistency in the input data The same applies to output data The following shows an example of data inconsistency when data are read from the QCPU during the input data transfer from a DP Slave to the buffer memory lt Before the data consistency function is used gt QJ71PB92V QCP Buffer memory DP Slave Updated area for data transferred from DP 1 3 Slave Read during Data transfer Not updated area for data data transfer in process transferred from DP Slave Figure 4 20 Example of Input Data Inconsistency b When the data consistency function is enabled it makes reading from the QCPU wait until data transfer from a DP Slave to the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Input data area is completed and the reading is executed upon completion of the data transfer Alternatively the QJ71PB92V stands by for data transfer to DP Slaves until writing from the QCPU to the QJ71PB92V buffer memory Output data area is completed and executes the data transfer upon completion of the writing lt After the data consistency function is used gt QCPU QJV1FB92V DP Slave Buffer memory iS 0 aIo 1 i 0 3 2 SUA ris 2 Updated area for data 3 o SU lt z i 4 tran
103. execution command X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word _ c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 8 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description DO to D95 Input data D1000 Diagnostic information read target D100 to D195 Output data D1100 Read target of operation mode change result D200 to D207 D208 to D215 Slave status area Normal communication detection Slave status area Reserved station setting status D216 to D224 Slave status area Diagnostic information detection 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh This section explains a program for the case where the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves using automatic refresh Program examples in this section are based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 1 Setting automatic refresh parameters Enable the automatic refresh parameters and the data consistency function The figure below shows the case that automatic refresh parameters are set by Block Transfer lt Auto refresh paramete
104. for each DP Slave Using GX Configurator DP check the parameters Cs GX Configurator DP Operating Manual If any different parameter is found write the same parameters to the QJ71PB92Vs in system A and B again Were the same parameters written to both QJ71PB92Vs in System A and B Parameters set in GX Configurator DP Is the PROFIBUS cable No iring correct Check the PROFIBUS cable connections 3 Section 5 5 wiring c Yes Are the devices that store the start command and output data in the sequence program within the tracking range Check if the devices that store the start command and output data in the sequence program are set as tracking devices L gt Section7 9 No Yes Store the tracked output data in the Output data area No Un G14336 to Un G18431 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 3 Section7 9 Were the tracked output data stored in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 within 1 scan after system switching Yes Completed Figure 9 6 When Output Data Turn OFF or Momentarily OFF in System Switching 9 8 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 4 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELS eG el series 9 4 2 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON The follo
105. for the CPU module used 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 4 2 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON 9 9 o Z E e O I v W pa a 2 O E APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system M ELSEG seres Maintenance Sequence program modification Parameter change in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Change of QJ71PB92V operation mode Recovery from error Powering OFF and then ON Reseting redundant CPU Replacement of QJ71PB92V Figure 9 8 Detail of Maintenance Start Connect GX Developer to the control system CPU On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer select Separate mode for Operation mode of the redundant CPU 1 Stop the system for which maintenance is to be performed standby system CPU Disconnect the PROFIBUS cable connected to the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Connect GX Developer to the standby system CPU j Set the operation mode of the standby system CPU to Debug mode 1 1 In Debug mode setting in Redundant parameter of GX Developer select Start with Debug mode 2 Write the set redundant parameters to the standby system CPU 3 Reset the standby system CPU or power OFF ON the standby system Perform maintenance of the standby system Maintenance Sequence program modi
106. function cannot be used together with the QJ71PB92D compatible function a Start procedure 1 Double click PLC parameter in the project window of GX Developer 2 Enter I O data on the I O assignment screen and click the Switch setting button b Setting items Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format Q25PRHCPU QU71PBS2V Cancel Figure 6 14 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Screen 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG lA cries 1 For the redundant system support function Table6 11 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Items For the redundant system support function u 5 Set the standby master FDL address when the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system If the standby master FDL address setting is failed an error code is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 lt _ gt Section 9 5 6 Disabled No setting blank E Switch 1 Enabled Refer to the following Set only when using the redundant system support function z 1 0 H E 58 Standby master FDL address Setting range On to 7Du 0 to 125 Switch 2 2 Switch 3 fe Le No setting blank lt Sid If any setting exists delete it 5 A N Switch 5 2 For the QJ71PB92D compatible function Table6
107. gt Un G26800 Response code Writes request data Un G26784 to Un G26792 SET Y19 Read the response code and error code Un G26800 Reads the execution result Un G26801 to Un G26812 RST Y19 Processing for failed completion RST Y19 Figure 7 18 Sequence Program Time Control Function T 49 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 7 6 1 Time data read request This section explains the request and response formats of the time data read request OVERVIEW 1 Request format Table7 43 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value Set a request code Set value 1600H 26785 68A1H to Empty area Write 0000 26792 68A8h Set value Fixed to 0000H 26784 68A0H CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 50 7 6 1 Time data read request PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 44 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0H A response code is stored Stored value A600H The year is stored Stored value 1984 to 2036 The month is stored Stored value 1 to 12 The day is stored Stored value 1 to 31 26801 68B1H
108. in use on the DP Slave side E574H There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave side E575H Incorrect parameter exists in the ACK request There is no alarm for which ACK can be requested Check the alarm status on the specified DP Slave and E581H The alarm specified for ACK request is not found retry TA Check if the DP Slave supports the alarm function or not E582H Use of the alarm function is not allowed and retry E590H E591H E592H E593H E594H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative E595H Hardware failure fc sa explaining a detailed description of the problem E596H E597H E598H E599H ES9AH E59BH Acyclic communication is executed to the same DP Slave Verify that the Acyclic communication is completed and E59CH There is no executable resource retry E59DH There is an invalid parameter setting Check the parameter settings and then retry To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 21 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms o Z E e e T v wW l faa gt O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE eries Error codes E59EH to E5A2H Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action Check the PROFIBUS cable wiring status and start completion status of the DP Slave and then retry When Acyclic communications have been continuously The DP Slave is not able to
109. is continued regardless of the setting until systems A and B go down Temporary slave reservation Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the Section 4 7 i function DP Slave type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Redundant system support When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and Section s i function standby systems are switched each other to continue communications This function is used to replace the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible i Se Ei When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJ71PB92V using the Section 4 9 uncti QJ71PB92D compatible function OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z 5 Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Key cries 4 1 PROFIBUS DPVO Functions 4 1 1 I O data exchange The QJ71PB92V can operate as a DP Master Class 1 on the PROFIBUS DP system and perform I O data exchange with DP Slaves Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling the exchange of I O data up to 8192 bytes 4 Up to 124 DP Slaves when QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units in a redundant system
110. lt gt Section 3 4 3 b Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 c The Operation mode change completed signal X11 turns ON when the operation mode is changed and the result of the change is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 o zZ E w o a im w 3 d Make sure that A3004 Normally completed is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 e Turning OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 turns OFF the Operation mode change completed signal X11 For a program example for changing the operation mode refer to Section 7 1 1 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 4 6 PARAMETER SETTING lt MELSEC TE cries 3 Error codes for the operation mode change failure If the operation mode change is unsuccessfully completed an error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 on the QJ71PB92V For error codes refer to Section 9 5 2 4 Precautions when changing the operation mode a When the operation mode change is attempted during I O data exchange When the operation mode change is attempted during I O data exchange the QJ71PB92V stops I O data exchange before changing the operation mode The Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns OFF Status in which the operation mode change is not executable
111. no roy H2 ee i Specifies the 2nd temporary 1 slave reservation z oO fee ii Turn OFF the initial i I setting execution command g SM1518 X1B X1D XIF UO 2 Initializes Diagnostic info i J F I LI Li LI iF moy pab 62030 invalid setting area Hov Ko au i Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non 1 notification time setting area UO rHov KO 623648 l Sets conditions for system I 7 switching 2 r uo Sets a system switchin 2 hoy H 623649 Ji y g 5 I DP Slave 1st Z UoN HOV H2 623608 l Specifies the 2nd temporary ESON E E O RD A T EET S E NEE E A E E N e EE slave reservation FWov Ho kyo K Turns OFF Y00 to Y1F fa UO Ww ki ferred He rites tracking transferre Og avoy D100 614338 kag data to Output data area lt tk a XIB X1D XIF X20 xO uoy Pare O95 E a FHOVE KO G14336 K96 Writes the initial output z D m data value E 29 YO Onn Co o XIB ib vir I O data exchange i ip cHo start processing 9 HO i NO ene 9 W KOG BBLKRD execution 7 z G BBLKRD uo K6144 DO K96 Reading input data HO UO Z Bho 623040 D200 K25 Reads Slave status area 7 Program for DP Slave control _3 Section 7 1 1 2 a l Na fe a ee ls ea fe a ee Je ey ee ie fas pe a fe ps o X0C 7 Py Ps KR uo K14336 D100 K96 sa ate ee eo eee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee fo Spat a i Program for reading diagnostic information lt _3 Section 7 1 1 2 b o a a aN a a M END Figure 7 36 I O Data Exchange
112. of function version D or later 4 An extension base unit cannot be connected to a safety CPU Remark eeeeeaeeaeaeoeaeoeoeaeaeeeceaeeeoeeeoeeeeeeeoeaeeeeeeaeeoeeeaeaeaeaeee When using a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for a C Controller module eeeeeaoeseeeeoeaoeeeaoeseeeeeeevoeeeoeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeaoeoe eee 8 POINT 1 The number of mountable modules is restricted depending on the automatic refresh setting on the QJ71PB92V C gt Section 6 6 4 For details refer to Section 6 6 4 2 To utilize the data consistency function and dedicated instructions use a QCPU whose first 5 digits of the serial No is 02092 or later 2 2 2 1 Applicable System 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 fel ceries b When mounting to remote I O station of MELSECNET H The following shows the mountable network modules No of mountable modules and mountable base unit of the QJ71PB92V module Power shortage may occur depending on the combination with other mounted modules or the number of mounted modules When mounting modules pay attention to the power supply capacity When the power shortage occurs review the combination of modules to be mounted OVERVIEW N Table2 2 When mounting to remote I O station of MELSECNET H z O T 5 o Le Z Q S SYSTEM Mountable base unit g Main base unit of Extension base unit module modules 1 remote I O station of remote I O station QJ
113. of range less and retry E490H Physical execution error detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E491H Execution error on the protocol was detected i corrective actions E492H Execution error on the application was detected E4A0H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A1H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A2H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E4A3H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available E4A4H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E4A5H Request not supported error was detected on the DP correctly set or not and retry Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E4A6H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E4A7H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E4A8H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E4A9H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 17 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication o Z E e e T v wW l faa gt O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA eries Error codes E4AAH to E4DEH Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action Access to an access disabled area was attempte
114. operation mode in the current Global control function operation status e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition FDT DTM technology Time control function E303H Failed to write to the flash ROM Initialize the flash ROM Or failed to initialize the flash ROM If the same error occurs again replace the QJ71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM See ee oo If the same error occurs again please consult your local E304H The flash ROM initialization mode processing is incorrect ea k o Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem E305H The operation mode of the QJ71PB92D was set with the Set the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V when the QJ71PB92D compatible function disabled QJ71PB92D compatible function is disabled The operation mode was changed during Class2 service E306H a After execution of ABORT change the operation mode execution of Acyclic communication Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Unable to change the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V E307H i Separate or Debug mode and then change the operation in the current operation mode of the redundant CPU mode of the QJ71PB92V E3A0H E3A1H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure ns re E3A2H explaining a detailed description of the problem E3A3H 9 14 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 2 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error codes generated when switching operation mode Q TROUBLESHOOTING communicati
115. or after is less than the number of read data z oO O e e o Z O ir E 7 zZ 1b 1B 0741 B 8 2 G BBLKRD 8 4 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEG FY aries Program example At the timing of M10 ON data of 960 points are read to DO to D959 from address 6144 1800 of the Input data area for mode 3 of the QJ71PB92V module start I O No 0 with data consistency ensured M10 XOG H BA G BBLERD U0 K6144 DO K960 Figure 8 4 BBLKRD Instruction Program Example 8 5 8 2 G BBLKRD 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC KEY eries Table8 5 Device Usable in the BBLKWR Instruction ai gt a Usable device S O Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Inde X Set data System user File function Constant i register register module device aa K H Zz 5 E Ss O E 20 n2 O 2 Pant oO 23 nO no Instruction Execution symbol condition z Command g G BBLKWR i GBBLKWR iy n Figure 8 5 BBLKWR Instruction Set data Table8 6 Set Data in the BBLKWR Instruction D Zz Set data Description Setting range Data type QJ71PB92V module start I O number 5 Un cs a f 0 to FEH T Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation BIN 16 bits n1 Start address for writing data Specified device range W Start No of the device storing write data Specified device range Device name S Z ue n2 Number of
116. repeaters 3 repeaters Number of connectable modules 32 per segment including repeater s Per segment Number of connectable modules 126 per network total of DP Masters and DP Slaves lt 3 Section 2 2 Per network Max No of DP Slaves 2 125 per QU71PB92V 5 Section 2 2 Per QJ71PB92V I O data Input data Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave size Output data Max 8192 bytes Max 244 bytes per DP Slave Number of writes to flash e AA aaa Max 100000 times ROM No of occupied I O points 32 I O assignment 32 intelligent points Internal current consumption 0 57 A 5VDC External dimensions 98 3 86 in H x 27 4 1 08 in W x 90 3 54 in D mm Weight 0 13 kg 1 The transmission speed is controlled within 0 2 Compliant with IEC 61158 2 2 Up to 124 DP Slaves when QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units in a redundant system gt Section 2 3 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 1 SETTINGS AND OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt Q u 3 w a 2 FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES BEFORE PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 1 Transmission distance Table3 2 Transmission Distance Max Transmission Distance when Transmission Speed Transmission Distance y Repeater is Used 9 6 kbps 19 2 kbps 1200 m 393
117. respond M Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master Set the I O data size Figure 7 4 Example of I O Data Exchange Parameter Settings T7 5 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 3 Assignment of devices in program examples The program examples given in Sections 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 6 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description X00 Data exchange start completed signal Yo00 Data exchange start request signal X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal X11 Operation mode change completed signal Y11 Operation mode change request signal X1B Communication READY signal X1D Module READY signal X1F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 7 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X20 I O data exchange start command SM402 ON for 1 scan only after RUN X21 Communication error detection reset command MO Refresh start request X22 Communication error area clear command M2 For operation mode change interlock X23 Operation mode change command M400 Initial setting
118. response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 1 alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 2 alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 3 alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 4 alarm data No 8 26448 6750n b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Bit Bit Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 3 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed T 39 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request Completion status of response to alarm
119. section 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC KE eries 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 1 Before executing a dedicated instruction gt Before executing a dedicated instruction be sure to confirm the following z a Turn ON the Data consistency start request signal YOC Before executing a dedicated instruction turn ON the Data consistency start request signal YOC Z Attempting to execute a dedicated instruction with the Data consistency start z request signal YOC OFF will result in non processing non execution o E Use the Data consistency requesting signal X0C as an interlock for execution of 28 dedicated instructions Execution command 1H Yoc xoc 2 G BBLKRD uo K6144 DO K960 2 S Figure 8 1 Interlock Example for Dedicated Instruction 5 Lu b Check that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled c If the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled use of dedicated instructions is not allowed They are not processed Dedicated instructions are executable if the data consistency function is disabled in the automatic refresh setting gt Section 6 3 2 2 i Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access 2 ra Block Transet 5 Comm Trouble Area Wwe I Extd Comm Trouble Area Q m z Oas zZ D im Pees A E ON 5 g g Make sure the checkbox is unchecked Figure 8 2 Data Consistency in Automatic Refresh PARAMETER SETTING 2 The BBLKR
120. specifications QJ71PB92V 2 O SMEL PROFIBUS cable Z T RxD TxD P red ol ra z g lu tf wi ro D0 fal wi 8k rae an a Z lt n 0 zZ w N Figure 5 6 PROFIBUS Cable Wiring Specifications o 3 Connector r Use a D sub 9 pin male connector for the PROFIBUS cable i The applicable screw size is 4 40 UNC z g z 0 g 6 or miZ az 5 5 Wiring 5 10 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM 2 a3 RAT 2 N M ELSEG Q series 4 Wiring specifications for bus terminator When the QJ71PB92V is a terminal station use a connector with built in bus terminator that meets the following wiring specifications VP 6 o Ry 390Q0 2 min1 4W RxD TxD P 3 o __ Ria 2200 2 min1 4W RxD TxD N 8 o Rg 390Q 2 min1 4W DGND 5 o ____ Figure 5 7 Wiring Specifications for Bus Terminator 5 PROFIBUS equipment The PROFIBUS cables connectors and other PROFIBUS equipment must be purchased or obtained at user s discretion For details on PROFIBUS equipment access the following website e PROFIBUS International http www profibus com 5 141 5 5 Wiring 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MWELSEC HY conc 5 5 2 Wiring precautions As one of the requirements to give full play to QJU71PB92V s functions and make up the system w
121. terminator and other information 1 Pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector The following shows the pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector D sub 9 pin female connector on the QJ71PB92V Table5 6 Pin Assignments of the PROFIBUS Interface Connector Pin No Signal Code Name Description Cable color 1 SHIELD 1 Shield protective ground 2 Open 3 B B RxD TxD P Receive send data P Red 4 Open 5 C C DGND 2 Data Ground 6 VP 2 Voltage 7 Open Z 8 A A RxD TxD N Receive send data N Green Figure 5 5 PROFIBUS Interface 9 Open _ Connector 1 Optional signal 2 Signal used to connect the bus terminator 5 9 5 5 Wiring 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM Mi aL 26 FY aries 2 PROFIBUS cable The following shows the PROFIBUS cable and wiring specifications gt ina a PROFIBUS cable z Use a PROFIBUS cable that meets the following specifications Type A IEC 61158 2 compliant Table5 7 PROFIBUS Cable O Item Transmission line lt Applicable cable Shielded twisted pair cable d SZ Impedance 135 to 165 Q f 3 to 20 MHz 28 Capacity Less than 30 pF m Conductor resistance Less than 110 Q km Cross sectional area 0 34mm2 or more Diameter 22AWG 2 Type Stranded Material Copper O Temperature rating 60 C or more an b Wiring
122. the 23064 Slave status area Diagnostic 2112 to 2116 sequence program Slave status area 5A10 to information detection 8401 to 8441 5A181 22784 to 22908 Input data start address area 5900 to for mode 3 Buffer memory addresses have been 597Cx 2128 to 2247 1 O start address Extended changed 22912 to 850 to 8C71 service mode MODE E only Modify the relevant parts of the 23036 Output data start address sequence program 59801 to area for mode 3 59FC AP PX 14 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE cries 4 Program replacement examples The following example shows how sample programs provided in the QJ71PB92D manual are changed for the QJ71PB92V For the A1SJ71PB92D and AJ71PB92D replace the programs referring to the following replacement examples TROUBLESHOOTING a Deleting the diagnostic information area type selection signal Y03 Relevant sample programs Sections 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 it 5 su4o2 ui H SET 4400 4400 KIB XID XIF xo Yo __ _ 11 HO K2080 H2B9 K1 A A i HO K2084 K20 KI are es eS i seT Y3 i bea PEENES E EEES E PE SE ESE SE ES E EEN EEE P RST M400 is Zz Delete the diagnostic information area type selection signal Y03 SET M400 M400 X1B X1D XIF x0 Yo E 1 H 1 t t 4 To HO K2080 H
123. the DP Slaves that are 23592 to 23599 Parameter setting status area Section f set to Reserved station by the slave 0 R 5C28xH to 5C2Fx Reserved station 3 4 5 parameters This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23600 to 23607 Temporary slave reservation f Section set to Temporary slave reservation by the 0 R 5C30x to 5C37ux status area 3 4 5 temporary slave reservation function Thi i d to set DP SI t 23608 to 23615 Temporary slave reservation S argens eon aves 7 Section Temporary slave reservation using the 0 R W 5C38x to 5C3Fx request area j 3 4 13 temporary slave reservation function 23616 to 23647 System area Use prohibited 5C40n to 5C5Fx System switching condition When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a 23648 to 23656 f e Section setting area Disconnected redundant system this area is used to set the 0 R W 5C60nH to 5C68n ne 3 4 14 station detection switching target DP Slaves 23657 to 23663 System area Use prohibited p 5C69H to SC6FH System switching condition When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a 23664 to 23672 f P Section setting result area Disconnected redundant system this area stores the 0 R 5C70n to 5C78n i DEE 3 4 14 station detection switching target DP Slaves 23673 to 23807 System area Use prohibited 5C79x to SCFFH 23808 Acyclic communication request This area is used to set which request is to be 0 RW Section 5D00n execution in
124. the other system control system Is the operation mode different between the QJ71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems Perform maintenance of the other system control system and place the QJ71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems in the same operation mode Yes On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer select Backup mode for Operation mode of the redundant CPU 2 Completed Figure 9 7 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the Standby System Continued 1 For how to change the operation mode and how to switch systems in a redundant system refer to the user s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used 2 When changing the mode from Separate to Backup use the same communication pathway as the one used when Backup mode was changed to Separate mode lt 3 gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used EJPOINT The following maintenance must be performed on both QJ71PB92Vs in the control and standby systems e Sequence program modification e Parameter modification in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Operation mode change of the QJ71PB92V 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 11 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system o Z E e e T mo wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TE cries 9 5 Error Codes This section explains the erro
125. the other buffer memory areas is held e Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 e Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 3 6 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 2 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 i gt a The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON when a g communication error is detected after the time preset in Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 has elapsed The following processing is performed at the same time that the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON e The RSP ERR LED turns ON 5 e The diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for Ei mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 58 The extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The corresponding bit in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON e The error information of the QJ71PB92V is stored in the Local station error information area Un G2307 1 25 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo b Turning ON the Diagnostic information detection
126. to 125 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 See below Bit Description Bit Description Read completion status of alarm data No 1 Read completion status of alarm data No 5 bO 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed AAEE Read completion status of alarm data No 2 Read completion status of alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 3 Read completion status of alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed b6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of alarm data No 4 Read completion status of alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed 26449 6751H The length of the alarm data is stored Unit byte Stored value 1 to 64 The alarm type is stored Alarm type Diagnosis alarm Process alarm 26450 6752n Alarm data No 1 Pull alarm Plug alarm Status alarm Update alarm Manufacturer specific alarm The slot No is stored 26451 6753n Stored value 0 to 254 To the next page 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING Table7 31 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued Buffer memory address Result The alarm status and seq
127. write data 1 to 4096 word BIN 16 bits a a lt Z w u 58 She Function E 8 7 This instruction allows data writing to the buffer memory of a specified module with data CER consistency ensured oO z Error F An operation error occurs in the following instances Error code 4101 y e When a value outside the setting range is set to the set data field e When the size which is obtained by adding the number of write data to the start lt address for writing data exceeds the buffer memory size e When the points available for the start address for writing data or after is less than the number of write data 0 Zz Z oO O a A e e o Z O ir E 7 zZ 1b D 07 41 B 8 3 G BBLKWR 8 6 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEG FY caries Program example At the timing of M 10 10 data of 960 points in DO to D959 are written to the Output data area for mode 3 of the QU71PB92V module start I O No 0 with data consistency ensured starting from address 14336 3800n M10 XOG PS n A ud K14336 DO K960 Figure 8 6 BBLKWR Instruction Program Example 8 7 8 3 G BBLKWR Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 2G EAseries CHAPTER9 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the troubleshooting and error codes of the QJ71PB92V Before troubleshooting the QJ71PB92V check that no errors have occurred on the QCPU or MELSECNET H remote I O network If any error is identified check the error details a
128. 0H to E3FFH Error codes generated when switching operation mode 9 14 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication 9 15 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms 00e 9 20 9 5 5 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error codes generated when executing time control 9 23 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QU71PB92V 9 24 9 6 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions eeeeseeeseeeseeerrreseerrreerrrerresreren 9 27 APPENDICES APPX 1 to APPX 20 Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QU71PB92V o oo oe ecceececeeccece eee ee eee ee eee eececeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaes APPX 1 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models 2 cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees APPX 1 Appendix 2 1 Specification COMPALISONS ccccecceeeeeeeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaaeceeeeeeeeseeseesecsaaaeees APPX 2 Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system ccccceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeseeecsnaaecaeeeeeeeeeess APPX 4 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs ccccceceeeseeeeecceceeceeeeeeeeeseeececececaeeeeeeeneees APPX 6 Appendix 3 External DiMe nsions cccecceeeeeceecececeeee eee ee eee ce cae eaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecsccaccuseeeeeeeeneees APPX 20 INDEX INDEX 1 to INDEX 2 A 11 MANUALS The man
129. 103H Communication mode mode 3 FFFFH Not registered No operation mode has been registered to the flash ROM o rA Fa 9 a a a EO 2 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 21 3 4 2 Local station information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 Local FDL address display area Un G2257 The FDL address of the local station is stored Table3 12 Local FDL Address Display Area Un G2257 Stored Value Description ge one The FDL add f the local station 1 0 to 125 e address of the local station FFFFH Parameter not set 41 When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system the following address is stored When it is in the control system Control master FDL address When it is in the standby system Standby master FDL address 5 Offline test status area Un G2258 The self diagnostics test details or test result is stored in this area For details on the self diagnostics test refer to Section 5 4 3 22 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 2 Local station information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M ELS eG cries 3 4 3 Operation mode change area This area is used to change the operation mode of the local station QJ71PB92V ai For changing the operation mode refer to Section 6 2 i 1 Operation mode change request area Un G2255 For execution of the operation mode change request set a desired operation mode 5 Initial value FFFEH i The initial value FFFEu is used for malfunction prevention mio If t
130. 15 b8 b7 bO o 2 1 7 z cas D 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored D Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 q Empty area 2 eS eee Stored value 0000H a value a b When failed Table7 26 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 OH An error code is stored 37 Section 9 5 3 z 5 b15 b8 b7 bO T 2 1 AIA m 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored 9 Stored value OOH to 7DH 0 to 125 a amp an Zujw 2 The CommRef No is stored SER Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 ZMA Eob Empty area oa o N e E Stored value 0000H o zZ E m n x W m bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T7 28 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le eries 7 4 5 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 27 Details of Program Example Item Description Request instruction No Request instruction No 1 Service name READ service Class1_SERVICE DP Slave FDL address FDL address 2 Data length 16 bytes Slot No 0 Index 1 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the user Table7 28 L
131. 2 7 9 1 8 1 9 2 Appendix 2 2 WARRANTY Additions CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT MANUAL ORGANIZATION Section 2 3 3 Japanese Manual Version SH 080571 D This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi programmable controller MELSEC Q series Please read this manual carefully before use to develop familiarity with the functions and performance and use it correctly CONTENTS SAFE TY PRECAUTIONS siecle Sianfsciestecdes Gis aaeeea a eaa eae AAN aa aa Aa raaa RAA aaa aaa Na hese sasbasdaneies iaaa a ataa aaraa A 1 CONDITIONS OF USEFOR THE PRODUC Tria aoaaa aaa E a a A 6 REVISIONS inin ate eee eas Lene ae ae A 7 INFRODUGCTION scsi a aa aa A e castabel seatecteaadataedee sae enugn a a aa ates tea cetecesact A 8 CONTENT Simien anena a a cas alerts toh ce ir e ahh cid oh dk a eel A 8 MANUALS cercaste eesti ge tts tot at te Steet a ted ts boa a oleae Soa casd ala tte atte a ihe eile ata elt cues A 12 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 00 ccccceceeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseaeesenneesteeeeee A 12 MANUAL ORGANIZATION tise pfs geen dated
132. 2 when clearing the following information e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM b When the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is turned ON and the processing at a is completed the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 turns ON oO c When new diagnostics information is generated while the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is ON the following information stays cleared No diagnostic extended diagnostic or local station error information is stored e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 7 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo d After the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 has turned ON turn OFF the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 FUNCTIONS e Taking corrective actions for the error and turning OFF the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 turns OFF the Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 f After the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92V checks for diagnostic information again If any diagnostic information has b
133. 2B9 K1 To HO K2084 K20 KI RST M400 Figure APPX 8 Deleting the Diagnostic Information Area Type Selection Signal Y03 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 15 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TA eries b Changing an input start address and an output start address Relevant sample program Section 7 3 X1B x1D XIF X20 x0 El m gt _ gt FROMP HO 1K2128 D100 KI Y i a v Hov D100 z0 a c FROKP HO 1 K2188 1 D101 K1 N 2 a Puig tot Zi 7 s TOP HO zi K4Y100 Ki cvo J Change the buffer memory address of the input start address Change the buffer memory address of the output start address X1B X1D X1F X20 X0 RY K FROMP HO 1K22784 D100 KI h Y0 7 mov D100 z0 PSS c SFR HO 1k22912 1 D101 KI N i Poy 10 ZI J s Top HO zi K4Y100 K Lb o y Figure APPX 9 Changing Input and Output Start Addresses AP PX 16 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC KE eries 7 O c Changing the input area and output area O Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 and 7 4 9 5 A N In the following example the sample program in section 7 2 is replaced X1B X1D XIF X20 XO a 7 a va TOP HO K960 K4Y100 KI
134. 2V does not detect the failure Communication failure 1 Communication failure 2 In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 Communication trouble area Un G2040 to Un G2079 1 Expansion Communication trouble area Un G2096 to Un G2110 1 Information on failure 2 Even while Y02 is ON another failure is detected Information on failure 1 Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Local station error information area Un G23071 In the QJ71PB92V Information on failure 1 A g While Y02 is ON another failure is not detected For details refer to the following manual 7 PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Figure APPX 5 When Another Communication Failure Occurs While Y01 is ON When the diagnostic information of the currently existing failure is cleared by the Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 even if the clear request signal YO2 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92D does not store the diagnostic information again The QJ71PB92V stores the diagnostic information Communication failure In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 Communication trouble area Un G2040 to Un G2079 1 Expansion Communication trou
135. 3 1 to 3 5 Chapter 4 Section 4 1 1 4 1 3 4 2 1 to 4 2 3 4 5 4 6 5 3 5 4 6 1 to 6 3 6 5 6 6 4 Chapter 7 to Section 7 1 3 9 4 Appendix 2 Section 2 3 3 5 3 4 7 4 8 5 2 2 6 7 7 7 7 9 8 1 9 3 9 4 1 to 9 4 6 Appendix 1 Section number changes Section 5 2 5 2 1 Section 7 7 7 8 Section 8 1 to 8 2 Section 8 2 to Section 8 3 Appendix 1 to Appendix 2 Appendix 2 to Appendix 3 May 2007 SH NA 080572ENG C Dec 2011 SH NA 080572ENG D e Rewritten to include the QJ71PB92D compatible function e Modified for descriptions of GX Configurator DP Version 7 02C Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS ABOUT MANUALS GLOSSARY Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 1 2 4 3 5 1 4 5 4 6 5 3 6 1 6 3 to 6 7 Chapter 7 Section 8 1 to 8 3 Chapter 9 to Section 9 1 9 3 9 5 1 to 9 5 6 Appendix 1 to 2 3 Additions Section 4 9 9 2 Section number changes Section 9 2 to 9 5 9 3 to 9 6 e Revision related to the support of GX Configurator DP Version 7 07H Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 2 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 4 to 3 4 6 3 4 13 4 1 3 4 4 4 5 4 8 4 9 5 4 5 5 1 Chapter 6 Section 6 2 to 6 5 Section 6 6 1 to 6 6 4 Chapter 7 Section 7 1 7 1 1 7 1
136. 3 37 Current operation mode area seeseseseesesecceseecess 3 21 D Data consistency TUNCTION ceececcccccccccccccccccccccee 4 21 Data consistency requesting signal XOC ssseseee 3 13 Data consistency start request signal YOC e 3 13 Data exchange start completed signal X00 e ss 3 6 Data exchange start request signal YOO eeseeeeee 3 6 Data swap FUNCTION ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccce 4 19 Diagnostic information area eseeseeseeseesecceseeseese 3 36 Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 COCOOOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOO OOOOE 3 9 Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 COCO OOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOO OO OOOO OOOOOOOOOOOE 3 9 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 sssseese99 3 39 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Diagnostic information detection signal X01 sss 3 7 Diagnostic information invalid setting area eeee 3 38 Diagnostic information non notification time setting Arca seccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoccccccceccocooocooce 3 36 E Each station s alarm Status eececccceccccccccccccccccces 3 35 Each station s diagnostic status seressesesesseseseeee 3 32 Error check using the LEDs and corrective actions SOOO SSHSHSH SSH OH HSHHHOHHOHOHOHSHOHOSHHSOHSHOHSOHSH HSH OOOOOOOOOE 9 2 Error Codes SOOHSHOSSHO SOS SH OHO OHO OHH HHOHOHHOHOHSSHOSOHOOOOES 9 1 2 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 SOOO
137. 485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 A 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 2 is stored 1 lt Section 9 5 4 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 4 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 3 is stored 1 L3 Section 9 5 4 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 i 26489 6779H to 26528 67A0H Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26529 67A1H to 26568 67C8H Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26569 67C9H to 26608 67F0H Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869h to 26688 6840H 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Failed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750n is OFF 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 46 7 5 3 Alarm read request with A
138. 518 3 Initial setting for QU71PB92V startup so T y ee te ee PWIA Ff set mo Z Mago XIB AID AIF x0 w hae eee AN lins Diagnostic info I Hf t Jj invalid setting area fa z UON sai Poa NZ ruoV K20 e2084 J Initializes Diagnostic info non aS z notification time setting area uoy iti Hov Ko ea Sets conditions for system switching UOr sets a system switching Hov Hi 623649 J D Slave st 2 O uoy if E HOY tip 23608 Specifies the 2nd temporary slave reservation Lu PST moo D susie xB Doo e TDD aT r Tm Er mI T mm T me E e y T PEE as T j JE Hov H289 e2080 J 1 Initializes Diagnostic info paai setting area rHOY KO ma J I Initializes Diagnostic info non potieation time setting area Hov KO oe a 1 Sets conditions for system z switching E U0 tehi Z hov HI e23649 ame SA none 2 uoy ma roy He 23608 J 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary j aij slave reservation Ww oe ee e e eee ee ee es ee ee ee eee eee a ao S HE In the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching the 5 a system from standby to control SM1518 the initial s rS setting similar to the one for QJ71PB92V startup is g a a Eob Figure 7 28 Initial Setting D EIPOINT Z To enable the system switching due to a DP Slave error immediately after system switching store 0 in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area z W Un G2084 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from m stan
139. 6 Operation in System Switching Condition Setting Area Disconnected station detection Stores result data 3 56 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries System switching is performed when an error occurs in communication with a DP Slave which is specified in the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 POINT 1 Set values into the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored OVERVIEW 2 With a communication error identified in a system switching target DP Slave after system switching no system switching is performed even if a communication error occurs in another DP Slave To perform system switching again restore all of the switching target DP CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 Slaves to normal condition The DP Slave status can be confirmed in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 LL gt Section 3 4 5 7 Z O lt Q u Oo w a ao 1 Itis any of all the DP Slaves that are specified in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 Control system Standby system New standby system New control system Power Power
140. 7 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23605 5C35x 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23606 5C36n 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23607 5C371 1 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 1 The bits b15 to b13 of address 23607 5C37n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 22 Temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 3 34 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 SPECIFICATIONS aLS eG Q series 7 Slave status area Alarm detection Un G26416 to Un G26424 The information on alarm status of each DP Slave is stored in this area Address DEC HEX 26417 6731n 26418 6732h 26419 6733h 26420 6734n 26421 6735n 26422 6736n 26423 6737h 26424 6738n a All stations alarm status Un G26416 b This area stores the alarm detection status of all DP Slaves Initial value 00001 If an alarm is detected in any one of the stations in Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 1 is stored in All stations alarm status Un G26416 0 No alarm in all DP Slaves 1 Alarm detected Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 This area stores the alarm detection status of each DP Slave Initial value 0000n If an alarm is detected in any one of the stations and t
141. 7 07H or later Version 1 31H or later When the CPU is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later Version 7 00A or later Version 1 40S or later 1 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed using GX Configurator DP Version 7 03D or later Change the mode using Operation mode change request area Un G2255 2 For how to use GX Configurator DP and GX Works2 together refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 3 To mount the QJ71PB92V on an extension base unit use GX Configurator DP Version 7 03D or later 2 4 2 1 Applicable System 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M als 26 fel ceries 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations The following are the precautions when using the QJ71PB92V on MELSECNET H remote I O stations OVERVIEW N 1 Automatic refresh Automatic refresh is not available when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station To use the automatic refresh mount the QJ71PB92V on a remote master station QCPU z O T 5 o Le Z Q SYSTEM 2 Dedicated instructions BBLKWR BBLKRD Dedicated instructions BBLKWR BBLKRD cannot be used when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote O station To use dedicated instructions mount the QJ71PB92V on a remote master station QCPU SPECIFICATIONS 3 QJ71PB92V parameter setup To set QJ71PB92V parameters connect GX Configura
142. 7 ft segment 4800 m 15748 ft network 93 75 kbps 187 5 kbps 1000 m 3281 ft segment 4000 m 13123 ft network 500 kbps 400 m 1312 ft segment 1600 m 5249 ft network 1 5 Mbps 200 m 656 ft segment 800 m 2625 ft network 3 Mbps 6 Mbps 100 m 328 ft segment 400 m 1312 ft network 12 Mbps 1 The max transmission distance in the table above is based on the case where 3 repeaters are used The calculation formula for the transmission distance extended using a repeater s is Max transmission distance m network Number of repeaters 1 x Transmission distance m segment 3 2 3 1 Performance Specifications 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS 26 Fel series 3 2 Function List The following table summarizes a list of QJ71PB92V functions i 5 Table3 3 Function List z Ppr Reference Function Description 3 Section Z PROFIBUS DPVO T 5 Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling the I O data o fr exchange of max 8192 bytes Ae I O data exchange oe Section 4 1 1 aS Note that when QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units in a redundant system 2 up to 124 DP Slaves can be connected 25 Acquisition of diagnostic and extended diagnostic information Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slaves during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O Section 4 1 2 signals By sending services
143. 71PB92Vs mounted on extension base units EEA EEE A ETE A E NA ENA 2 16 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No ssesssssssssssesrrrssetrrsstttrtnssttrtnsssttnnnsstttnnssstennnnnt 2 17 CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 to 3 68 3 1 Performance Specifications ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaecaeceeeeeeeeesececaaaeaaeaeeceeeseeeeseeseeeseneeaeeneees 3 1 ge AFUCU S Eons oa ist toa tetes erte wk T E steuasS saasadeatinadeasautst tones OS 3 3 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 00 0 eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeennaeeeeeeeaaas 3 4 33 1 List of I O SIgnalS sc ic2 celine nesses ieee a A AE A A AA AAAA 3 4 3 3 2 DetailS of l O Signal iaa eta edt hpi A EEE el aedeagal eee paede E A ADA 3 6 3 4 Buffer Memory arrar a ee ite ae ea ee a ea 3 17 A 8 JAT Butter Memory t ie e A EEA shee anced cocoa EN 3 17 3 4 2 Local station information aroari seria Eert serra SEREA Enea IARAA LERA EAE ERE ERA NEET ATEA 3 21 3 4 3 Operation mode change ALCA ee ceececeeecee eee ceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeceeeeaeeeeseeeiaeeeeeeeenaeess 3 23 3 4 4 I O data exchange afea aer osoni anaia ir ieaiai aAa E aIia Ea eeka ARAR Ea aia RE T eeina E iia ai deas 3 24 3 4 5 Slave status grea esanei iiia i a ia a i a iene ees 3 29 3 4 6 Diagnostic information IE aieiaiee ae EREA ERE E AREE 3 36 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesenaeeeeetennae
144. 72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 Mountable network No of mountable Up to 64 O SPECIFICATIONS O Mountable x Not mountable 1 Limited to the range of the number of I O points in the network module 2 Mountable on any I O slot of the mountable base unit Remark KERR RRR eee eee eee eee ee ee The Basic model QCPU cannot create the MELSECNET H remote I O network eeeeeeeeceoeaoeeeceoeseeeeeeoeeoeseeeoesceaeeoeaeeeeoeoeoe eee eaeoeaeeeaeee eee FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 1 Applicable System 2 43 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Supported software packages The following shows the compatibility between software packages and the system using the QJ71PB92V GX Developer or GX Works2 For setting QCPU parameters and creating sequence programs required GX Configurator DP Configuration software for the QJ71PB92V required Table2 3 Supported software packages System Software version MELSEC TE eries GX Developer GX Configurator DP GX Works2 2 Version 7 00A or later Version 1 15R or later Version 1 15R or later Version 7 04E or later Version 7 00A or later Version 7 00A or later Not available Version 7 04E or later Version 7 03D or later Version 1 15R or later Version 1 15R or later Version 7 02C or l
145. 8 Redundant system support function 4 35 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z U SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY eries 5 Precautions for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system This section explains precautions for the case where the QJ71PB92Vs are mounted to a redundant PROFIBUS DP system a Precautions on the QJ71PB92V side 1 Function version of the QJ71PB92V Use the QJ71PB92V of function version D or later gt Section 2 4 2 Version of GX Developer Use GX Developer of Version 8 17T or later gt Section 2 1 3 When starting up the redundant system Check the Local station error information area Un G23071 to see if the QJ71PB92V has an error or not gt Section 3 4 2 If an error exists remove the error cause When an error exists system switching is not executed 4 Continuation of each function of the QJU71PB92V For precautions for continuing each function of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 7 9 7 5 When system switching occurred Do not perform the following before the system switching is completed e Turning off the power of the new control system e Resetting the redundant CPU on the new control system If either of these is performed before completion of the system switching DP Slave outputs may turn off momentarily Confirm that the syst
146. 92V is stored in this area OVERVIEW 1 Local station error information area Un G23071 This area stores the error information of the local station QJ71PB92V Table3 9 Local Station Error Information Area Un G23071 Stored Value Description 0000H Normal Other than 0000H Error Error code 3 Section 9 5 6 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO Es POINT The information in the Local station error information area Un G23071 is not cleared even if the problem occurred on the QJ71PB92V has been solved To clear the Local station error information area Un G23071 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 7 Z O lt Q u Oo w a Oo 2 Current operation mode area Un G2254 This area stores the current operation mode value Yn z Q E Table3 10 Current Operation Mode Area Un G2254 2 Stored Value Description 0001H Parameter setting mode 0002H Self diagnostic mode g s 0003H Communication mode mode 3 mi 2 0009H Flash ROM initialization mode 208 a 0101H Parameter setting mode 1 8 a 2 Songs 4 E OF 0103H Communication mode mode 3 Foe nan 1 Operation mode currently registered to flash ROM 3 Flash ROM storage mode Un G2259 z This area stores the operation mode currently stored to flash ROM u x W Table3 11 Flash ROM Storage Mode Un G2259 Stored Value Description 0101H Parameter setting mode 0
147. A ries Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Continued Error Code LED Status Error Description Action Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKRD F110H signal YOC is ON the BBLKRD instruction is executed when Data consistency start instruction is not executed request signal YOC is ON Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKWR F111H signal YOC is ON the BBLKWR instruction is executed when Data consistency start instruction is not executed request signal YOC is ON Although Data consistency start request Modify the sequence program so that the BBLKRD F112H signal YOC is ON the BBLKRD and and BBLKWR instructions are executed when Data BBLKWR instructions are not executed consistency start request signal YOC is ON The data consistency function in automatic refresh Data consistency start request signal YOC and dedicated instructions are not concurrently F113H was turned ON during execution of the data executable In the master parameter setting of GX consistency function in automatic refresh Configurator DP disable the data consistency function 3 Section 6 3 Diagnostic information was generated on a Check Diagnostic information area for diagnostic F120H RSP ERR LED ON DP Slave information generated in a DP Slave and take corrective actions Check the FDL addresses of the DP Master and DP Slaves
148. ATE service in the redundant system KUNN 5 After leaving it for a while retry the execution from the INITIATE service in the new control system Depending on the DP Slave the time allowed for re execution varies Continue retrying until it is normally executed E4E0H No response was received from the DP Slave Check the DP Slave status and retry Any of the following functions are being executed from the Verify that the processing of the following functions is same DP Master to the same DP Slave completed and retry E4E1H e Acyclic communication e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition e Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology FDT DTM technology E4E2H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure a f ae E4E3H explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 5 Error Codes 9 19 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication o Z E e e T o W l a gt O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING alarms MELSEC TA eries Error codes E500H to E563H 9 5 4 Error codes E500x to ESFFu Error codes generated when reading Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error Code Error Description Action E500H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E501H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a non
149. BBLKYR uo 1K14336 D300 KI ae Nao Figure APPX 13 Replacing Dedicated Instruction QJ71PB92D only Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 19 eLS eG Q series oO zZ E O O is N W m ao b 2 g M J J Ax o W 8 5 J S A T J INDEX gt Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC Aries Appendix 3 External Dimensions on r K QJ71PB92V RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN READY PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F g9 oO O O a2 O QJ71PB92V 90 3 54 4 0 16 27 4 1 08 haz Unit mm inch Figure APPX 14 External Dimensions App 20 Appendix 3 External Dimensions INDEX A ABORT service Class2_SERVICE essesseeseeseees 7 27 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information eeccecccccccccccccccccccccccccscccvcccccscsccccs AA Acyclic COMMUNICATION AEA ceeeeeccccccccccccccccccce 3 47 Acyclic communication request area sseeseeseeseeee 3 47 Acyclic communication request execution instruction Arca cocccccccccccccccccccccccvcccccccccccccccccccecccocooos 3 43 Acyclic communication request result areacessess 3 49 Acyclic communication response area seseeseesee9 3 50 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves e sessssese 4 11 Address information
150. CK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY eries 7 5 4 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 39 Details of Program Example Item Description Service name Alarm read request with ACK DP Slave FDL address FDL address 1 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 40 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Alarm read response signal Alarm read request signal b Devices used by the user Table7 41 List of User Devices Device Description Device Description Refresh start request lt 5 Section 7 1 1 c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 42 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device D4000 to D4321 Description Device Description A M200 to Alarm read request with ACK response area M215 Slave status area Alarm detection 7 47 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 4 Program example PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 3 Program example HO UO
151. CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Has the I O data exchange been started normally Check the LEDs No Check the parameter settings gt 2 SPECIFICATIONS Yes Completed 1 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the exchange start request signal Y00 Start it from GX Configurator DP o Z O Z Le Figure 4 35 Procedures before System Operation Continued SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 43 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC le n ics 4 Checking if the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled The model name displayed in Module s Detailed Information of GX Developer is changed to QJ71PB92D 92V Module s Detailed Information Module QJ71PB92D 92V HE Module Name QU71PB92D 92V Product information 090520000000000 D 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 140 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status Figure 4 36 Checking if QJ71PB92D Compatible Function is Enabled 5 Precautions a Serial No of the QJ71PB92V Select the QJ71PB92V whose serial No first 5 digits is 09052 or later C Section 2 4 b Module t
152. Calculation Formulas a The time taken until the redundant CPU in system A receives a system switching request from the QJ71PB92V in system A and then sends a system switching request to the other redundant CPU in TcpuA ms system B TcpuA ms Scan time 3 System switching time of redundant CPU Tsw ms a Tam Tre a ms System switching processing time lt gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used Tsw ms Tam ms Automatic refresh time of QJ71PB92V lt gt gt User s manual function explanation program fundamentals for the CPU module used e Trc ms Tracking data loading time by standby system CPU lt gt gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used Internal processing time of the QJ71PB92V Tp ms Total number of bytes for I O data lengths of all DP Slaves x Time Corresponding to Tp ms Transmission Speed 1 2 No of connected DP Slaves x Time Corresponding to Transmission Speed 2 2 Common processing time 2 Seen e Scan time of the redundant CPU lt gt gt User s manual function explanation program fundamentals for the CPU module used Number of switching target DP Slaves that are specified in the system switching DP Slave Nand specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 when AND is set in the System switching condition area Un G23648 1 The I O data length of each DP Slave can be confirmed on the Slave Modules
153. Change Master Type window in GX Configurator DP Has settings configured in the Transfer Setup window and the Master Settings window in GX Configurator DP 1 Check the settings in the Transfer Setup window 2 Check the Starting I O number setting in the Master Settings window 1 Set a blank no setting for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer 2 Write the PLC parameters to the QCPU 3 Reset the QCPU or power it OFF and then ON Is a blank no setting set for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer Completed Figure 9 3 When the QJ71PB92D Compatible Function is Disabled 9 4 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP Q TROUBLESHOOTING M ELS 26 EAseries 2 When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled Parameters cannot be written o Z E e e T mo wW l a O GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A cannot be used Upgrade the GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A to Version 7 01B or later Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Is any other than GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A being used yn WwW 8 Q Q lt Is the DP Master set to QJ71PB92D in the PROFIBUS Network Set the DP Master to QJ71PB92D in the Change window in GX Configurator DP Master Type win
154. Class2_SERVICE Disconnects a line connection from any specified DP Slave Reads data from a DP Slave connected to the line by the INITIATE 2 READ Class2_SERVICE service Writes data to a DP Slave connected to the line by the INITIATE 2 WRITE Class2_SERVICE service 2 The data that can be read or written by READ or WRITE services vary depending on the DP Slave to be used For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Aeres 2 Executing acyclic communication Execute the acyclic communication by the following procedure OVERVIEW a Write the request instruction to be executed to the Acyclic communication request area Un G23809 to Un G24832 b Turn ON 1 the bit corresponding to the request instruction No in the Acyclic communication request execution instruction area Un G23808 c When the QJ71PB92V accepts the acyclic communication request instruction the acceptance status bit in the Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 turns ON 1 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM d When execution of the acyclic communication is completed the completion status bit in the Acyclic communication request result area Un G25120 turns ON 1 and the execution result is stored in the Acyclic communication response area Un G25121 to Un G26144 EJPOINT When acommunication fails in Class
155. D Parameters of the QJ71PB92D were Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92V and F109H Heck written with the QJ71PB92D compatible write the parameters asang function disabled e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt gt Section 6 7 e Change the module selected in the GX BBNSETLED Parameters of the QJ71PB92V were Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92D and F10AH flashi written with the QJ71PB92D compatible write the parameters asning function enabled e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt _ gt Section 6 7 Initialize the flash ROM F10BH FAULT LED ON o vda eaea mode If the same error occurs again replace the g i QJ71PB92V PRM SET LED In the parameter settings there is a DP Check the slave parameters and make the setting F10CH i an again to ensure that the I O data size of each DP flashing Slave whose O data size is set to 0 byte Slave is 1byte or more Initialize the flash ROM PRM SET LED i F10DH l Parameter error If the same error occurs again please consult your flashing local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem F10EH i ishi i FAULT LED ON Hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative F10FH explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 5 Error Codes 9 24 To the next page 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG l
156. D and BBLKWR instructions must be used in pair Use the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions as a pair and always execute them once for every sequence scan If only one of these instructions is used an error code is stored in the Local station error information area Un G23071 gt Section 9 5 6 PROGRAMMING e e o Z O ir E 7 zZ 1p 1B 07 1 B 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 8 2 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 MELSEC TA eries Execution timing Execute the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions all the time While the QJ71PB92V is implementing the data consistency function the dedicated instruction is not processed not executed gt Section 4 5 Therefore I O data may not be read or written in a program where either of the instructions is executed only once at the rising or falling edge of the pulse 4 When mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station 5 6 Dedicated instructions are not executable when the QJU71PB92V is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Transmission delay time when using a dedicated instruction Use of the data consistency function increases the transmission delay time CF Section 3 5 2 QCPUs available when using dedicated instructions For QCPUs supporting the data consistency function refer to Section 2 1 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 8 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC KE eries
157. DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 39 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 40 4 POINT MELSEC TA cries 1 Data are assigned to the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 in the order Order of assignment of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in the order of FDL addresses The actual order of assignment can be checked in Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Documentation of I O Mapping of GX Configurator DP FDL Addr Name Model Slave_Nr_002 ST1H PB Slave_Nr_001 QJ71PB93D Slave_Nr_003 AJ95TB32 16DT 8 DI 8DO 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s 3 on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt Section 6 5 The information in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 is not cleared even if the problem occurred on the DP Slave has been solved To clear the information in Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELS
158. DL address display area This area stores the FDL address of the local FFFFu R Section z 8D1H station 3 4 2 N x 2258 i i i Offline test status area This area stores the details or result of the self 0 R Section m 8D2x diagnostic test 3 4 2 z 2259 This area stores the operation mode currently Section 8D3x Flash ROM storage mode stored in the flash ROM ree R 3 4 2 2260 to 2262 System area Use prohibited 8D4 to 8D6x 2263 Control mater FDL address This area stores the FDL address of the Section g control system QJ71PB92V when it is used in 2 R 8D71 display area 3 4 14 a redundant system lt i fo 2264 Standby master FDL address This area storas tha EDIE address ot the 7 Section Q display area standby system QJ71PB92V when it is used in 2 R 3414 ia 8D8x a redundant system 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable 2 The initial value varies depending on the QCPU installed with the QJ71PB92V or the parameter h z lt lt gt gt Section 3 4 14 ae To the next page ES Se a HZ 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 17 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued MELSEC TE cries 3 18 Address v8 Initial Read Reference Name Description 4 i DEC HEX value Write Section 2265 to 2271 System area Use prohi
159. DO to D95 Input data D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status D100 to D216 to a Output data Slave status area Diagnostic information detection D195 D224 D200 to PO ae D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D1000 Diagnostic information read target 1 75 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEGC KE eries 4 Tracking devices for continuously using the functions in the case of system switching In the I O data exchange program example data in the following devices are tracking transferred a Devices whose data are tracking transferred by I O data exchange programs Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned ON e Start command device by which the Data consistency start request signal YOC is turned ON e Devices that store output data 1 The devices that store output data are Devices that are set as the automatic refresh target of output data in the automatic refresh setting Devices that are used to store data in the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 Devices whose data are specified as write data of the BBLKWR instruction Tracking transfer is performed only for the devices that store output data Tracking transfer of all areas is not needed Table7 71 Tracking Transfer De
160. Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description Time control start response signal b Devices used by the user Table7 54 List of Devices for the User Device X27 Description Time control execution command mo c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Description Refresh start request gt Section 7 1 1 Table7 55 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Device D5000 Description Description PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Time data write request response area 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves T 56 7 6 4 Program example OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC A sries 3 Program example MO X27 Y19 X19 U0 j 626784 Request code is set 1602n UO G26785 Year is set 2005 UO G26786 Month is set July UO 626787 Day is set 1st UO G26788 Hour is set 10 o clock UO 626789 Minute is set 0 minutes U0 626790 Second is set 0 seconds UO 626791 J 4 000 second value is set 0 UO G26792 Clock status is set 0 Y19 Time control is executed MO X19 UO Hov 626800 D5000 Reads the response code and error code _ D5000 HOAGO2 Processing
161. ED INSTRUCTIONS 8 1to8 7 8 1 Precautions for Dedicated Instructions 0 eceeeeeeee eee ettte ee ee eee neste tenes eee saeeeeeeteeeeeetaaeeeee 8 2 OZ Gs BBLR RE aea na tacd ets aesenecteteatetent a a aoboate wtabbocemetcedatedtnens casted leaeceath 8 4 853 Ge BBEKWAR vise ss aAa R de dalek ve cas neelbeccuaaylodebaeh A a A a a a a a aa 8 6 CHAPTER9 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 1to9 28 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions ccccccecceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeetaeeeeeeetneeeeeeee 9 2 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP s ssssssessssssrrrsseserrrsererrrsssrrrrnssne 9 4 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeneeaeeees 9 6 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System cece cece eee eeneeee eee eieeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeenees 9 8 9 4 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 8 9 4 2 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system is ON n e 9 9 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeees 9 10 T EN GOES ic cevsf szeceeva tu chee iee badges cath Heeb ate bee ghee dc deena tats eee a 2 eee EU cadet ceca a edd Lada eee 9 12 9 5 1 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic MOr AON Jo rA Aids EREA AERLE AS AART EA E ORE AT 9 13 9 5 2 Error codes E30
162. Error Codes To the next page 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG Fe series Table9 7 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E564H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side E565H Request not supported error was detected on the DP Slave side E566H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E567H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E568H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E569H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Access to an access disabled area was attempted from the E56AH DP Slave side E56BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E56CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E56DH Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave side correctly set or not and retry E56EH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E56FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side E570H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Slave side E571H Resource error was detected during read processing on the DP Slave side E572H Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E573H The resource is already
163. Execution error on the application was detected corrective actions E460H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E461H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E462H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E463H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E464H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side R EAG isd delected on the DPSI correctly set or not and retry E465H aa MOF EPPA EE SAS REA SD E EEG For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave side E466H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E467H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side E468H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side 9 16 9 5 Error Codes To the next page 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA ries Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E469H Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Access to an access disabled area was attempted from E46AH the DP Slave side E46BuH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E46CuH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave E46DuH side E46EH Incorrect request was detected on the D
164. FDL address of the DP Master is stored E extended diagnostic information other than the one Initial value 00x 3 sent this time is stored in the DP Slave is stored For the DP Slave that has not started I O data ae Initial value 00x exchange FFu is stored 23460 5BA4x 00n No other extended diagnostic information 00H to 7Dx 0 to 125 FDL address exists 80x Other extended diagnostic information exists o zZ 23461 5BA5u The ident No of the DP Slave is stored Initial value 00001 Z 23462 5BA6n 2 to The extended diagnostic information max 244 bytes is stored Initial value 00001 23583 5C1 Fh Figure 3 27 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Response Area Un G23457 to Un G23583 Yn a EG 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 43 3 4 7 Extended diagnostic information read area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE cries 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area This area stores the bus cycle time 1 Current bus cycle time Un G2272 The current bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 2 Min bus cycle time Un G2273 The minimum value of the bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 3 Max bus cycle time Un G2274 The maximum value of the bus cycle time is stored in this area Unit x 1ms 3 44 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 8 Bus cycle time area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 4 9 Global control area This area is used for the global control function OVERVIEW 1
165. Function oP Slave Parameters Wizard Slave Settings Model QU71PB93D Revision Vendor MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION aa Slave Properties Name FDL Address min T_sdr Group identification number IV Slave is active Ignore AutoClear MV Swap 0 Bytes in Master Cancel Slave_Nr_002 f2 0 sQ 125 fit ft 285 M Gpi l Gp2 l Gp3 M Gp4 Gp5 S Gps GpZ Gps I Sync Output I Freeze Input Initialize slave when failing to respond Figure 4 17 Data swap Setting GX Configurator DP 4 4 Data Swap Function 4 19 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS 4 20 MELSEC TE cries 2 Invalidating or validating data swap setting For DP Slaves that handle data whose word structure is the same as that of the QJ71PB92V invalidate the data swap setting QJ71PB92V DP Slave Input data Input area Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 H L S H L H L AA data J Data2 Data 2 Data2 Data 2 Data2 Data 2 H L H L H gt 0 Output data Output area Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 H L H L H L pote 4 Data4 Data 4 Data4 Data 4 Data 4 Data4 aaaea H L H L H L L L
166. Global control area Un G2081 a Set the global control function to be executed Specify the global control service to be sent by bits b5 to b2 in the Global control area and set the target group No by bits b15 to b8 Initial value 0000n CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 0 Not execute 1 Execute 3 Address DEC HEX b15 to bO 2 2081 8211 See below E z Oo bit Description Initial value Reference Section a bO Unused Fixed to 0 0 b1 Unused Fixed to 0 0 UNFREEZE Retention of the actual input data is b2 disabled 0 lt gt b b3 FREEZE Actual input data is held and read 0 o fej UNSYNC Retention of the actual input data is E b4 0 o disabled 5 U b5 SYNC Actual output data is written and held 0 b6 Unused Fixed to 0 0 b7 Unused Fixed to 0 0 SZ ree b8 Executed on DP Slaves in group 1 0 9 m a W b9 Executed on DP Slaves in group 2 0 3 b10 Executed on DP Slaves in group 3 0 Eee i BEG b11 Executed on DP Slaves in group 4 0 D E D b12 Executed on DP Slaves in group 5 0 b13 Executed on DP Slaves in group 6 0 o rA b14 Executed on DP Slaves in group 7 0 b15 Executed on DP Slaves in group 8 0 y E Figure 3 28 Global Control Area Un G2081 3 o z 5 Fs A Yn a EG Of a 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 45 3 4 9 Global control area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries b Setting
167. HOY G6144 DO K96 Reading input data a Reads Slave stat BNOV 623040 D200 K25 J Seac slave status area Program for DP Slave control lt 3 Section 7 1 1 2 a Se cy See Si a cf Sey ee ee l l MO U0 Bmov D100 614336 K96 J Writing output data Program for reading diagnostic information lt 3 Section 7 1 1 2 b l O EE eee ee TEND 7 Figure 7 37 I O Data Exchange Program Example MOV Instruction 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T7 80 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information If a system switching occurs acquisition of the extended diagnostic error information is disabled After the system switching only the extended diagnostic error information that is newly generated after the switching can be obtained For a program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic information refer to section 7 2 7 81 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 7 9 3 Program example for global control function If a system switching oc
168. L Y I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 18 When Invalidating the Data Swap Setting For DP Slaves that handle data whose word structure is the reverse of the QJ71PB92V validate the data swap setting QJ71PB92V DP Slave Input data Input area Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 Data 1 H L y L l h L H Input data Data2 Data 2 5 Data 2 Data 2 Data2 Data 2 arga H l o z uw H H 1 D 1 fi v Output data Output area Moa Ta e Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 Data 3 H l L a L l H L l H Output t Q t dat 4 Data4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 Data 4 ataarga H l Ly w l H w l H 1 1 fi Y I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 19 When Validating the Data Swap Setting 4 4 Data Swap Function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries 4 5 Data Consistency Function When I O data from DP Slaves are read from or written to buffer memory this function prevents the I O data from being separated and incorrectly mixed 1 I O data consistency function a The PROFIBUS DP bus cycle and QCPU sequence scan are performed asynchronously Because of this when the QCPU reads input data in the buffer memory during input data transfer from a DP Slave to the buffer memory the original data may be
169. M SB20 Module status l J END Figure 7 24 MELSECNET H Remote I O Network Interlock Program Example Set an appropriate value for the timer constant KO according to the following Table7 63 Set Value for Timer Constant Item Set Value Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status T1 T3 T4 Sequence scan time x 4 or more Sequence scan time x 3 or more 1 To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise etc Note that 4 and 3 represent standard values x POINT For details of the interlock program for the MELSECNET H remote master station and remote I O station refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network T 63 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station e PROGRAMMING M ELS eG lA cries b I O data exchange program example Ee POINT After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Not required when initial settings are not changed W300 XTOIB X101D Xidir xT000 Y1000 g mo ee 14 Hove H2B9 D6000 l A rdi di KO gt Initializing Diagnostic informat
170. Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access Enter the device addresses for buffering I 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices Slave Specific Transfer Bik Tiel I Comm Trouble Area I Extd Comm Trouble Area M Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and master module using AutoRefresh C Copy Instructions PLC code options C Data transfer only Contents of user ibrary start of data transfer global variables Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project C User vatiables I Consistency O aa for all DUT Default Finish Bock Make sure the checkbox is unchecked 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions T 11 PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with a DP Slave using the MOV instruction This program example is based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 E R Not needed when the initial setting is not changed f ae ser utoo N Tum ON the initial setting execution command M400 X1B XID XIF x0 Yo UO Initializes Diagnostic info 1 at af a LOY Hebe ae invalid setting area i UO Initializes Diagnostic info non uov K20 62084 notification time setting area UO Specifies the 2nd tempora I 1 Specifies the 2n porary
171. NG MELSEC TE eries 7 6 3 Time data write request This section explains the request and response formats of the time data write request 1 Request format Table7 49 Request Format Buffer memory address Description Set value 26784 68A0H Set a request code Set value 1602H 26785 68A1H Set the year Set value 1984 to 2036 26786 68A2H Set the month Set value 1 to 12 26787 68A3H Set the day Set value 1 to 31 26788 68A4H Set the hour Set value 0 to 23 26789 68A5H Set the minute Set value 0 to 59 26790 68A6H Set the second Set value 0 to 59 26791 68A7H Set 1 1000 second Set value 0 to 999 26792 68A8H Set the clock status b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5b4 b3b2 b1 bO 6 5 o Ialalol 2 0 l1 1 Set the synchronous setting with the time master 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Set the time resolution minimum unit 00 1ms 01 10ms 10 100ms 11 1s 3 Set summer or winter time 0 Set winter time 1 Set summer time 4 Set advance notice of summer winter time switching 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour 5 Set the time difference the time to be added or subtracted The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Set value 0 t
172. Non redundant DP Slave 30 a rd Ww gt O Repeater 2 2 Connection points counted as number of modules Redundant DP Slave Non redundant DP Slave lt ao DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 ea Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 ae feed Redundant QJ71 ee Redundant QJ71 SUPP Y CPU PB92V SUPP Y CPU PB92V module module Tracking cable Gh GS GE en GT DP Slave FDL address 2 Bus terminator Bus terminator SPECIFICATIONS DP Slave FDL address 3 DP Slave FDL address 30 J vV DP Slave 29 modules Repeater 1 1 Repeater 1 2 FUNCTIONS Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave oseese DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 V pi DP Slave 30 modules Figure 2 8 When Using Redundant and Non Redundant DP Slaves SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION EJPOINT Using repeaters redundant DP Slaves and non redundant ones must be separately connected to different segments PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 15 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA cries 2 3 3 PROFIBUS
173. O data 2 exchange normal Reads the execution result and completion status Un G 25120 O data DP Slave exchange exchange Acceptance S normal normal status Completion status Writes the request instruction T SSS Un G 23809 to Un G23936 2 3 Acyclic BZ 5 o O communication nO execution command Writes the execution instruction Set the value to 1 Un G 23808 Completion status 2 Read the response code and error code a m Un G25121 I O data h m n Normally completed T ae 4 Reads the execution result B Sun esponse code Un G25122 to Un G25248 Writes the execution instruction Set the value to 0 Un G 23808 no Failed Reads the detailed error code 5 lt gt Un G25121Response code Un G25122 to Un G25248 z m Processing for failed completion 5 E aya A Zuu Writes the execution instruction PG Set the value to 0 Un G23808 OF z Fee Figure 7 14 Sequence Program Acyclic Communication D D PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 16 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_ SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 15 Request Format This section explains the request and response formats of the READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE Offset Address Description Set Value 0 0H Set a request code 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE
174. ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON d Input data from DP Slaves are stored in the Input data area for mode 3 o Un G6144 to Un G10239 26 e Turning OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO turns OFF the Data exchange start request signal X00 and I O data exchange is stopped 2 Output data exchange O Data exchange start 9 request signal Y00 Data exchange start completed signal X00 Bus cycle time Bc Bc Bc Bc I O data exchange I O data exchange o started stopped o Output data area for mode 3 aa Output data Output data Output data 5 Un G14336 to Un G18431 Initial value at Bc at Bc at Bo WwW Input data exchange g Z mif Data exchange start ans request signal Y00 Zw 039 Data exchange start g a fa completed signal X00 E Q i fi now Bus cycle time Bc Bc Bc Bc I O data exchange I O data exchange started stopped a E WwW Input data area for mode 3 Data of previous exchange Input data Input data Input data Y Un G6144 to Un G10239 at Bc at Bc at Bc fa lt Figure 4 2 I O Data Exchange Processing E D ooo coco coerce For program examples of the I O data exchange refer to the following g e Single CPU system 7 Section 7 1 7 8 3 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 1 9 eeeeeeece
175. ON the initial setting execution command 1 M400 X1B X1D XIF xO YO UO itiali ini 1 Initializes Diagnostic info 1 Woy tag ooge J invalid setting area UO esi i oe HOY K20 G2084 I Initializes Diagnostic info non I notification time setting area UO a HOY Ko c23648 I Sets conditions for system 1 switching UO s itchi 1 Sets a system switching i MOY HI 623649 i DP Slave 1st UO ifi 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary I my he ee J slave reservation 1 Turn OFF the initial setting I RST mun execution command SHIS518 XIB XID XIF UO Initializes Diagnostic info f I g I li B li F MOV nea am invalid setting area U0 S HOY KO gos Sets 0 in Diagnostic info non I gt notification time setting area U0 it rHov KO G23648 J I Sets conditions for system I z switching UO Per T Sets a system switching Moy HI G23649 l y I z J DP Slave 1st UO ifi rHoy He 623608 1 Specifies the 2nd temporary a ee NEOR ee J Slave reservation FHOY HO K4Y0 K2 Turns OFF Y00 to Y1F UO Writes tracking transferred Bov p00 G1 4336 kae data to Output data area X1B XID XIF X20 KO uoy initi I i Writes the initial output JE JE FHOVP KO G14336 K985 7 a eine YO 1 I Yo y I O data exchange Li KIB XID alt HO y start processing MO uoy t B
176. ON when the Module READY signal X1D turns ON and I O data exchange is ready to be started The signal turns ON only in the Communication mode mode 3 b The signal turns OFF when an error disabling I O data exchange occurs on the QJ71PB92V c Use the signal as an interlock signal for when turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO 14 Module READY signal X1D a This signal turns ON when the QJ71PB92V is started up This signal turns ON regardless of the operation mode b While the QJ71PB92V is not ready this signal is OFF 15 Watchdog timer error signal X1F a This signal turns ON when a watchdog timer error occurs on the QJU71PB92V b The Watchdog timer error signal X1F does not turn OFF until e The programmable controller is turned OFF and back ON again or e The QCPU is reset 3 16 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA cries 3 4 Buffer Memory z This section explains the buffer memories of the QJ71PB92V gt 3 4 1 Buffer memory list The following shows a list of the buffer memories that are used for transferring data x between the QJ71PB92V and the QCPU o ps Table3 8 Buffer Memory List e Address a Initial Read Reference 3 Name Description A 3 DEC HEX value Write Section 0 to 2079 si System area U
177. OOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOOOOOCE 3 32 Slave status area Normal communication detection COCOCOOOOOOO OOOO OOOOH OOOO OOOOH OO OOOO OOO OOOOH OOOO OOO OOOO OOOCE 3 30 Slave status area Reserved station setting status Standby master FDL address display area ee se 9e3 55 System switching coooooooooooooooo0000000000000000000000 _31 System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection seseeseesessesseeeee 3 56 System switching condition setting result area Disconnected station detection eeereeereeeeeeeeeees 3 58 System switching Error ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcee 4 3 System switching methods ececcccccccccccccccccccccsee 434 System switching LIME eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 65 System switching time in redundant system se 3 65 T Temporary slave reservation function ssesseeseseeee 4 27 Temporary slave reservation request area sessee9e3 52 Temporary slave reservation status area eesesseree 3 34 Time control Ar eg ceeecececcccccccccccccccccscsces 3 51 3 52 Time control over DP Slaves eseeeeeesseeeeeeeeee00 4 17 Time control setting request area eeeeessseeeeesee 3 51 Time control setting response area sreeseeseeseseees 3 51 Time control start request signal Y19 sesseeseeeeee 3 16 Time control start response signal X19 ssesssesse 3 16 Time data read IX0 0 gt gt RR 7 50 Time data write request ocooooooooooooo0000000000000000 7 54 Time data write request UTC format eeee
178. P 0 R Section 6730n to 6738x Alarm detection Slave 3 4 5 26425 to 26431 a System area Use prohibited 6739 to 673FH 26432 to 26434 This area is used to set the request data for Section Alarm request area ee 0 R W 6740n to 6742n alarm acquisition 3 4 11 26435 to 26445 ne System area Use prohibited _ _ 2 6743n to 674Dn 26446 to 26768 This area stores the execution result of alarm Section Alarm response area a 0 R 674Ex to 68901 acquisition 3 4 11 26769 to 26783 System area Use prohibited 68914 to 689Fx 26784 to 26792 f This area is used to set the request data for Section Time control setting request area 0 R W 68A0n to 68A8x time control 3 4 12 26793 to 26799 System area Use prohibited _ 68A9x to 68AFn 26800 to 26812 Time control setting response This area stores the execution result of time 0 R Section 68B0x to 68BCu area control 3 4 12 26813 to 32767 n System area Use prohibited _ 68BDu to 7FFFH 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only RW Read write executable POINT Do not write any data to System area Use prohibited Doing so may cause the programmable controller system to malfunction 3 20 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE cries 3 4 2 Local station information area The information of the local station QJ71PB
179. P Slave side E46FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the E470H DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is Resource error was detected during read processing on E471H the DP SI id correctly set or not and retry SEN For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E4724 Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E473H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave E474H side The service not available for the specified DP Slave was E475H requested EA76H Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the DP Slave side E477H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E478H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the E480H hae a Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry E4811 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to the local station QJ71PB92V Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E482H INITIATE error response actions E483H Invalid Alignment setting Check if the specified Alignment is correct and retry o Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E484H The CommRef number is incorrect retry p A Adjust the total size of S Len and D Len to 230 bytes or E485H Total size of S Len and D Len is out
180. PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC kaser 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE This section explains the request and response formats of the ABORT service Class2_SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 24 Request Format Offset Address Description Set Value 0 0H Set a request code Set value 1413H 1 1H 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave to be connected to network is stored Set value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 Set the CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set Instance Reason The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set Subnet The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 30H 3 3H to 127 7FH Empty area Write 0000n Set value Fixed to 0000H T 27 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 2 Response format a When normally completed gt W Table7 25 Response Format When Normally Completed o Offset Address Result 0 OH A response code is stored Stored value A413H fej Ps b
181. PECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area The area is used for acyclic communications i gt 1 Acyclic communication request area Un G23809 to Un G24832 Set the request instruction of acyclic communication in this area Initial value 00004 Up to eight request instructions can be set For the format for request instructions refer to Section 7 4 z o wir Address 26 DEC HEX 2E 23809 5D01n 3 to Request instruction No 1 area Data size 128 words n 23936 5D80n 23937 5D81n lt i to Request instruction No 2 area Data size 128 words g n 24064 5E00n 24065 5E01n 1o Request instruction No 3 area Data size 128 words 24192 5E80n a 24193 5E81n O to Request instruction No 4 area Data size 128 words 24320 5F00n 24321 5F01n if g to Request instruction No 5 area Data size 128 words mi 5 an 24448 5F80n lt K a 24449 5F 81H 9 g z EO6 to Request instruction No 6 area Data size 128 words oa 24576 6000n 24577 6001n o zZ to Request instruction No 7 area Data size 128 words E o x 24704 6080n E 24705 60811 z lt to Request instruction No 8 area Data size 128 words a 24832 6100n Figure 3 29 Acyclic Communication Request Area Un G23809 to Un G24832 0 z Fs 0 A Yn a SE 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 47 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 48 MELSEC TE
182. PECIFICATIONS 3 26 2 Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 output data to DP Slaves are set a Data length setting The data length unit byte for each station is variable and assigned based on the slave parameter Slave Modules window set using GX Configurator DP For the DP Slave that has a fixed data length the slave parameter setting will be ignored b Data length range The maximum data length per module is 244 bytes and the total data length for all DP Slaves can be set up to 8192 bytes When the data length is an odd number of bytes the final high byte is occupied Set 00H to the final high byte The output data of the next station is assigned starting from the next buffer address Address DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO 14336 3800H 14336 3800H 2nd byte of 1st module 1st byte of 1st module Output data of 1st module 14337 3801H 4th byte of 1st module 3rd byte of 1st module to Output data length 23 bytes 14348 380Cn 14349 380DH Output data of 2nd module N 14347 380BH 22nd byte of 1st module 21st byte of 1st module to Output data length N 14348 380CH 00H 23rd byte of 1st module 14352 3810 7 bytes Te H 14349 380Dn 2nd byte of 2nd module 1st byte of 2nd module 14350 380EH 4th byte of 2nd module 3rd byte of 2nd module is 14351 380FH 6th byte of 2nd module
183. PROFIBUS DP Master Module MITSUBISHI C SCTIES Series Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Q ToJ71PB92V SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels N WARNING and N CAUTION A WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage oo w m eee e Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under N CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions N WARNING When a communication error occurs on PROFIBUS DP the status of the faulty station is as shown below Create an interlock circuit in the sequence program using the co
184. Program Example Dedicated Instructions D fe ae z5 A a BZ 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 78 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ceries 4 POINT Confirm that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled Section 6 3 When the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled dedicated instructions are not processed Gi Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access Enter the device addresses for buffering I 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer Block Transfer I Comm Trouble Area I Extd Comm Trouble Area M Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and master module using Copy Instructions Autoflefresh PLC code options C Data transfer only C User yariables Contents of user ibrary start of data transfer global variables for all DUT Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project Back __ Erish Default Make sure the checkbox is unchecked 7 79 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Cel series c When using the MOV instruction This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with a DP Slave using the MOV instruction vo Not needed when the initial setting is not changed eee eee eee ee a te SM402 7 SET W400 I Turn
185. SM ks Watchdog timer 2 Bus cycle time x 2 Redundant system l 1 Ei When using redundant and non redundant p J3 DP Slaves switching time 37 Section 3 5 1 3 5 3 Sache e214 Line switching time of DP Slave When using only redundant DP Slaves For the line switching time for a DP Slave refer to the manual of Section 2 3 2 2 the DP Slave or contact the manufacturer B Multi master system configuration ae i 2 y g HSA x MSI gt Section 3 5 1 6 4 gt 1 In addition to the QJ71PB92V used in the redundant system another DP Master is connected on k the same PROFIBUS network a 2 When using only redundant DP Slaves It may take several seconds until system switching is completed on the DP Slave side Before setting the watchdog timer of a DP Slave confirm the specifications of the DP Slave o Z O O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 37 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 DP Slave output status when the CPUs in the control and standby systems are stopped Communication of the QJ71PB92V is stopped Since the communication is stopped a watchdog timer error may occur in the DP Slaves for which a watchdog timer is set and their outputs may be turned OFF The following table lists measures to hold outputs from DP Slaves Table4 14 Measures to hold outputs from
186. STEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 5 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 Acquiring extended diagnostic information a Checking the station generating extended diagnostic information For whether extended diagnostic information is stored in any of DP Slaves or not check each DP Slave s Status 1 information that is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 In the case of the 1st DP Slave check b11 of buffer memory address 23073 5A2 1h b Acquiring extended diagnostic information from DP Slaves Perform the following procedure to acquire extended diagnostic information 1 Write the FDL address of the DP Slave from which extended diagnostic information is read to the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 2 Turn ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 3 When reading of the extended diagnostic information is completed the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 turns ON and the extended diagnostic information is stored in the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 4 Check the read extended diagnostic information and turn OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 POINT The latest extended diagnostic inform
187. SWnD5C PROFID E n means version 7 or later BBLKRD Abbreviation for G BBLKRD BBLKWR Abbreviation for G BBLKWR GLOSSARY This part explains the glossary used in this manual Term PROFIBUS DPVO Description A basic version of PROFIBUS DP The following functions are executable e I O data exchange e Diagnostic information notification etc PROFIBUS DPV1 A PROFIBUS DP version for which the following functions have been added to the basic functionality of PROFIBUS DPVO e Acyclic communication e Alarm function etc PROFIBUS DPV2 A PROFIBUS DP version for which the following functions have been added to the PROFIBUS DPV1 functionality e Time stamping etc Class 1 A device exchanging I O data with a DP Slaves QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D etc A device that communicates with DP Slaves and checks their FDL address settings and or DP Master Class 2 operation states The DP Master Class 2 is used as a DP Master for supervising the network which can start maintain and diagnose the system DP Slave A device that exchanges O data with a DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater A device used to connect different segments of PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator A terminating resistor that is connected to either end of each segment on PROFIBUS DP Configuration tool Software used to set bus parameters slave parameters etc and to write them to a DP Master GX Confi
188. SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC HY cence 1 y Check the LEDs of the QJ71PB92Vs in systems A and B K Section 5 3 for an error 2 Start I O data exchange 1 Did I O data exchange start successfully Check the LED status lt 7 Section 5 3 No Check the parameter settings gt 2 To the previous page Yes Completed 1 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 Start it from GX Configurator DP 2 Check the Local station error information area Un G230771 to see if the QJ71PB92V has an error or not lt Section 3 4 2 If an error exists remove the error cause When an error exists system switching is not executed Figure 5 2 Procedures before System Operation Redundant System Continued 5 2 Procedures Before System Operation 5 4 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ol ra z g lu tf wi ro D0 fal wi 8k rae an a Z lt n 0 zZ w N PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION M ELSEG Q series 5 3 Part Names and Settings This section explains the names and settings of each part of the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN READY PRMSET 1 RSPERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F
189. Set a request code Set value 1502H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm is to be read 26433 6741h Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Empty area Write 0000H 26434 6742h i Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 41 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEGC TE eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 37 Response Format When Normally Completed Result Buffer memory address A response code is stored 26446 674EH Stored value A502H 26447 674EH The FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm was read is stored Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 1 alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 2 alarm data No 6 b1 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 3 alarm data No 7 b2 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data N
190. Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB 2 Figure 4 28 Redundant System Operation Overview amp 1 For conditions for making a system switching request system switching methods refer to 2 in this section n 6 a EG ne 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 29 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY ceries a Operation of the QJ71PB92V in system switching 1 The control system CPU or QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a system switching error For errors that cause system switching system switching methods refer to 2 in this section 2 When system switching occurs the FDL address of the QJ71PB92V is changed as shown below Table4 7 FDL Address of the QJ71PB92V in System Switching Item IEE C ol E QJ71PB92V switched from control Control master FDL address Standby master FDL address system to new standby system QJ71PB92V switched from standby system to new control Standby master FDL address gt Control master FDL address system These changes can be confirmed in the Local FDL address display area Un G2257 3 System switching is performed and the QJ71PB92V in the new control system continues communication b Redundant system parameters In a redundant system including redundant CPUs write the same parameters to system A control system and B standby system System B Standby system System A Control system nooo a
191. The operation mode change is not allowed while the QJ71PB92V is executing the following processing Change the operation mode after the processing is completed If the operation mode change is attempted during execution of the following processing E3024 is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 e Acquisition of extended diagnostic information e Global control function e Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology e Time control function When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system 1 Operation mode of redundant CPU If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 lt gt Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used 2 Tracking transfer between redundant CPUs Stop the tracking transfer between the redundant CPUs Use the special relays SM1520 to SM1583 of the redundant CPU to stop the tracking transfer gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used If the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V is changed without stopping the tracking transfer an error code may be stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 3 Confirmation after operation mode change To use the red
192. UNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries b System switching due to a DP Slave error The QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a error in communication with a DP Slave 2 x W Control system Standby system NS 3 4 Continues communication New standby system New control system L JE x Executes system O ps E switching as ae 2S HO Bus terminator Bus terminator no r4 fe Communication F failure O Ta 8 Ww A N DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 31 System Switching due to DP Slave Error To switch the systems due to an error in communication with a DP Slave specify the system switching target DP Slaves in the following buffer memory e System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 gt Section 3 4 14 For the program example for setting the System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 refer to Section 7 9 1 o Z O O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 33 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY ceries E POINT 1 With a communication error identified in a system switching target DP Slave after system
193. V mounted on main base unit gt ae Redundant QJ71 a Redundant QU71 ae cpu PB92v SAPPY CPU PB9av Tracking cable MELSECNET H remote I O network Main base unit Figure 7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series lt Redundant system configuration QJ71PB92V mounted on extension base unit gt Power Power supply i supply eee Main base unit module module Tracking cable Power Power supply supply QJ71 Extension base unit module module PB92V Figure 7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter Continued Table7 1 Installation Positions of the QJ71PB92V and Corresponding Program Examples in This Chapter Installation Reference position Section 7 1 to 7 7 Section 7 8 Section 7 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY eries 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples This section explains the examples of I O data exchange programs The following system configuration is used as an example for explanations in Sections 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 1 System configuration
194. Y D100 614336 K96 Tracking transferred output data are written to Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 Figure 7 30 Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the New Control System After System Switching T7 69 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 2 Precautions a Operation mode change To change the operation mode of the QU71PB92V set the redundant CPU in Separate or Debug mode and refer to the program example in Section 7 1 1 2 c For precautions for changing the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 6 2 OVERVIEW gt oa wa Timing for turning ON an output signal of the QJ71PB92V Do not turn ON any output signal of the QJ71PB92V in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 No processing is performed CONFIGURATION SYSTEM O s When using ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 Use of a rise execution instruction is not allowed Example MOVP PLS etc SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 70 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le ceries 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples I O data exchange can be continued after system switching This section e
195. Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 n While Y01 is ON another failure is not detected Figure APPX 3 When Another Communication Failure Occurs While Y01 is ON When the Communication trouble detection signal X01 turns OFF by the Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 during a communication failure even if the reset signal Y01 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92D does not detect this failure again The QJ71PB92V detects the failure Communication failure 1 In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble detection Ci signal reset Y01 Communication trouble detection signal X01 y Currently existing failure is not detected again even if Y01 is turned OFF In the QJ71PB92V Diagnostic information detection ad reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection signal X01 UM Currently existing failure is detected upon turn OFF of Y01 Figure APPX 4 When Y01 is Turned OFF Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 11 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES MELSEC LY ceries b Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 and Communication trouble area clear end signal X02 If another communication failure occurs while the Communication trouble area clear request signal Y02 is ON the QJ71PB92D detects it again The QJ71PB9
196. ally Completed Continued eG Q series Buffer memory address Result 26485 6775H 26486 6776H 26487 6777H 26488 6778H Alarm data No 1 A response code is stored a Stored value A501H The alarm type is stored 7 Stored Jalie Alarm type A510 Diagnosis alarm A5111 Process alarm A512 Pull alarm A513 Plug alarm A514x Status alarm A5151 Update alarm Manufacturer A5161 specific alarm The alarm status and sequence No are stored 1 b15 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 The slot No is stored 1 Stored value 0 to 254 26489 6779H to 26528 67A0H Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26529 67A1H to 26568 67C8H Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26569 67C9h to 26608 67F0n Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H
197. ameter Setting Procedure Continued S 2 Precautions for using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system and writing S parameters through GX Configurator DP a Parameter writing from GX Configurator DP When writing parameters from GX Configurator DP the write target varies depending on the operation mode of the redundant CPU 2 fe Table6 1 Parameter Writing from GX Configurator DP 2 Le Target for parameter writing Description 26 nS MELSOFT GX Configurator DP S A Lra The connected system supports redundancy Both PLCs will be updated nado N bee Note during the download the system will be switched to Separate mode ZW and device tracking will be disabled E 9 r peal BEG Backup mode O x 6 When clicking the _OK button parameters are written i to both systems A and B a E When parameters are written the operation mode of the D redundant CPU is changed to Separate mode and i tracking transfer is stopped 3 MELSOFT GX Configurator DP A The connected system supports redundancy Should both PLCs be updated Note during the download device tracking will be disabled o rA z Separate mode O o When clicking the _Yes _ button parameters are written to both systems A and B 2 a When clicking the __No _ button parameters are written to the one system The tracking transfer of the redundant CPU is stopped when parameters are written A a6 To the next page ae lt 5 Se 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6
198. ameter setting of GX Configurator DP Slave is active is unchecked for this DP Slave Section 6 5 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function 4 27 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 Temporary slave reservation specification and cancellation Use the temporary slave reservation function by the following procedures a Specification method 1 Set Normal DP Slaves which are to be changed to Temporary slave reservations in the temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 gt Section 3 4 13 2 Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 3 Upon completion of the temporary slave reservation specification the results are stored in the temporary slave reservation status area Un G23600 to Un G23607 and the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON E gt Section 3 4 5 b Cancel method 1 Turn OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO 2 In the temporary slave reservation request area Un G23608 to Un G23615 cancel the DP Slaves specified as temporary slave reservation 3 Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 4 Upon completion of the temporary slave reservation cancellation the results are stored in the temporary slave reservation st
199. ange I O data 1 b10 The parameter No of I O bytes received from the DP Master 0 does not match that of the DP Slave b11 Extended diagnostic information exists 0 b12 The function requested by the DP Master is not supported 0 b13 Illegal response from DP Slave 0 b14 Illegal parameter s sent from the DP Master 0 b15 Controlled by another DP Master 0 Figure 3 24 Diagnostic Information Invalid Setting Area Un G2080 Even if diagnostic information corresponding to each bit is generated on a DP Slave it is not recognized as diagnostic information and the status of the QJ71PB92V is as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e No error code and detailed data is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G2307 to Un G23321 and or Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information does not turn ON in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 S POINT Set values into the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored 3 38 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries
200. area for mode 3 in the same order for each module b15 bO 22912 5980x Output data start address of 1st module 22913 5981H Output data start address of 2nd module 22036 59FCH 3 28 Output data start address of 125th module 22912 59801 The start address buffer memory address of the output data of the 1st module is stored Initial value FFFFu 3800H to 47FFH Output data start address FFFFH Output data not assigned Figure 3 13 Output Data Start Address Area for mode 3 Un G22912 to Un G23036 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 3 4 5 Slave status area This area stores the operation status of each DP Slave ai a u POINT m 1 The corresponding bits of the Slave status area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual order of assignment can be checked in Address information area z for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Documentation of I O z Mapping of GX Configurator DP 23 ee 2S nO FDL Addr Name Model 25 Slave_Nr_002 ST1H PB Order of assignment Slave_Nr_001 QJ7 1PB93D Slave_Nr_003 AJ95TB32 16DT 8 DI 8DO 7 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After mo
201. area for mode 3 sssesseseese2 3 27 Alarm ACK Ig 0 0 gt 33 Rt 7 36 Alarm acquisition Coccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoce 4 A Alarm area eeccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvccccccccccccoecs 3 51 Alarm read request signal Y18 ssessesseeseeseeseeee 3 15 Alarm read request with ACK esseesessessescecceces 7 41 Alarm read request without ACK sseeseeseeseeseees 7 32 Alarm read response signal X18 sssesseeseseeseeeee 3 15 Alarm request ALAA ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcccsoccs 3 5 Alarm response APeaceeeeecccccccccccccccccscccscccccce 3 51 All stations alarm Status eccecccccccccccccccccccccccceee 3 35 All stations diagnostic statuseessescssceseesceseeseees 3 32 Applicable SySteeceecccccccccccccccccccccsccccccccoccee 2 1 Automatic Refresh Parameters seseeseeseeseeseeceees 6 14 B Buffer memory list coccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccvcccce 3 17 Bus cycle LITE eo ecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsovcces 3 50 Bus cycle time area eocccccccccccccccccccccscccccscscccs 3 44 Bus parameters ccoooooooooooooooo000000000000000000000000 6 9 C Checking the LED status on GX Developer esssss9 9 3 Communication READY signal X1B sssessesseeee 3 16 Connector eececccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccces 5 Control master FDL address display area eeeseee 3 55 Current bus cycle LITNE ecececccccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 44 Current diagnostic information non notification time Arca ceccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccoeccvcccccoolce
202. art of data transfer global variables for all DUTs Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project Cancel Back Default Figure APPX 2 Checking Auto refresh Parameters Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 5 Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs MELSEC TE eries 1 I O signals a Input signals Some input signals have been changed Change programs referring to the following table TableAPPX 5 Input Signal Comparisons Signal name A1SJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V AJ71PB92D QJ71PB92D Compa tibility Replacement precautions Data exchange start completed signal X00 ON I O data exchange start completed OFF I O data exchange start not completed Diagnostic information detection signal X01 ON Diagnostic information detected OFF No diagnostic information detected 2 a in this section Diagnostic information area cleared signal ON Area cleared OFF Area not cleared Communication trouble area clear end signal ON Area cleared OFF Area not cleared X02 lt 3 2 b in this section X03 Use prohibited Global control completed signal X04 ON Global control completed OFF Global control not completed Global control failed signal X05 ON Global control failed OFF Global control normally complet
203. as turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 g Write Ax to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 of the QJ71PB92V h Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 i When the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 j The TEST LED turns ON and the processing for returning the QJ71PB92V to its factory set conditions is started k When the processing is completed the following status will be identified e When normally completed The TEST LED turns OFF e When failed The TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON When the processing has failed please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem POINT If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 gt Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used 9 6 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions 9 27 Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries 3 Reapply power to or reset the QCPU The PRM SET LED on the QJ71PB92V turns ON and the QJ71PB92V starts in the Parameter setting mode mode 1 Write the QJ71PB92V parameters
204. at Table7 33 Request Format Description Set value Set a request code Set value 1501H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave to which ACK is to be returned Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm ACK request The alarm ACK request is used for returning ACK to the DP Slave after execution of the alarm read request without ACK and deleting alarms in the DP Slave ACK can be returned for each alarm that was read 26434 6742h Set the alarm data No for which ACK is to be returned b15 to b8 b7 to bO 00n Fixed See below b5 ion i i 6 Bit Description 1 Execution instruction to alarm data No 6 b b7 Execution instruction to alarm data No 8 Execution instruction to alarm data No 7 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request T 36 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 34 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674En Stored value A501H The FDL address of the DP Slave that returned ACK is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm
205. ata The upper and lower bytes can be reversed swapped in word units when I O data is sent or received This simplifies programming as you no longer need to create a program for swapping the upper and lower bytes on the QJ71PB92V or DP Slave lt gt gt Section 4 4 Mountable on MELSECNET H remote I O station The QJ71PB92V can be mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station This allows you to install the QJ71PB92V at a remote site away from the QCPU Z Section 7 8 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error Stop Continue of I O data exchange For the case of a CPU stop error on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is mounted whether to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves can be specified lt 3 gt Section 4 6 Changing DP Slave setting to reserved station status temporarily Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP the station type of DP Slaves can be changed to Reserved station temporarily lt 3 Section 4 7 Since there is no need to change slave parameters changing a DP Slave setting to a reserved station is easy 1 1 Features 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 8 Redundant system can be constructed a Redundancy is available for the QJ71PB92V By mounting the QJ71PB92V together with a redundant CPU a redundant system can be constructed Even if the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and standby systems are OVERVIEW
206. ater Version 7 04E or later Version 1 15R or later Version 1 15R or later Version 7 03D or later Version 7 03D or later Version 1 15R or later Version 1 15R or later Version 7 04E or later Version 1 15R or later Single CPU system Version 7 or later 1CP Se i Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later Q12H Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Single CPU system 02PH Q06PHCPU ESAN 8 68W or lat RnR Multiple CPU system a ingle CP t OPE aes ere rt Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 17T or later QOOUJ Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Q00U Single CPU system Q01UCPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 78G or later Single CPU syst QO2UCPU plate AAEN Version 8 48A or later Multiple CPU system Q03UD Q04UDH Single CPU system i Version 8 48A or later QO6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 78G or later ingle CP t Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU X 9S CPU system Version 8 620 or later Multiple CPU system Q03UDE Q04UDEH Single CPU system O6UDEH Q13UDEH Version 8 68W or lat j Multiple CPU system rere Q26UDEHCPU Q10UDEH Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 78G or later Q50UDEH Single CPU system Not available Q100UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Version
207. ation refreshed into the devices X Y of the QCPU and use them in sequence programs CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 QJ71PB92V buffer memory Use MELSECNET H dedicated instructions REMFR REMTO instructions for reading from or writing to the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V After execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required until read write of actual data is completed For details on the REMFR REMTO instructions refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network T 66 7 8 2 Other precautions PROGRAMMING M ELSEG Q series 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System This section explains program examples for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system 1 Making a sequence program The following explains the sequence program creation for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system a Handling output signals of the QJ71PB92V 1 How to turn ON an output signal of the QJ71PB92V An output signal of the QJ71PB92V is turned ON with the OUT instruction using the start command device To keep each function enabled or re executable in the case of system switching tracking transfe
208. ation that occurred during I O data exchange is stored in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V To check the latest extended diagnostic information read it from the following buffer memory area e Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 For program examples on acquisition of extended diagnostic information refer to the following e Single CPU system 3 Section 7 2 e Redundant system L gt Section 7 9 2 4 6 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS M ELS eG cries 4 1 3 Global control function By multicasting broadcasting data the QJ71PB92V can simultaneously control I O data ai of each DP Slave in a specified group i O DP Master Class 1 Power supply QCPU pray module s Sent to group 1 5 qo p NG i DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave IN 2 Group 1 Group 2 2 q Figure 4 5 Global Control Function E Lu oO N o Z O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 7 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le eries 1 Global control services a SYNC UNSYNC 1 SYNC This service starts the SYNC output synchronization mode In the SYNC mode the
209. ations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module A 3 Wiring Precautions WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring PROFIBUS cables Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction CAUTION Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction Be sure to place the PROFIBUS cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact When disconnecting the PROFIBUS cable do not pull it by holding the cable part Be sure to hold its connector which is plugged into the module Pulling the cable with it connected to the module may damage the module and or cable or cause malfunctions due to poor contact of the cable A protectiv
210. atus area Un G23600 to Un G23607 and the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON For program examples on the temporary slave reservation function refer to the following e Single CPU system K gt Section 7 7 e Redundant system K gt Section 7 9 7 4 28 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 8 Redundant system support function z When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and gt standby systems are switched each other to continue communications z 1 Redundant system operation overview When the CPU or QJ71PB92V in the control system detects an error system switching is performed to continue communications o QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V Wir FDL address 0 FDL address 1 2S Control system Standby system Be Error 1 detected z 5 Tracking cable m N Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 O E 5 DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave ST1H PB i w PE QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V a 3 an Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 zie 4 gt FDL address 1 4 gt FDL address 0 ae zu New standby system New control system E65 Dao i Executes system S switching E N m Tracking cable Continues communication Bus terminator Bus terminator i aS 5 Fs DP
211. ave status and communication b8 Unable to exchange I O data with DP Slaves line DP Master Check the parameters 1 When I O data exchange is started Normally operating This occurs every time I O dat h is started b9 The DP Slave is not ready to exchange I O data i exchange is started DP Slave 2 While I O data are exchanged Check the DP Slave status and communication line The parameter No of I O bytes received from the Status 1 b10 Check the slave parameters DP Slave DP Master does not match that of the DP Slave b11 There is some extended diagnostic information Check the DP Slave status DP Master Check if the DP Slave supports the global control The function requested by the DP Master is not b12 function or not DP Slave supported eas Verify the DP Slave specifications b13 Illegal response from DP Slave Check the DP Slave or network status DP Master b14 Illegal parameter s sent from the DP Master Check the parameters DP Slave Check if more than one DP Master are b15 Controlled by another DP Master communicating with the same DP Slave DP Master Check the parameters 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 41 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries
212. bal control completed signal X04 and Global control failed signal X05 turn ON Writing of output data Data exchange start completed signal X00 Output data is written Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed signal X04 1 Output data area for mode 3 Un G14336 to Un G18431 Figure 3 4 Global Control Request Signal Y04 Global Control Completed Signal X04 3 10 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 5 Global control failed signal X05 z a If the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON while the Data exchange gt start completed signal X00 is OFF both the Global control completed signal 3 X04 and Global control failed signal X05 turn ON b The ON status of the Global control failed signal X05 means that the global control has failed X Remedy the cause of the error and execute the global control again r c Turning OFF the Global control request signal Y04 turns OFF the Global control Be failed signal X05 as 25 Global control request Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed Global control completed signal X04 f Global control failed Global control failed signal X05 Figure 3 5 Global Control Failed Signal X05 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo eeeeeeeveeeaeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaee
213. be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark o
214. bited 8D9 to 8DF 2272 Section 8EOx Current bus cycle time This area stores the current bus cycle time 0 R 348 H i 2273 This area stores the minimum value of the bus Section Min bus cycle time 0 R 8E 1h cycle time 3 4 8 2274 This area stores the maximum value of the bus Section Max bus cycle time 0 R 8E2n cycle time 3 4 8 2275 to 6143 System area Use prohibited pas 8E3x to 17F FH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 6144 to 10239 Section Input data area for mode 3 used to store the input data received from each 0 R 18004 to 27FFH DP Slave 3 4 4 Slave 10240 to 14335 System area Use prohibited a 28004 to 37FFH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is n 14336 to 18431 Section Output data area for mode 3 used to set the output data to be sent to each 0 R W 38004 to 47FFH DP Slave 3 4 4 Slave 18432 to 22527 System area Use prohibited ane 48004 to 57FFH Inc icati d de 3 thi i 22528 to 22777 Address information area nGommunication mode neds 2 this area is Section used to store the FDL address of each DP FFFFH R 58004 to 58F 9x for mode 3 3 4 4 Slave and I O data length 22778 to 22783 System area Use prohibited 58FAn to 58FFH In Communication mode mode 3 this area is A u i 22784 to 22908 Input data start address area Section used to store the start address buffer memory 0 R 59004 to 597C
215. ble area Un G2096 to Un G2110 1 In the QJ71PB92V Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information Currently existing failure is not detected again even if Y02 is turned OFF Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Diagnostic Un G23072 to Un G23321 information information Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 E Un G23328 to Un G23454 Currently existing failure is detected Local station error information area upon turn OFF of Y02 Un G23071 4 For details refer to the following manual C gt PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Figure APPX 6 When Y02 is Turned OFF AP PX 12 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries c Operation mode change request signal Y11 The following processing is executed at a different timing For the processing other than the following the operation is the same as that of the QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D e Self diagnostics start timing Self diagnostic mode mode 2 e Return to factory set condition timing By writing An to the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 the status is returned to the factory set condition with the Operation mode change request signal Y11 TROUBLESHOOTING In the QJ71PB92D the processing is executed when the Operation mode change request
216. c cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 7 23 7 4 4 ABORT service Class2_SERVICE eee ccccccceeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaas 7 27 TAS Program example seisein ceceeeke cane A aii EEE A SE AEE AAE A A AEA eeedene sting 7 29 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 2 2 ccecccececeeeeeeeeeeeecenecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesessnncaeaaeeeeeeeeees 7 31 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK rcssirerrcer kasseet eren teeri eeni SENEE EEE IR EA AAE KEELER PEERU A EENE SEEKER Y 7 32 5 2 Alarm ACK request ioiii irop ia aiee eea ieee arae eaa aaa ai e aa a aiaa a 7 36 7 5 3 Alarm read request With ACK sssesssssessssssrssssrnnesssnnnenstnnnnenetinnaasttnnnasnnannaenteanneeetianaaatnannenanan 7 41 T 54 Program example scorsnscrnrie aiiiar aai AiAi ANAE aAA EA AA AA 7 47 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slavess cecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeetceeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaes 7 49 7 6 1 Time data read request cccccccceccee cece eeeeeeeeceaeeaececeeeeeee eee caceaeaaeaaeeeceeeeeeeseseesesscenieeaeeeeeeeees 7 50 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC formal 0 0 ceeeeeeeente eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeenaeeeeeeeeaees 7 52 7 6 3 Time data write request cccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeececneeceeeeeeeeeeeecceaaaaaaaeeaeceeeeeeeeseeseseecssaneeaeeneees 7 54 ROA Progam example een aae a T T E T a TAA 7 56 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Re
217. cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS Print Date Manual Number Aug 2005 SH NA 080572ENG A The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Revision First edition Jun 2006 SH NA 080572ENG B Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS GLOSSARY Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 4
218. ce is for ending the SYNC mode This service is for synchronizing the input status of DP Slaves In the FREEZE mode the input status of a DP Slave is refreshed each time it receives the FREEZE service SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION FREEZE While no FREEZE service is received the input status is held UNFREEZE _ This service is for ending the FREEZE service Q e Supporting PROFIBUS DPV1 and PROFIBUS DPV2 PROFIBUS DPV1 and PROFIBUS DPV2 which are extended versions of PROFIBUS DP are supported The QJ71PB92V supports the following 1 PROFIBUS DPV1 e Acyclic communication with DP Slaves lt gt Section 4 2 1 e Alarm acquisition lt gt gt Section 4 2 2 e FDT DTM technology lt lt gt gt Section 4 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DPV2 e Time control function on DP Slaves gt gt Section 4 3 1 PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 1 1 Features 1 23 1 OVERVIEW 2 3 4 5 6 7 MELSEC TE eries I O data consistency Using the automatic refresh setting in GX Configurator DP or dedicated instructions BBLKRD BBLKWR ensures data consistency when reading writing I O data from the QJ71PB92V buffer memory lt gt gt Section 4 5 Easy parameter setup Use of GX Configurator DP enables bus parameters master parameters slave parameters and various other parameters to be easily set up C gt CHAPTER 6 Swapping of I O d
219. ceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeiaaeeeeeeeneeeeesenaaes 6 19 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters c ccecceceecceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeenecenaneaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 20 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer 0 eee cceceeneeeeeeeenne eee eeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeseeeiaeeeeeeenaes 6 23 CHAPTER7 PROGRAMMING 7 1 to 7 86 7 1 VO Data Exchange Program Examples ccccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseeeaeeeeteeeaeeeeeeeenaes 7 3 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaas 7 7 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions 0 ecccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeaaes 7 10 7 1 3 Program example using the MOV instruction ceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeetnaeeeeeeeaaes 7 12 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information 0 cceeeeeee 7 13 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function 200 0 eee cccceeeeeee eee eeene eee eeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeenaeeeeeeenaaes 7 14 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves ccescceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaees 7 15 7 4 4 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE ccccececeeeteeeeeeeeenteeeeeeentaeeeeeeeeaas 7 17 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE ccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeenaaes 7 20 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE e
220. configured station 5024 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V E503H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E504H The alarm read request code is incorrect Check if the specified request code is correct and retry a Check if the bit specified in the buffer memory address E505H The ACK request bit is incorrect 26434 6742H is correct and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E506H Alarm read error response actions Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 E507H Currently not exchanging I O data and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E508H There is an error response to the ACK request f actions Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E510H Physical execution error was detected f corrective actions E520H Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is Slave side correctly set or not and retry E521H There is no alarm that can be used on the DP Slave side For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave oe Check if the DP Slave supports the alarm function or not E530H Use of the alarm function is not allowed and retry A Check if the DP Slave is properly exchanging I O data or E531H Invalid DP Slave stat
221. control system QJ71PB92V sends a system ai switching request to the redundant CPU until control is started with another QJU71PB92V in i a new control system System A System A System B System B QJ71PB92V Redundant CPU Redundant CPU QJ71PB92V l l Control system Control system Standby system Standby system fi 3 Zz System switching A 8 request 25 System switching request System switching request 2 Z O lt Q u Oo w a Oo New standby system New standby system New control system New control system Figure 3 41 System Switching Time in Redundant System When QJ71PB92V Requests System Switching to Redundant CPU FUNCTIONS a Redundant system switching time calculation formula The system switching time in the redundant system can be obtained from either of the following calculation formulas e When the systems are not switched due to a slave error or when the system switching condition Un G23648 is set to OR the system switching time Tscu is SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Tscu ms TcpuA Tsw Tp Scan x 2 1 e When the system switching condition Un G23648 is set to AND the system 7 switching time Tsca is E Tsca ms Tscu Nand x 20 To the next page g z g 0 g or ao az 3 5 Processing Time 3 65 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries Table3 30 Items in Tics and Tlsc
222. creen use GX Developer Version 8 27D or later Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name QJ71PB92V Product information 090520000000000 D 1 0 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot Module Information Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Displays the latest error code Remote password setting status Error Display No Error Code Present Error F109 1 F109 Displays the error history The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Error contents Disposal Displays the description of the error code selected Contents Parameters of the QJ71PB92D were written with the 0J71PB92D compatible in the error history and the action against it function disabled Disposal Change the module selected in the GX Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92V and write the parameters Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches HW Information Stop monitor Figure 9 8 Module s Detailed Information Screen GX Developer 9 12 9 5 Error Codes Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG lA series 9 5 1 Error codes E2004 to E2FFu Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information o Z E e e T mo wW l a O hd Table9 4 Error codes E200H to E2FFH E
223. curs The data before occurrence of the CPU stop error are held and they are sent to the DP Slaves Input data received from DP Slaves updates the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V DP Master Class 1 A stop error j occurred Si I O data exchange DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave 4 The output data before the stop error are held Figure 4 26 When Error time output mode is Set to Hold QJ71 PB92V 4 26 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 4 7 Temporary slave reservation function Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the DP Slave type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Since there is no need to change slave parameters changing a DP Slave setting to a reserved station is easy OVERVIEW 1 DP Slaves that can be changed to Temporarily reserved stations Normal DP Slaves can be changed to Temporarily reserved stations Changing Reserved stations DP Slaves set as reserved stations with slave parameters to Normal DP Slave status is not allowed Temporarily Normal DP Slave BEEE RA i m gt Can be changed Temporarily Normal DP Slave mna aau nu Can be changed X Normal DP Slave ksa HEHEHE Reserved station Not changed Figure 4 27 DP Slaves That Can Be Changed to Temporarily Reserved Stations 1 In the slave par
224. curs during execution of the global control function the processing ai cannot be continued i This section explains a program example for reexecuting the global control function in the case of system switching 1 Device assignments in program example Z a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V 5 ne The devices are the same as those in Section 7 3 1 a og nO b Devices used by the user Table7 74 List of User Devices Description Device Description z q ON for 1 scan only after switching system from X25 Global control execution command SM1518 O standby to control Ww N MO Refresh start request 37 Section 7 9 1 2 Tracking devices for reexecuting the function after system switching Data in the following devices are tracking transferred z e Start command device by which the Global control request signal Y04 is turned 5 ON R e Start command device to which global control request data are set W Table7 75 Tracking Transfer Devices in the Program Example for the Global Control Function 5 a WE Device Description Device Description z A g PETS Oas Global control execution command E 8 fe wn Lu of gt naw 3 Program example If system switching occurs with Global control execution command X25 ON the global control may be reexecuted after the system switching To prevent reexecution perform the following before Global control request signal Y04 turns ON in the new control system PARAMETER SETTING
225. cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries a Bus cycle time Bc calculation formula The bus cycle time Bc of the DP Master can be obtained from the following calculation formula The symbols within the brackets indicate units Bc ms Max MSI Pt i Tsdi my Lr i 1 n number of DP Slaves Max A B Aor B whichever is greater Table3 23 Items in the bus cycle time Bc calculation formula Item Description MSI ms Minimum polling cycle Min slave interval Polling time to i th station Treqa Max_Tsdra Tres e Treq i ms Request transmission time of i th station Number of bytes output to i th station 9 x 11 bit x 10 Transmission speed bps Pt i ms e Max_Tsdr i ms Response time TBit of i th station 2 3 x 103 Transmission speed bps e Tres i ms Response transmission time of i th station Number of bytes input from i th station 9 x 11 bit lt 103 Transmission speed bps Tsditw ms Request response processing time Tst of DP Master QJ71 PB92V 4x 103 Transmission speed bps Lr ms Data refresh time 5 50 Number of DP Slaves x 150 x 10 1 The value set on the Master Settings screen of GX Configurator DP 2 The MaxTsdr value described in the GSD DDB file of the DP Slave 3 Tsi Bit Time is a unit that expresses the time required for 1 bit data transmission as 1 The actual processing time differs as s
226. d SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING 2 Operation mode change result area Un G2256 This area stores the execution result of the operation mode change request Table3 14 Operation Mode Change Result Area Un G2256 PROGRAMMING Stored Value Description A300H Normally completed Other than A300H Failed Error code lt gt Section 9 5 2 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 23 3 4 3 Operation mode change area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries 3 4 4 I O data exchange area This area is used for the I O data exchange function x POINT 1 Data are assigned to the I O data exchange area in the order of parameters set in GX Configurator DP in the order of FDL addresses The actual order of assignment can be checked in Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Documentation of I O Mapping of GX Configurator DP FDL Addr Name Model Slave_Nr_002 Order of assignment Slave_Nr_001 Q171PB93D Slave_Nr_003 AJ95TB32 16DT 8 DI 8DO 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s on GX Configurator DP the buffer memory is reassigned After modifying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program 5 gt Sectio
227. d Diagnostic Error Information 7 13 7 2 Program Example for Acquisition of Extended Diagnostic Error Information PROGRAMMING MELSEGC TE eries 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function 1 Assignment of devices in program examples The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 12 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Device Description Device Description X04 Global control completed signal Y04 Global control request signal X05 Global control failed signal b Devices used by the user Table7 13 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X25 Global control execution command MO Refresh start request lt _ gt Section 7 1 1 2 Program example MO X25 Y4 X4 U0 f ttt ri HF mov H320 62081 Sends SYNC service to groups and 2 SET Y4 Global control request X4 Y4 X5 1 1 HF RST Y4 J Global control completion rocessin X5 Processing for failure of P 2 It global control RST Y4 J Global control completion processing Figure 7 13 Program Example for Global Control Function 7 3 Program Example for Global Control Function 7 14 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC LAY ce
228. d from E4AAH the DP Slave side E4ABH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E4ACH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave E4ADH side E4AEH Incorrect request was detected on the DP Slave side E4AFH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the E4B0u DP Slave side E4B1H Resource error was detected during read processing on Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is the DP Slave side correctly set or not and retry EABOH Resource error was detected during write processing on For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave the DP Slave side E4B3H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave E4B4H side The service not available for the specified DP Slave was E4B5H requested E4B6H Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the DP Slave side E4B7H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E4B8H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request Roe Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E4C0H The CommRef number is incorrect retry E4D0H E4D1H E4D2H E4D3H E4D4H E4D5H f Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Hardware failure ae is E4D6H explaining a detailed description of the problem E4D7H E4D8H E4D9H E4DAH E4DBH Another Acyclic communication or alarm request is being
229. d response R f X06 Y06 Extended diagnostic information read request signal signal b Devices used by the user Table7 10 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X24 Extended diagnostic information read command c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 11 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description D2000 to Extended diagnostic error information read result D2126 1 D2500 to For word conversion of extended diagnostic error D2502 information data size 1 Varies depending on the data size of the extended diagnostic error information 2 Program example X24 Y6 UO The target FDL address If MoV KI 623456 J is set to 1 SET Y6 Extended diagnostic information read request x6 6 uor The read result and data m ae H BMOV 623457 D2000 K2 71 eine ietneel UO D2000 HOA200 Bov G23459 D2002 K3 J P address c y D2001 K2 D2500 J Reads the extended s Ka D2500 D2501 D2502 diagnostic error information U0 cc So 623462 D2005 D2502 J Extended diagnostic error RST Y6 J information read Processing for completion processing failure of extended gt D2000 HOA200 diagnostic error information read p RST Y6 J information read completion processing Extended diagnostic error Figure 7 12 Program Example for Acquisition of Extende
230. data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed To the next page PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Table7 35 Response Format When Failed Continued Buffer memory address Result 26449 6751h to The alarm data that was read by the alarm read request without ACK is stored 26484 6774n lt gt Section 7 5 1 2 a 26485 6775h An error code is stored lt Section 9 5 4 1 When E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 1 is stored 1 5 gt Section 9 5 4 26486 6776n 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 Sapna No 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 2 is stored 1 3 gt Section 9 5 4 26487 6777H 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 3 is stored lt
231. data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2 1 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 1 alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 2 alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed b5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 3 alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 4 alarm data No 8 26448 6750h 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 response to alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 response to alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of Completion status of response to alarm data No 3 response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 N
232. dby to control SM1518 gt Figure 7 28 a bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T7 68 PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 2 Keeping output data To keep output data after system switching perform the following Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the control system Before system switching Write the output data to the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 using devices Tracking transfer the output data stored in the devices Xoc gresek jH G BBLKWR Uo K14336 D100 k96 Output data are written to Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 using devices Output data stored in the devices are tracking transferred Figure 7 29 Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the Control System Before System Switching 1 Figure 7 29 is an example for using a dedicated instruction 2 When using the automatic refresh output data in the specified auto refresh target devices are tracking transferred e Processing of the QJ71PB92V in the new control system After system switching The tracking transferred output data are written to the Output data area Un G14336 to Un G18431 in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 This processing is not needed when the automatic refresh is used ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SH1518 X1B XID KIF aaa UDA It Hf pwO
233. diagnostic Extended diagnostic information read request information read request signal Y06 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 Extended diagnostic information read completed Figure 3 6 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Request Signal Y06 Extended Diagnostic Information Read Response Signal X06 For details on acquisition of extended diagnostics information refer to Section 4 1 2 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 7 Data consistency start request signal YOC Data consistency requesting signal X0C a The Data consistency start request signal YOC is used to enable the data consistency function for dedicated instructions Table3 5 Data Consistency Start Request Signal YOC ON OFF Status Description Enables read write executed by dedicated instructions Turning ON the Data consistency start request signal on YOC turns ON the Data consistency requesting signal X0C Disables read write executed by dedicated instructions OFF Turning OFF the Data consistency start request signal YOC turns OFF the Data consistency requesting signal X0C and the BBLKRD and BBLKWR instructions are not executed b Use the Data consistency start request signal YOC and Data consistency requesting signal X0C as interlock signals for dedicated instructions c
234. difying parameters review the sequence program If some DP Slaves are expected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt gt Section 6 5 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 29 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 30 MELSEC TE eries 1 Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Address Un G23047 The communication status of each DP Slave is stored in this area Initial value 0000n When the Data exchange start request signal Y00 is turned OFF all the information of the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 is cleared 0 I O data communication error or no communication including reserved temporary slave reservation and or not configured stations 1 Exchanging I O data 23040 5A00x 16 23041 5A01H 32 23042 5A02n 48 23043 5A03x 23045 5A05x 23046 5A06n 112 DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 31 2 1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 47 46 45 44 35 34 33 51 50 49 67 66 65 83 82 81 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99
235. disabled Has an error Check if the corresponding bit is ON 1 in occurred on the DP Slave the Slave status area Diagnostic information is Diagnostic information detection detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 S signal X01 is OFF or the RSP ERR LED is OFF When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is enabled Check if the corresponding bit is ON 1 in the Slave status area L gt PROFIBUS Interface Module User s Manual End Figure 9 5 Troubleshooting When Communications with DP Slaves Are Not Possible Continued 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible 9 7 Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Aeres 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System This section explains the troubleshooting procedures for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system 9 4 1 When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching The following shows the troubleshooting steps for the case where output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Output data turns OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching Check the intelligent function module switch setting L 3 Section6 7 Is the standby master FDL address of the QJ71PB92V set correctly Does the set watchdog timer value for each DP Slave satisfy the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 Set a proper watchdog timer value that satisfy the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5
236. ditional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with EMC and Low Voltage Directives MANUAL ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 7 MELSEC series 77 5 Chapter index 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration The chapter of the current page is highlighted DSJ overview This section explains the basic PROFIBUS DP configuration for using the QJ71PB92V as a DP Master Class 1 t i 1 1 i i 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network i i Reference 1 1 System equipment The following table shows the equipment required for the PROFIBUS DP system A reference in this manual or a reference manual is followed by 7 gt Table2 4 System Equipment System Equipment DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V Configuration tool GX Configurator DP Version 7 or later DP Slave QU71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater Required when 32 or more DP S PROFIBUS cable aoa e F Bus terminator LY Description ves are connected SPECIFICATIONS 2 Network configuration In the PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following conditions must be satisfied FUNCTIONS a Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used DP Master
237. dow in GX Configurator DP Has settings configured in 1 Check the settings in the Transfer Setup window j the Transfer Setup window and the Master Settings window in GX Configurator DP 2 Check the Starting I O number setting in the Master Settings window 1 Set 9244H for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer 2 Write the PLC parameters to the QCPU 3 Reset the QCPU or power it OFF and then ON Is 9244H set for Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches in GX Developer Completed Figure 9 4 When the QJ71PB92D Compatible Function id Enabled 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP 9 5 Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Kel ries 9 3 When Communication with DP Slaves Is Not Possible The following shows the troubleshooting procedures when communications between the QJ71PB92V and DP Slaves are not possible Communication with DP Slave is not possible No Check the PROFIBUS cable connections L gt Section 5 5 Are PROFIBUS cables wired correctly Yes Is a bus terminator connected to the terminal station of the network Or is the specified bus terminator used No Check the bus terminator and connect it gt Section 5 5 1 Yes Is the PROFIBUS DP network configuration correct No of connected modules etc No Check the PROFIBUS network configuration
238. e Tracking cable In the redundant system including redundant CPUs the same parameters are written to systems A control and B standby Parameters set in GX Configurator DP and GX Developer Figure 4 29 Redundant System Parameters 4 30 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries 2 System switching error System switching methods There are the following cases where system switching occurs by an error OVERVIEW Table4 8 System Switching Methods Method Reference Switching by system switching request from QJ71PB92V 2 a and 2 b in this section Switching by system switching request from other network module than QJ71PB92V System switching when a fault occurs in the control User s manual for the redundant system system for the CPU module used System switching using GX Developer System switching by system switching instruction CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a System switching due to a QJ71PB92V error The QJ71PB92V performs system switching when it detects a error that disables the system operation SPECIFICATIONS Control system v New standby system Standby system 4 Continues communication New control system VA Error in QJ71PB92V oo0000 nooo Executes switching
239. e Transmission speed 1 5Mbps 9 z nO Operation mode Communication mode mode 3 WO data area for FDL address 2 Input data area for mode 3 6144 180014 to 6239 185FH 12 Buffer memory Output data area for mode 3 14336 3800H to 14431 385FH Z E lt o WOcdinere or PLECE Input data area for mode 3 6240 18601 E W Seay Output data area for mode 3 14332 3860H D 1 Set the control master FDL address in the master parameter setting of GX Configurator DP 2 c in this section Set the standby master FDL address in the Intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer gt 2 d in this section o z 9 b DP Slave settings 9 ire Table7 66 DP Slave Settings 1st module Description Ww Kz LO FDL address FDL address 2 R 29k lt Input data size 96 words 192 bytes PE I O data size Zou Output data size 96 words 192 bytes 7 22 Table7 67 DP Slave Settings 2nd module z E W FDL address FDL address 3 3 Input data size 1 words 2 bytes I O data size 7 Output data size 1 words 2 bytes PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T 72 PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries c Parameter settings in GX Configurator DP lt Master parameters gt DP Master Parameters Wizard Master Settings Set the transmission speed Baudrate Set the contro
240. e Single CPU system gt gt Section 7 6 e Redundant system gt Section 7 9 6 4 18 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS 4 4 Data Swap Function MELSEC TE eries This function swaps the upper and lower bytes in word units when I O data is sent and received Use this function for DP Slaves whose word structure is different upper and lower bytes are reversed from that of the QU71PB92V This function enables you to swap upper and lower bytes to exchange I O data without the need to create a special sequence program for the swapping QJ71PB92V area Input data DP Slave Input area Data 1 H Data 1 L Data 1 Data 1 L H Data 1 Data 1 L H Input data 2 Data 2 H Data 3 H Data 2 L Data 3 L Data2 Data 2 L H Data2 Data 2 L H Output data Data 3 Data 3 L H Output 4f Data 4 data area H Data 4 L Bulssaooid dems ezeq Data4 Data 4 L H 1 Data swap setting Configure the data swap setting using the slave parameter Slave Settings window in GX Configurator DP Data swap setting must be made for each DP Slave Select the Swap I O Bytes in Master checkbox to enable the swap setting for a DP Slave I O data exchange H High byte L Low byte Figure 4 16 Data Swap
241. e differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H To the next page 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries Table7 21 Request format Continued Offset Address Description Set Value 8 8H 1 Sets D_Type The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set D_Len The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 9 9H to 127 7FH Empty area Write 0000n Set value Fixed to 0000H 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 24 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 22 Response Format When Normally Completed Offset Address Result 0 0H A response code is stored Stored value A412H 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave connected to the network is stored Stored value 00H to 7DH 0 to 125 2 The Co
242. e film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Startup and Maintenance Precautions WARNING Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the connector screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS Personal Handy phone System more than 25cm 9 85 inches away in all directions from the programmable controller Failure to do so may cause malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to disc
243. e formats used for the time control over DP Slaves refer to Sections 7 6 1 to 7 6 3 FUNCTIONS 2 Program example a Settings The setting is the same as in Section 7 6 4 1 b Device assignments in program example 1 Devices used by the QJ71PB92V The devices are the same as in Section 7 6 4 2 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Devices used by the user Table7 76 List of User Devices Device Description Device Time control execution command SM1518 3 Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target The device assignment is the same as that in Section 7 6 4 2 Description PARAMETER SETTING ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 84 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries c Tracking devices for reexecuting the function in the case of system switching In the program for the time control over DP Slaves data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Time control start request signal Y19 is turned ON e Start command device to which time control request data are set Table7 77 Tracking Transfer Devices in the Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves Device Description Device Description Time control execution command d P
244. ea Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 i This area stores the reserved or temporary slave reservation setting of each DP a Slave Initial value 0000n 5 0 Normal DP Slave or not configured station 1 Reserved or temporary slave reservation z i DEC HERI b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO O T 23048 5A08x 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 7 Each bit indicates oZ the n th DP Slave ao 23049 5A09u 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 23050 5A0An 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 23051 5A0Bn 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 23052 5A0Cu 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 23053 5A0Du 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 23054 5A0Enx 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 23055 5A0Fu 1 1 11125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 25 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 23055 5A0Fn are fixed to 0 Figure 3 17 Slave Status Area Reserved station setting status Un G23048 to Un G23055 When the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is turned ON the data in the Slave
245. eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseenaeeeeesenaaees 4 11 4 2 2 AVANIMACQUISIION e cen Sven tvend sleet eaet toasted ted a genes abhaceereds a taeda onal awed dst gene eeens 4 14 4 2 3 FDT D IM technology aietara ints aan eee et ei add Mote 4 16 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 FUNCHONS vari tcteeviine Qed ine dines evita ead el Aline edd ede 4 17 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slave 0 eee ceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeene eee eeeaeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeiaeeeeeeeeniaeeeseeeaes 4 17 44 Data Swap Function EE E E E A E E AE 4 19 4 5 Data Consistency FUNCtiON orsa ni e i ei died eii i aa iradia A aiii 4 21 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error ccccececeeeeeeceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeesensneaeeees 4 24 4 7 Temporary slave reservation FUNCTION ccccceeeeeececceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeecaaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesenececcanaeeeeeess 4 27 4 8 Redundant system support FUNCTION 20 cece cece eeeeceecee cee ee eee eee eet tec eaeaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecsncseesaeeaeeeeeess 4 29 49 QU71PB92D Comipatible FUNnCtion ieina a a Seances daa a aeaea e eaaa 4 39 CHAPTERS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 5 1to 5 12 5 1 Implementation and Installation cccceecececeeeeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeececeaeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenccacaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 SiS Handling precautlonS essan A T O 5 1 5 2 Procedures Before System Operation ccc terete eect ee eee tie ee eee teee eee tiieeeeeenaeeeeeenieeeen 5 2
246. ect C User variables AIDUTs Cancel Back Default Figure 4 22 Automatic Refresh Setting GX Configurator DP For the automatic refresh setting method refer to Section 6 6 2 4 22 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries b Data consistency function by dedicated instructions Use the BBLKRD read and BBLKWR write instructions as dedicated instructions for reading writing QJ71PB92V buffer memory to execute the data S x consistency function z For details on dedicated instructions refer to Chapter 8 For program examples on the I O data exchange using dedicated instructions r refer to the following 3 Single CPU system gt Section 7 1 2 26 e Redundant system K gt Section 7 9 1 i 2 3 Precautions S a Applicable QCPUs x For QCPUs supporting the data consistency function refer to Section 2 1 B b Transmission delay time when the data consistency function is used When the data consistency function is used the transmission delay time between the QCPU and DP Slaves increases because the time waiting for read write from the QCPU or data transfer from to DP Slaves arises lt _ gt Section 3 5 2 The data consistency function can be disabled in the automatic refresh setting If this function is unnecessary disable it o Z O O Z Le c When the data consistency function is enabled in the automatic refresh setting 5 Dedicated instructions
247. ed Extended diagnostic information read response X06 signal Use prohibited O ON Completed OFF Not completed X07 Use prohibited O X08 Use prohibited O X09 Use prohibited XOA Use prohibited O XOB Use prohibited Oo Data consistency requesting signal ON Data consistency n X0C enable Use prohibited O OFF Data consistency disabled Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible AP PX 6 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs To the next page APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries TableAPPX 5 Input Signal Comparisons Continued Compa Replacement TROUBLESHOOTING A1SJ71PB92D iit QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D tibility precautions AJ71PB92D Watchdog timer error signal ON Watchdog timer X0D Use prohibited error occurred A OFF Watchdog timer error not occurred When replacing the A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D refer to 1 shown below 0 Ww 9 fal Z i a a lt X0E Use prohibited O XOF Use prohibited O Operation mode signal ON Other than ae Operation mode signal The operation mode in Communication oe X10 mode mode 3 ON Parameter setting mode mode 1 A which this signal is ON is OFF Other than Parameter setting mode mode 1 different OFF Communication mode mode 3 INDEX Operation mode change compl
248. ed Reads the detailed error code lt gt Un G26446 Response code Un G26447 to Un G26768 Processing for failed completion Figure 7 16 Sequence Program Alarm Acquisition 7 31 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK This section explains the request and response formats of the alarm read request without ai ACK i 1 Request format Table7 30 Request Format O Buffer memory address Description Set value z 26432 6740H Set a request code ae ae Set value 1500H H z gt Set the FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm is to be read 22 26433 6741H Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 Empty area Write 0000n 26434 6742n f Set value Fixed to 0000H 2 O amp o i O a N 2 fe E O ra tw 28 a ong Zujw 2uq Zou hee nan PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition T 32 7 5 1 Alarm read request without ACK PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 31 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26446 674EH Stored value A500H 26447 674EH The FDL address of the DP Slave from which alarm was read is stored Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0
249. ed on the estimated value of the bus cycle time Use Min slave interval for Target Token Rotation Time T_tr Select this checkbox to automatically set the Min slave interval value for Target Rot Time T_tr of the bus parameter Clear the checkbox when multiple DP Masters are on a PROFIBUS DP network The sum of Min slave interval values of all DP Masters is set to T_tr Polling timeout Set the maximum time required for a requester to receive the response in communication between DP Masters Setting range 1 to 65535 Unit x 1 ms Default 50 x 1 ms Slave watchdog Select this checkbox to batch set watchdog timer values for all DP Slaves Setting range 1 to 65025 Unit x 10 ms Default 5 x 10 ms Calculate time Select this checkbox to set an optimum value for Slave watchdog The value will be set to five times of the maximum estimated value of the bus cycle time and Min slave interval Estimated bus cycle time Displays the estimated minimum interval of the bus cycle time When communications are performed with another DP Master module or acyclic communications are performed the bus cycle time will be longer than the displayed value lt 5 Section 3 5 1 When setting Min slave interval and Slave watchdog using the displayed value set sufficient time considering the time that will be taken for communications with another DP Master module or acyclic communications
250. eee e a cov ead dias ede eed A 13 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 0 ccecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeceeaeeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeeesaees A 14 GEOSSARN 23 raae en e atts odie Src Aeee hie anand ani aha dames ca ates da sult pends Aen aes ada en eden eee desta a needa A 15 PACKING HIS Thi inana bs dasccceld iddeie i a a a aa A 16 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 6 VV Features oora iei ia cecen a Hobdedeed bela acc AAA aA ARARA Ceia SEENE TAES EE ATAARE 1 3 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 18 21 Applicable Syste Mireia vieppei Madde oboe edydeces seedbeceeashadecteta vaceceuestandbecdel E EAA 2 1 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations 0 ceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 2 5 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration or s anire berriei errire E EA EE EAE ER A i 2 6 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network 0 000 0c cccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas 2 6 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration exampleS sssseeeeeseesrrresserirsssttrrsstrttrnesstnnnsnsttnnnnsent 2 7 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only eceeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaes 2 9 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration esssecessssseeesennneeeesrninsrennnnetinaaenetennsasnnanansininnndatnanneeenan 2 9 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units sind A A E E AE A E A A E E EEEE 2 11 2 3 3 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ
251. eeeeeeeee 7 52 Transmission delay IME ececcccccccccccccccccccccccces 3 63 Transmission GISTANCE eececececcccccccscccccccscccscscse 3 7 W Watchdog timer error signal X1F essessesseseeeeeee 3 16 Wiring specifications for bus terminator essessesse995 14 1 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE SOHOSOHOSOHSOHSSHSHSOH SH OOHOHOHOOOOOOOE 7 20 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed
252. eeeeeeeeeeeeee 8 For details on the global control refer to Section 4 1 3 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 11 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 12 MELSEC TE eries 6 Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 a Turn ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal YO6 when reading the extended diagnostic information of the FDL address specified in the Extended diagnostic information read request area Un G23456 b Turning ON the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 clears the information of the Extended diagnostic information read response area Un G23457 to Un G23583 c When the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 is turned ON and reading of the extended diagnostic information of the specified FDL address is completed the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 turns ON d After the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 has turned ON turn OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 e Turning OFF the Extended diagnostic information read request signal Y06 turns OFF the Extended diagnostic information read response signal X06 Extended
253. eees 3 43 34 8 BUS CYClE MIMO AOA eeaeee sageuedacs cacedacddedeets dan A ptietda cds cecaaes EAEE 3 44 349 Global control areas ner a a a EA A A tages a e r AA a A AT 3 45 3 4 10 Acyclic COMMUNICATION area o oo nisiende niei eiia airiai iit 3 47 3242141 ALAN Alas 222030 Peel oR wae ee aa ea aa a te aaa en Ua tee an aa dnon dn thai a a 3 51 3 4212 Time contro area sez sve a E EAE Spealadea eee aaah ealvaleiseed Haagen 3 51 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation Ara eceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeaaeeeeseenaeess 3 52 3 4 14 Reduridant System NOT ieir arn A TA A TARE EIEEEI E RRT 3 54 3 5 Processing TINE aA E antenna RAA A T OEO 3 59 TTO BUS CVCE TMG sereni A A A AAEE EEEE 3 59 3 5 2 Transmission delay UME eenia n T E E E 3 63 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant SYSteM cc ceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeteeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeenaaees 3 65 CHAPTER4 FUNCTIONS 4 1to4 45 421 PROFIBUS DPVO FUNCIONS cic csi ea E A sedan caped teeae ad tenes conde canned ce devia etnet ncaa lets 4 2 AA UOrdatarexchanG ers 2sccdes6 rode cush steward sachcden T O ehe desde edt naan nteen N 4 2 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information ccceceeeeeeeetteeeeeeenaes 4 4 Ako Global contro FIn tioN o a a R Ses ces gas T AEAT EE 4 7 4 2 _PROFIBUS DPV 1 FUNCHONS verrnoe i a a Eea RU Aea AE AAAA ARERR 4 11 4 2 14 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves i c
254. eeeseeeeoeeeeaeeeeae eee e ee 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 15 3 3 2 Details of I O signals OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt Q u 3 w a ao FUNCTIONS PROCEDURES BEFORE PARAMETER SETTING SYSTEM OPERATION PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC A series 12 Time control start request signal Y19 Time control start response signal X19 a Turn ON the Time control start request signal Y19 when executing the time control over DP Slaves according to the information set in the Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 b Turning ON the Time control start request signal Y19 clears the information in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 c The Time control start response signal X19 turns ON when the time control over DP Slaves is executed and the execution result is stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 d Read the execution result from the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and turn OFF the Time control start request signal Y19 e Turning OFF the Time control start request signal Y19 turns OFF the Time control start response signal X19 For details on time control over DP Slaves refer to Section 4 3 1 13 Communication READY signal X1B a The Communication READY signal X1B turns
255. een generated the diagnostic information extended diagnostic information and or local station error information is stored in the buffer memory SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o Diagnostic information area Clear request 2 clear request signal Y02 i Diagnostic information area Clear completed n cleared signal X02 iu Figure 3 3 Diagnostic Information Area Clear Request Signal Y02 Diagnostic Information Area Cleared 5 Signal X02 o z 5 Fs A Yn 6 a On 0 az 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 9 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Aerie 4 Global control request signal Y04 Global control completed signal X04 a Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 when executing the global control b When the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON and global control processing is completed the Global control completed signal X04 turns ON c After the Global control completed signal X04 has turned ON turn OFF the Global control request signal Y04 d Turning OFF the Global control request signal Y04 turns OFF the Global control completed signal X04 e Turn ON the Global control request signal Y04 while the Data exchange start completed signal X00 is ON If the Global control request signal Y04 is turned ON with the Data exchange start completed signal X00 OFF both of the Glo
256. em switching is completed before doing the above operations Completion of the system switching can be confirmed by either of the following methods Table4 12 Confirmation of system switching completion Item QJ71PB92V in new control system Communication READY signal X1B and Module READY signal X1D are ON RUN and READY LEDs are ON RSP ERR and FAULT LEDs are OFF 6 Operations available for the QJ71PB92V in the standby system The following operations are available for the QJ71PB92V in the standby system when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode Input signals LEDs e Writing parameters by GX Configurator DP Changing the operation mode gt Section 6 2 e Restarting the QJ71PB92V using the Restart request signal YOD IF Section 3 3 2 8 1 When the redundant CPU is in Backup mode GX Configurator DP automatically changes it to the Separate mode to write the parameters 4 36 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries b Precautions on the DP Slave side 1 Watchdog timer setting value Set a watchdog timer value so that it satisfies the following formula gt A ij i lu If the formula is not satisfied a watchdog timer error occurs in DP Slaves 5 during system switching Table4 13 Watchdog timer setting value z System Configuration Description Reference z When using only non redundant DP Slaves Section 2 3 2 1 AS gt
257. er to stop or continue I O data exchange with DP Slaves when a s CPU stop error occurs on a QCPU or remote I O station where the QJ71PB92V is Output status setting for the a mounted Section 4 6 case of a CPU stop error tu When the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system I O data exchange with DP 2 Slaves is continued regardless of the setting until systems A and B go down E Temporary slave Without modifying the slave parameter in GX Configurator DP this function allows the Section 4 7 z i reservation function DP Slave type to be changed to Reserved station temporarily Redundant system support When the control system CPU or the QJ71PB92V detects an error the control and Sedins i function standby systems are switched each other to continue communications QU71PB92D compatible This function is used to replace the mee with the QJ71 Rie l dion When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJ71PB92V using the Section 4 9 g uncti z QJ71PB92D compatible function a oO no 6 a EO 3 2 Function List 3 3 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU This section explains the input output signals of the QU71PB92V 3 3 1 List of I O signals The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the QJ71PB92V is 0000 installed to slot 0 of the main base unit Device X represents input sig
258. error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 61 List of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X20 I O data exchange start command SB20 Module status X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word SB47 Baton pass status own station X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word SB49 Data link status own station MO Refresh start request SW70 0 Baton pass status of each station M1 For MC instruction SW74 0 Cyclic transmission status of each station M300 ON for 1 scan only after start of communication SW78 0 Parameter communication status of each station M301 For REMTO REMEPR instruction interlock TO to T4 For MELSECNET H interlock M302 For holding I O data exchange run M303 For REMTO REMFR instruction interlock M304 For REMTO REMFR instruction interlock M1000 REMTO instruction Completion M1001 REMTO instruction Result M1002 REMTO instruction Completion M1003 REMTO instruction Result M1004 REMTO instruction Completion as M1005 REMTO instruction Result M1006 REMER instruction Completion M1007 REMER instruction Result M1008 REMER instruction Completion M1009 REMER instruction Result M1010 REMTO instruction Completion M1011 REMTO instruction Result c Devices used as buffer memory read target Table7 62 List of Devices Used as Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description DO to D95 Input data D6000 Diagnostic information invalid setting area Diagnostic information non not
259. et when the DP Slave supports this function Default not selected Not checked No function check Checked Function check performed Freeze Input Check the checkbox to check if the DP Slave supports the Freeze function or not in communication for initialization When the DP Slave does not support the Freeze function the diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 of the QJ71PB92V This item can be set when the DP Slave supports this function Default not selected Not checked No function check Checked Function check performed Ignore AutoClear Initialize slave when failing to respond Select this checkbox to disable clear request transmission if a communications failure is detected on the DP Slave even though the master parameter Error action flag is enabled This setting is available when the Error action flag setting in the master parameters is enabled Default not selected Not checked Enables Error action flag setting Checked Disables Error action flag setting Select this checkbox so that the DP Master resends parameters to DP Slaves when the DP Master is restored from the status of a communication error Default not selected Not selected Not resend parameters to DP Slaves Selected Resends parameters to DP Slaves Swap O Bytes in Master Select this checkbox to swap the I O data of the DP Slave on the QJ71PB92V buffer me
260. etection reset request J Diagnostic information area y clear request c Program example for operation mode change Self diagnostics mode I bai Yo Y11 X11 X23 U0 a tt MOVP K2 62255 SET yil SET W2 M2 X11 Y11 UO 1 f 1 H Move 2256 D1100 D1100 Processing for normal completion HOASOO D RST YU Lot HOA300 Processing for error completion RST Yu RST M2 Lot Writing of operation mode Self diagnostic mode Operation mode change request q Reading the operation mode change result Operation mode change completion processing Operation mode change completion processing y Operation mode change completion processing Figure 7 9 Program Example for Operation Mode Change Self diagnostics Mode 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions This section explains a program in which the QJ71PB92V communicates with DP Slaves ai using dedicated instructions i This program example is based on the system configuration example shown in Section 7 1 Not needed when the initial setting is not changed 6 E aaa aa ma N Ps S4402 Turn ON the initial 2 I l SET M400 l m2 setting execution command a Z M400 X1B x1D XIF x0 YO UO all i i mo
261. eted signal X11 ON Completed O OFF Not completed X12 Use prohibited O X13 Use prohibited oO X14 Use prohibited O X15 Use prohibited X16 Use prohibited X17 Use prohibited O Alarm read response X18 ae cnn Use prohibited o OFF Not completed Time control start response x19 wee eee Use prohibited o OFF Not completed X1A __ Use prohibited O Communication READY signal X1B ON I O data exchange ready O OFF 1 O data exchange not ready X1C Use prohibited Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible 1 The watchdog timer error signal code has been changed to X1F Change the corresponding section in the sequence program To the next page Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 27 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC LAY ceries TableAPPX 5 Input Signal Comparisons Continued Compa Replacement A1SJ71PB92D ibili i QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D tibility precautions AJ71PB92D Module READY signal X1D ON Module start completed O OFF Module start not completed X1E Use prohibited O When replacing the A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D refer to 1 shown below Watchdog timer error signal X1F ON Watchdog timer error occurred OFF Watchdog timer error not occurred Use prohibited A Compatible A Partially compatible x No
262. etup procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG cries 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings P n z 1 CPU Device Access window z Set the automatic refresh setting m O a Start procedure Click the button in the Master Settings window z F x a b Setting items O 20 DP Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access m m 26 nO Enter the device addresses for buffering 1 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer _ 2 O z o Tm 9 I Comm Trouble Area aR Extd Comm Trouble Area Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and master module using C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh l Consistency PLC code options Z C Data transfer only C User variables AIDUTs 5 Contents of user library start of data transfer global variables for all DUTs Z Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project m te Cancel Back Finish Default 96 ance Bac ef aul i On Figure 6 9 CPU Device Access window Zy a TOR Eob Table6 8 Automatic refresh setting items HEE o Item Description Buffer Devices Set the QCPU s start device used for communications between the QJ71PB92V and the QCPU Select this radio button to set automatic refresh for each DP Slave After setting this item set the target device in the Slave Specific Buffer Devices window 3 2 in this section Click the Edit Devices button to display the Slave Specific Buffer Devices
263. example Q25HCPU QJ71PB92V DP Master Class 1 DP Slave Bus terminator Bus terminator Figure 7 2 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange 41 Modules are installed in order from slot 0 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 140 Assignment 32points i Figure 7 3 I O Assignment in Program Example Table7 2 Assignment of Input and Output Signals QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F QX41 X20 to X3F 7 3 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 2 Settings a QJ71PB92V settings W Table7 3 QJ71PB92V Settings Item Description FDL address FDL address 0 Transmission speed 1 5 Mbps z Operation mode Communication mode mode 3 Input data area for mode 3 6144 18004 to 6239 185FH 5 I O data area for FDL address 1 T2 14336 3800H to pe Buffer memory Output data area for mode 3 LE 14431 385FH HO I O data area for FDL address 2 Input data area for mode 3 6240 1860h Buffer memory Output data area for mode 3 14332 3860n b DP Slave Settings 2 fe Table7 4 DP Slave Settings 1st module S i Item Description g FDL address FDL address 1 4 7 Input data size 96 words 192 bytes I O data size F Output data size 96 words 192 bytes Table7 5 DP Slave Settings
264. exchange start completed signal X00 a Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO to start I O data exchange b When I O data exchange is started after turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO the Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON The Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns OFF in any of the following cases e When the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned OFF e When an error causing stop of I O data exchange occurs e When parameters are currently being written to the QJ71PB92V from GX Configurator DP When the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V has been changed e When a communication error has occurred on a DP Slave Only when the master parameter Error action flag is checked Data exchange start request Data exchange start Data exchange start request signal Y00 completed Data exchange start completed signal X00 se N lt l 4 l Exchanging I O data I O data exchange l stopped I O data exchange stopped Figure 3 1 Data Exchange Start Request Signal Y00 Data Exchange Start Completed Signal X00 c Use these signals as interlock signals when reading writing I O data d Write the initial values of the output data to the buffer memory before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO e Turning OFF the Data exchange start request signal YOO clears the information in the following areas The information in
265. f Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080572ENG D PROFIBUS DP Master Module MODEL QJ71PB92V U SY E MODEL 13JR84 SH NA 080572ENG D 1112 MEE afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 aan NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
266. fault not selected Not selected data consistency function disabled Selected data consistency function enabled PLC code options Data transfer only Set these items to use GX IEC Developer This setting is not required to use GX Developer or GX Works2 For details refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual User variables All DUTs POINT Set Block Transfer for the following applications To refresh I O data of all DP Slaves into the same kind of device To reduce the number of automatic refresh parameters of the QJ71PB92V and increase the automatic refresh parameters of other intelligent function modules 6 17 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG lA cries 2 Slave Specific Buffer Devices window Set the devices used for the communication in units of DP Slaves a Operation procedure Click the Edit Devices button in the CPU Device Access window b Setting items Slave Specific Buffer Devices Slave name I O Wor Input Device Output Device Slave_Nr_O01 16 16 Slave_Nr_002 16 16 Cancel Figure 6 10 Slave Specific Buffer Devices window Table6 9 Automatic refresh setting items for each DP Slave Item Description Slave name Displays the DP Slave name specified in the Name field of the Slave Settings window Displays the I O data size of the DP Slave unit wo
267. fication Parameter change in GX Configurator DP or GX Developer Change of QJ71PB92V operation mode Recovery from error Powering OFF and then ON Reseting redundant CPU Replacement of QJ71PB92V Return the operation mode of the standby system CPU to Separate mode 1 1 In Debug mode setting in Redundant parameter of GX Developer select Do not start with Debug mode 2 Write the set redundant parameters to the standby system CPU 3 Reset the standby system CPU or power OFF ON the standby system 1 To the next page Figure 9 9 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the Standby System 9 4 Troubleshooting in the Redundant System 9 4 3 Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system 2 The following shows how to perform maintenance in the standby system during Backup mode operation and to restart the redundant system operation Q TROUBLESHOOTING M eLS 26 Fel series 1 Turn the maintenance completed system standby system CPU to RUN y Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the standby system QJ71PB92V To the previous page 2 SS Connect GX Developer to the control system CPU f Execute system switching from GX Developer 1 1 Turn ON the manual switching enable flag SM1592 of the control system CPU 2 On the Redundant operation screen of GX Developer make a system switching request to the control system CPU Perform maintenance of
268. for normal completion Time control completion RST v19 processing 5 D o udasi Processing for failed completion Time control completion processing Figure 7 19 Program Example for Time Control Function Time Data Write Request 7 57 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 4 Program example PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel series 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation Program example for temporary slave reservation refer to section 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 Es POINT The program for the temporary slave reservation must be executed before turning ON the Data exchange start request signal YOO gt Section 7 1 1 to 7 1 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 7 Program Example for Temporary Slave Reservation 7 58 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Le eries 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V ona MELSECNET H Remote I O Network This section presents a program example for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted and used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station This section explains a program example for the I O data exchange function when the QJ71PB92V is mounted and used on a MELSECNET H remote 1 0 station 1 System config
269. formation list of GX Developer e The serial No on the rating plate indicates the management information of the product e The serial No displayed on Product inf list of GX Developer indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product is updated when a new function is added 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries CHAPTER3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the performance and transmission specifications of the QU71PB92V For general specifications refer to the user s manual hardware design maintenance and inspection for the CPU module used 3 1 Performance Specifications The performance specifications of the QJ71PB92V are given below Table3 1 Performance Specifications Item Specifications PROFIBUS DP station type DP Master Class 1 Transmission specifications Electrical standard EIA RS485 compliant characteristics Medium Shielded twisted pair cable lt 3 Section 5 5 1 Network topology Bus topology Tree topology when repeaters are used e Between DP Master and DP Master Token passing method e Between DP Master and DP Slave Polling method Encoding method NRZ Transmission speed 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps lt 37 gt 1 in this section Data link method Transmission distance Differs depending on the transmission speed lt 37 gt 1 in this section Max No of
270. from DP Slaves are updated into the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V 2 When Error time output mode is set to Clear a Communications with DP Slaves are interrupted and output data are not sent b Input data received from DP Slaves are held in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V When the QJ71PB92V is mounted in a redundant system set the watchdog timer for DP Slaves so that the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 is satisfied If the formula is not satisfied a watchdog timer error occurs in DP Slaves during system switching CAUTION Do not install PROFIBUS cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94 inches or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibr
271. g Token being passed 3 OFF No token passing or being in the standby system ON Operating in Parameter setting mode mode 1 Section 6 2 PRM SET Flashing The written parameters are invalid Section 9 1 OFF Operating in operation mode other than Parameter setting mode mode 1 Section 6 2 ON An error has occurred Section 9 1 FAULT OFF Normally operating 1 The LED flashes at intervals based on the value set in Data control time in Master Parameters 2 The LED flashes at the time of request or response in acyclic communication 3 The LED status during token passing varies depending on the number of DP Masters within the same network and the transmission speed setting as shown the Table 5 4 Table5 4 TOKEN LED Status No of DP Masters within the Transmission Speed Same Network 19 2kbps or less 93 75kbps or more 1 ON More than 1 Flashing ON or OFF 5 3 Part Names and Settings 5 6 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ol ra z g m wi ro 20 fal wii 8k ZS an a zZ lt n 0 zZ w N PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MELSEC IA ries 5 4 Self diagnostics The self diagnostics of the QJ71PB92V performs a unit test on the QJU71PB92V It takes about 15 seconds to complete the self diagnostics 1 Self diagnostics execution procedure The fo
272. g on the DP Slave setting For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 4 38 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function This function is used to replace the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V When the QJ71PB92D has failed replace it with the QJ71PB92V using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Since the existing network configuration or sequence programs for the QJ71PB92D can be utilized a faulty QJ71PB92D can be smoothly replaced with the QU71PB92V OVERVIEW POINT This manual describes only the overview of the QJ71PB92D compatible function gt For details refer to the following manual 22 L gt PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual ip QJ71PB92D 9 D oooo00 re o Z O Z Le Replaced QJ71PB92V i QJ71PB92D compatible function Figure 4 32 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 39 4 FUNCTIONS M ELSEG seres 1 System configuration for using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Same as that of the QJ71PB92D except for the supported software packages Table4 15 Supported software packages System Single CPU system Software version GX Deve
273. global control services b5 to b2 The following service combinations are not executable at the same time e SYNC and UNSYNC If both services are attempted concurrently UNSYNC only is enabled e FREEZE and UNFREEZE If both services are attempted concurrently UNFREEZE only is enabled The following shows the services and their set values for b5 to b2 1 Setting for execution of the SYNC and UNSYNC services Table3 19 SYNC UNSYNC Settings b5 b4 p Set Value SYNC 1 0 UNSYNC 0 1 1 1 When 1 is set to this bit it is handled as an invalid value The operation is the same as when the value is set to 0 2 Setting for execution of the FREEZE and UNFREEZE services Table3 20 FREEZE UNFREEZE Settings b3 b2 Set Value Service to be Executed a ee FREEZE 1 0 UNFREEZE 0 1 1 1 When 1 is set to this bit it is handled as an invalid value The operation is the same as when the value is set to 0 c Setting the target group No b15 to b8 Multiple group Nos can be set for the target group No When Os are set to all of b8 to b15 the set global control service is sent to all DP Slaves including DP Slaves for which group No is not set eeeeeeeeeeoeceeoeseeeoeeeeeeeeeoeeceeeeseesee eee eoeeaeoeeaee eee For details on the global control refer to Section 4 1 3 eeeeeaoeeseeoevs eevee eee eeoeaeeoeeeoeeeeeoseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeee ee 3 46 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 9 Global control area 3 S
274. gnostic info non 5 MOV K20 62084 notification time setting area gt UO m r Hoy He 623608 I Specifies the 2nd temporary 26 slave reservation ao i nore RST W400 Turn OFF the initial setting 2 a a a a a e a a a a a a a a 2xecution command X1B X1D XIF X20 XO U0 A REI A y 4 FMOVP KO 614336 K96 Writes the initial output data value 2 YO 2 1 cyo z I O data exchange 77 start processing D D no z 9 E O ra nA S3 a ane Zujw zu Zou hee nan Figure 7 6 I O Data Exchange Program Examples Automatic Refresh PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples T 8 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh PROGRAMMING a Program example for control of DP Slaves MELSEC TE eries HO D200 0 _ D0 0 Input processing of input data If 1st word b0 ot Input processing of input data 1st word b1 MO D200 0 X30 mov K100 D100 X31 MOV K500 D101 Figure 7 7 Program Example for Control of DP Slaves b Program example for diagnostic information read X1 D217 0 UO J p__AA ov 2072 1000 K2 X21 M X X1B X1D XIF HH RS gp I a X2 2 KS KT isr Y2 Figure 7 8 Program Example for Diagnostic Information Read YWriting to output data 1st word Writing to output data 2nd word Reading the diagnostic information 1st module Diagnostic information d
275. gt Section 3 4 6 Changing the initial value disables the system switching by a DP Slave 3 System switching by DP Slave is enabled when the value in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 becomes 0 after the Data exchange start request signal YOO turns ON 4 34 4 8 Redundant system support function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries 3 Functions available for redundant systems The following shows the functions available for the case where the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system Table4 10 Functions available for redundant systems Function PETE SIG Reference PROFIBUS DPVO I O data exchange A 1 Section 4 1 1 Acquisition of diagnostic and extended diagnostic aion A 1 Section 4 1 2 Global control function A 1 Section 4 1 3 PROFIBUS DPV1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves x Section 4 2 1 Alarm acquisition x Section 4 2 2 Support of FDT DTM technology x Section 4 2 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Time control over DP Slaves A 1 Section 4 3 1 Data swap function O Section 4 4 Data Data consistency function by automatic refresh O Section 4 5 consistency function Data consistency function by dedicated instructions A 1 Chapter 8 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error oO 2 Section 4 6 Temporary slave reservation function A 1 Section 4 7 QJ71PB92D compatible function x Section 4 9 O Available A Availab
276. gurator DP etc An electronic file that contains parameters of a DP Slave GSD file The GSD file is used to set up the slave parameters on GX Configurator DP FDL address The numbers assigned to a DP Master and DP Slaves The FDL address is set within the range from 0 to 125 Bus parameter The parameter used for the communication setting of PROFIBUS DP The bus parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP Master parameter The parameter used for the settings FDL address transmission speed etc of the QJ71PB92V The master parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP Slave parameter The parameter for a DP Slave which is set on the DP Master The slave parameter is set up on the GX Configurator DP The setting items are described on the GSD File 1 0 CONFIGURATION DATA Information on I O configuration of a DP Slave I O data exchange This function allows I O data exchange between a DP Master Class 1 and DP Slaves Global control This function enables synchronization command transmission for I O data from a DP Master Class 1 to DP Slaves Diagnostic information Diagnostic information of PROFIBUS DP which is detected by a DP Master or notified by a DP Slave Extended diagnostic error information Diagnostic information specific to each DP Slave Each of DP Slaves notifies of it to the DP Master when an error is detected To the next page Term Bus cycle time
277. h 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer 3 Section 6 7 To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 25 9 5 6 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V o Z E e e T o W l a gt O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code FB02H MELSEC TE eries Error codes FB02H to FB04H Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFH Continued LED Status Error Description The FDL address of the standby master is duplicated with that of a DP Slave FAULT LED ON Action Reset the following items e Switch 1 in the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer L37 Section 6 7 e FDL Address in the slave parameter setting of GX Configurator DP lt 3 Section 6 5 FBO3H An error has occurred during processing of FAULT LED ON system switching Control system Standby system Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 26 FB04H An error has occurred during processing of FAULT LED ON system switching Standby system Control system 9 5 Error Codes e Check the wiring status of the bus terminator s and PROFIBUS cable s lt 37 Section 5 5 1 If the bus terminators and PROFIBUS cables are correctly connected increase the set value of the master parameter Min slave interval e In the multi master system
278. h the former models If fast response is required reexamine and replace the existing system since some control timing may be delayed in the system For details on the bus cycle time of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 3 5 1 PROFIBUS cable The PROFIBUS cables used for former models can be used for this model 2 Wiring a PROFIBUS interface connector position The PROFIBUS interface connector position is different from that of the former models If the PROFIBUS cable length is not long enough extend the cable length by using an extension connector QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V RUN TEST RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN SD RD TOKEN READY PRM SET READY PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT RSPERR FAULT PROFIBUS I F BUS TERMINATION oFF on PROFIBUS I F Oloo Oleo O 3 3 QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V L J Figure APPX 1 QJ71PB92V and QJ71PB92D AP PX 4 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 2 Precautions for replacing the system APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries b Bus terminator The QJ71PB92V does not have any built in bus terminator When the former model has been used with the bus terminator setting switch set to ON use a PROFIBUS connector with a built in bus terminator for the QJ71PB92V For wiring specifications for the bus terminator of the QJ71PB92V refer to Section 5 5 1 For details on PROFIBUS cables
279. harge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat is as an industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT 2 The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other
280. he DP Slave is read from the QU71PB92V buffer L3 This section 3 memory Is extended diagnostic information stored in the DP Slave Checking method lt gt This section 4 a No Yes The extended diagnostic information is read from the DP Slave gt This section 4 Check the cause of the error from the diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information and take corrective actions Figure 4 4 Acquisition of Diagnostic and or Extended Diagnostic Information 4 4 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries 2 Checking the station generating diagnostic information The data showing where diagnostic information of each DP Slave is occurring are stored in the Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 The bit corresponding to the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON in the Each station s diagnostic status area Un G23057 to Un G23064 OVERVIEW 3 Acquiring diagnostic information The diagnostic information of DP Slaves is stored in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V Read the diagnostic information from the following buffer memory e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SY
281. he Operation mode change request signal Y11 is turned ON with the initial value 38 stored in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 E3004 is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and the operation mode is not 3 changed 7 rA Table3 13 Operation Mode Change Request Area Un G2255 6 0001H The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode a 0002H The mode is changed to Self diagnostics mode 0003H The mode is changed to Communication mode mode 3 0009H The mode is changed to Flash ROM initialization mode The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode 0101H The Parameter setting mode is registered to the flash ROM at the same time as the operation mode change The mode is changed to Communication mode mode 3 0103H The Communication mode mode 3 is registered to the flash ROM at the same time as the operation mode change The mode is changed to Parameter setting mode FFFFH The mode registered to the flash ROM is deleted at the same time as the operation mode change FUNCTIONS POINT If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 lt gt Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode lt gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module use
282. he corresponding bit turns ON 1 in Each station s alarm status Un G26417 to Un G26424 the RSP ERR LED turns ON 0 No alarm including reserved temporary slave reservation not configured and or non alarm ready stations 1 Alarm generated b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 1 Each bit indicates 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 80 79 78 TT 76 75 74 73 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 112 4 111 1 110 1 109 125 108 124 107 123 106 122 105 121 104 120 103 119 102 118 101 117 100 116 99 115 98 114 97 113 1 Bits b15 to b13 of address 26424 6738n are fixed to 0 Figure 3 23 Each Station s Alarm Status Un G26417 to Un G26424 the n th DP Slave 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 5 Slave status area 3 35 SETTINGS AND SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION 25 DEDICATED PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a ao FUNCTIONS
283. he request acceptance status is stored 7 0 Not accepted st 1 Acceptance competed SO O Bit Description Initial value bO Acceptance status of request instruction No 1 0 3 b1 Acceptance status of request instruction No 2 0 b2 Acceptance status of request instruction No 3 0 2 fe b3 Acceptance status of request instruction No 4 0 z f b4 Acceptance status of request instruction No 5 0 5 W b5 Acceptance status of request instruction No 6 0 B b6 Acceptance status of request instruction No 7 0 b7 Acceptance status of request instruction No 8 0 The request completed status is stored 0 Not executed or in execution m 1 Execution completed 6 Bit Description Initial value Z b8 Completion status of request instruction No 1 0 b9 Completion status of request instruction No 2 0 WwW b10 Completion status of request instruction No 3 0 5 z L b11 Completion status of request instruction No 4 0 a m lt A b12 Completion status of request instruction No 5 0 F g a oa b13 Completion status of request instruction No 6 0 E D a On b14 Completion status of request instruction No 7 0 Dro b15 Completion status of request instruction No 8 0 Figure 3 31 Acyclic Communication Request Result Area Un G25120 S i Yn x W m o 5 Fs A n 6 a EG 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 49 3 4 10 Acyclic communication area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 50 M ELSEG seres 4 Acyclic communication response
284. hown below depending on the transmission speed Transmission speed is 1 5 Mbps 1 TBi 1 1 5x 10 0 667 x 10 s 0 667 x 10 ms Transmission speed is 12 Mbps 1 TBit 1 12x 10 0 083x 10 s 0 083x 10 ms 4 The Tsdi value described in the GSD DDB file of the QJ71PB92V The Tsdi value varies as shown below depending on the transmission speed Refer to 3 for the unit TBit Table3 24 Request Response Processing Time of DP Master Request Response Processing Time of DP Master 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 93 75kbps 187 5kbps 70Tsit 500kbps 150Tsit 1 5Mbps 200Tsit 3Mbps 250Tsit 6Mbps 450Tsit 12Mbps 800Tsit 3 60 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 1 Bus cycle time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries b Bus cycle time calculation example The following shows a calculation example of the bus cycle time Transmission speed 1 5Mbps DP Master FDL address 0 No of DP Slave 3 modules QJ71PB92V Bus terminator PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator g OVERVIEW DP Slave FDL address 1 DP Slave FDL address 2 DP Slave FDL address 3 AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D Input 0 points Input 16 points Input 1 word Output 16 points Output 0 points Output 2 words CONFIGURATION SYSTEM AJ95TB2 16T AJ95TB3 16D QJ71PB93D 25 Output data size byte 2 0 4 Input data size byte 0 2 2 Figure 3 39 System Configuration
285. i Initializes Diagnostic info l i af HF NOV Hang Geet invalid setting area i i i ae Initializes Diagnostic info non pier time setting area UO 1 Specifies the 2nd t 2 I pecifies the 2nd temporary Z may ne dis slave reservation oO 1 RST 4400 Turn OFF the initial setting 5 ee ee ee ee ae a l execution command w X1B X1D XIF X20 XO UO Writes the initial 2 1 AF AF FWOvP KO G14336 K986 output data value YO cvo I O data exchange XID XIF start processing It H i CHO D MO fev 9 m XOG BBLKRD execution NO Uo W Buoy 23040 Dd Kos Reads Slave status area r4 z T o o e u U a a X Ag N ZEE ND Program for DP Slave control 5 Section 7 1 1 2 a As Eob i gt _ _ _ _ a a a a a a a a ee eee ee ee nan XOG j 6 BBLKWR uo K14336 D100 K96 BBR execution Writing output data PARAMETER SETTING N bas Figure 7 10 I O Data Exchange Program Example Dedicated instructions PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 10 7 1 2 Program example using dedicated instructions PROGRAMMING MELSEC TA eries 4 POINT Confirm that Consistency is disabled with Autom Refresh enabled L gt Section 6 3 When the automatic refresh and data consistency functions are enabled dedicated instructions are not processed i
286. ication with DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS 4 12 a b MELSEC TE eries Class1 services When executing a Class1 service verify in advance that the bit corresponding to the target DP Slave is ON in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 Table4 4 Available Services Class1 services Service Name Description READ Class1_SERVICE Reads data from any specified DP Slave 1 WRITE Class1_SERVICE Writes data to any specified DP Slave 1 1 The data that can be read or written by READ or WRITE services vary depending on the DP Slave to be used For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave Class2 services Connect the line to the DP Slave by the INITIATE service and execute the READ and or WRITE services To end the acyclic communication disconnect the line from the DP Slave by the ABORT service When executing a Class2 service to a DP Slave that is exchanging I O data verify in advance that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 When executing a Class2 service to a DP Slave that is not exchanging I O data verify in advance that the DP Slave has been completely activated For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave Table4 5 Available Services Class2 services Service Name Description INITIATE Class2_SERVICE Establishes a line connection with any specified DP Slave ABORT
287. ification time setting D100 to D195 Output data D6001 area D200 to D207 Slave status area Normal communication detection D208 to D215 Slave status area Reserved station setting status D216 to D224 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network Slave status area Diagnostic information detection T 62 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 5 Program example a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlocks depending on the link status of the remote master station host station and remote I O station other station The following example shows a communication program interlock using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 b0 SW74 b0 SW78 bO of the remote I O station station No 1 H KO 70 SB47 Host baton pass status H KO 11 SB49 Host data link status H KO T2 SW70 Baton pass status 4 K of each station 13 SW74 Cyclic transmission status 4 7 of each station a S 7 SW78 Parameter communication status of each station NO
288. iminates the need to check the sequence program gt Section 6 5 6 3 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 6 2 Operation Mode Setting This section describes QJ71PB92V operation modes and the procedure for setting the operation mode The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V can be changed using Operation mode change request area Un G2255 POINT When parameters are written to the QJ71PB92V using GX Configurator DP the operation mode will be changed as follows e During writing Parameter setting mode mode 1 e After writing Communication mode mode 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 1 Types of operation modes The following lists the operation modes of the QJ71PB92V SPECIFICATIONS Table6 2 Operation mode list Parameters set using GX Configurator DP are written to the QJ71PB92V Parameter setting mode mode 1 When an operation mode has not been written to the flash ROM the QJ71PB92V starts in this mode FUNCTIONS Self diagnostic mode mode 2 A test is performed on the QJ71PB92V alone lt gt Section 5 4 Communication mode mode 3 I O data is exchanged with DP Slaves Flash ROM initialization mode The QJ71PB92V is defaulted L37 Section 9 6 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 2 Operation mode change a Write a value for a desired operation mode into the Operation mode change request area Un G2255
289. in the redundant system New control system New standby system The system changed from the standby system status to the control system status due to system switching The system changed from the control system status to the standby system status due to system switching QJ71PB92D compatible function The function used to replace the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V type PROFIBUS DP master module has this function QJ71PB92D The QJ71PB92D type PROFIBUS DP interface module PACKING LIST The following indicates the packing list of the QJU71PB92V Model QJ71PB92V Product name Quantity QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module 1 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW This manual explains the specifications functions procedures before system operation and troubleshooting for the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP master module hereinafter referred to as QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V is used for connecting MELSEC Q Series programmable controllers to PROFIBUS DP The QJ71PB92V operates as a DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP networks lt Single CPU system gt DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V DP Slave QJ71PB93D DP Slave MELSEC ST system oonon Bus terminator lt Redundant system gt Redundant CPU Q25PRHCPU DP Master Class 1 QU71PB92V Control system Standby system
290. indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list To the next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued MELS eG Q series Address ae Initial Read Reference Name Description i 5 DEC HEX value Write Section 23322 to 23327 System area Use prohibited 5B1Aun to 5B1Fx In Communication mode mode 3 this area is 23328 to 23454 Extended diagnostic information used to store the extended diagnostic 0 R Section 5B20x to 5B9Ex area for mode 3 information of the error occurred on each DP 3 4 6 Slave during communication 23455 System area Use prohibited 5B9FH PE This area is used to set the FDL address of the n 23456 Extended diagnostic information Section station from which the extended diagnostic FFFFH R W 5BAOn read request area via 3 4 7 information is read 23457 to 23583 Extended diagnostic information This area stores the execution result of the 0 R Section 5BA1H to 5C1Fu read response area extended diagnostic information read request 3 4 7 This area stores data of the DP Slaves that are 23584 to 23591 Parameter setting status area Section set to Normal DP Slave by the slave 0 R 5C20n to 5C27x Active station 3 4 5 parameters This area stores data of
291. ion b TEST and FAULT LEDs ON When failed If the TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON after execution of self diagnostics this 3 indicates that the diagnostics failed r Check the value stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 and retry the o self diagnostics D Z If the diagnostics fails again a QJ71PB92V hardware error is probable ann Please check the value currently stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 and consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem z c Values that may be stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 5 Any of the following values is stored in the Offline test status area Un G2258 F after execution of self diagnostics 2 Table5 5 Self diagnostics Result O7FFH Normal completion F700H ROM check test error F701H Timer test error 9 F702H MPU test error R F703H RAM test error 5 F704H 2 port RAM test error F705H Swap port test error ra z g W wi ro 20 fal wi 8k rae an a Zz lt N 0 zZ w N PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 4 Self diagnostics 5 8 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM 2 a3 RAT 2 N M ELSEG Q series 5 5 Wiring This section explains PROFIBUS cable wiring and relevant precautions 5 5 1 PROFIBUS cable wiring The following describes the pin assignments of the PROFIBUS interface connector on the QJ71PB92V the PROFIBUS cable wiring specifications bus
292. ion invalid setting area Initializing Diagnostic information non notification time setting area I KO gt 7P RENTO J K1 K1 HO K2080 D6000 K1 M1000 M1000 M1001 SET M301 M1001 WovP K20 D6001 L 7P RENTO H Kl K1 HO K2084 D6001 K1 M1002 HSS M301 M1003 Processing for failed initialization X101B X101D X101F X20 X1000 FMOVP KO DO K96 KO gt Writing the initial value KO gt _ 7P RENTO J K1 K1 HO K14336 DO K96 M1004 of output data M1004 M1005 1 M302 Processing for failure of output data initial value writing yas X101B X101D X101F X20 X1000 M302 m ay Y1000 Y1000 I O data exchange start processing X1000 X101B X101D X101F SI Figure 7 25 Program Example for the I O Data Exchange Function When Mounted on a Remote I O Station To the next page 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network T 64 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni MO M303 t Hp a RENFR N K1 K1 HO K6144 DO K96 M1006 Reading input data M1006 M1007 SET Processing for failure of input data reading
293. ist of Devices for the User Device Description Device Description X26 Acyclic communication execution command MO Refresh start request gt 37 Section 7 1 1 b Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 29 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target Device Description Device Description D200 to ae M100 to oe Slave status area Normal communication detection Acyclic communication request result area D207 M115 D3000 to rii Acyclic communication response area D3012 7 29 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 5 Program example PROGRAMMING 3 Program example Mo X26 D200 0 M108 nov M100 HOY MoV nov Pty nov Pp a i Hov D3000 D3000 nov UO HOA400 piei 25122 nov UO HOA400 H BoV G25122 UO G25120 H1400 K2 K16 KO Kl UO G23814 H1 UO 625121 D3001 HO D3001 K4M100 UO G23809 uoy G23810 UO G23811 UO G23812 UO G23813 K123 UO G23808 D3000 K12 UO G23808 K4 Processing for failed completion nov HO UO G23808 MELSEC KE eries Reads the acceptance status and completion status Request code is set 1400n The FDL address of the J target DP Slave is set FDL address 2 Data length is set 16 bytes
294. ith a Repeater Connected Non Redundant DP Slaves Only 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units MELSEC TA eries Bus terminator 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M eLS 26 Fel series c When connecting 124 DP Slaves DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 124 Repeater 4 OVERVIEW 2 Connection points counted as number of modules DP Master Class 1 Standby system DP Master Class 1 Control system FDL address 0 Standby system FDL address 1 5 P P ae ainsi Redundant QJ71 ipp Redundant QJ71 oZ nO module CPU PB92V mod le CPU PB92V Tracking cable no Segment 1 z Bus terminator Bus terminator 2 8 DP Slave DP Slave PEEPAR DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 30 2 Repeater 1 DP Slave 29 modules Segment 2 2 9 E O 5 DP Slave DP Slave Keewes DP Slave FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 60 Repeater 2 X J P yY g z DP Slave 30 modules Ze opk Lra Segment 3 Gas O O zm Eob i gt nan DP Slave DP Slave eoes DP Slave FDL address 61 FDL address 62 FDL address 89 Repeater 3 1 vV J Repeater 3 2 S DP Slave 29 modules i x W m Segment 4 Segment 5
295. ith high reliability it is necessary to have an external wiring unsusceptible to an influence of noise The following gives the precautions for external wiring of the QU71PB92V OVERVIEW 1 Communication cable wiring Do not install the QJ71PB92V communication cable together with the main circuit power lines and or load carrying wires for other than the programmable controller or bring them close Doing so may cause the QJ71PB92V to be affected by noise and surge induction CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 2 Wirings from programmable controller and I O modules Keep the PROFIBUS cable away from I O module cables as much as possible Input module Output module x QJ71PB92V SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS ol PROFIBUS cable Wiring of input module AG LN 17 ro __ Wiring of output module eee Shield jacket ra z g lu tf wi ro D0 fal wi 8k rae an a Z lt n 0 zZ w N Figure 5 8 Programmable Controller Wiring o 3 Grounding E For use of the QJ71PB92V ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable i controllers power supply module 3 2 z g 0 g 6 or ao az 5 5 Wiring 12 5 5 2 Wiring precautions 9 6 PARAMETER SETTING CHAPTER6 PARAMETER SETTING This chapter describes the procedure for setting QJ71PB92V parameters and details of the parameters In this chapter para
296. l master FDL address FDL address Starting 1 0 number Set the I O No of the QU71PB92V In 3 digits Error action flag Min slave interval V Calculate time PROFIBUS Master 1 5 Mbps 0 0 125 000 0x0 OxFE0 IF Goto Clear State 61 1 65535 100 ps Bus Pardmeters IV Use Min slave interval for Target Token Rotation Time T_tr Polling timeout Set a Slave Watchdog timer value that meets the calculation formula shown in Section 4 8 5 IV Slave watchdog Estimated bus cycle time Watchdog for time sync Cancel lt Slave parameters gt I Calculate time 50 1 65535 1 ms 100 1 65025 10 ms 6 015 ms 0 0 65535 10 ms pr Slave Parameters Wizard Slave Settings Model innnan Revision Vendor RRRKRERK KREK Slave Properties Name Set the FDL address of the DP Slave FDL Address min T_sdr Group identification number Set it as a Normal DP Slave IV Slave is active Ignore AutoClear Swap 1 0 Bytes in Master Slave_Nr_001 200 paz 11 1 255 l Gpl l Gp2 l Gp3 l Gp4 l Gp5 T Gp amp l Gpz l Gps ja pa J Initialize slave when failing to respond Set the I O data size Figure 7 33 I O Data Exchange Parameter Setting Example GX Configurator DP 1 73 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries
297. le with restriction x Not available 1 For precautions for using respective functions in the redundant system refer to section 7 9 to 7 9 7 2 Independently of the setting I O data exchange with DP Slaves is continued until both A and B systems go down 4 Setting for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system To use the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system make the following settings Table4 11 Setting for using the QJ71PB92V in the redundant system Item Description Reference In GX Configurator DP set the parameters of the QJ71PB92V Parameter setting in GX The FDL address set as a master parameter is assigned to the Section 6 1 to 6 6 Required Configurator DP p g QJ71PB92V in the control system settin i Standby master FDL address In the intelligent function module switch setting in GX Developer Section 6 7 i setting set an FDL address for the QJ71PB92V in the standby system Specify the target DP Slaves for system switching in the System 5 switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Setting of the target DP Slaves Un G23648 to Un G23656 Section 3 4 14 k for system switching en Si tc Set if needed This setting is not required when no system switching is to be performed n the event of a communication error with a DP Slave j Set the tracking devices to continuously use the QJ71PB92V f Tracking settings a Section 7 9 to 7 9 7 functions after system switching 4
298. les for Use in the Redundant System T7 74 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries 3 Device assignments in program example The program examples in this section use the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 68 List of Devices for the QJ71PB92V Data exchange start completed signal Data exchange start request signal X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 Diagnostic information detection reset request signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal X1B Communication READY signal X1D Module READY signal X1F Watchdog timer error signal b Devices used by the user Table7 69 List of User Devices I O data exchange start command SM402 ON for 1 scan only after RUN nee ON for 1 scan only after switching system from X21 Communication error detection reset command SM1518 standby to control X22 Communication error area clear command MO Refresh start request X30 Conditions for write to output data 1st word M400 Initial setting execution command X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word s Device c Devices used as automatic refresh or buffer memory read target Table7 70 List of Devices Used as Automatic Refresh or Buffer Memory Read Target D208 to
299. leted signal X11 x POINT 1 Do not turn the power OFF or reset the QCPU during the operation mode registration to the flash ROM by turning ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 Turn the power OFF or reset the QCPU after the Operation mode change completed signal X11 has turned ON If the power is turned OFF or the QCPU is reset by mistake register the operation mode to the flash ROM again 2 If the redundant CPU is in the Backup mode the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed An error code is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 lt gt Section 9 5 2 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V must be changed when the redundant CPU is in Separate or Debug mode lt gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used 3 14 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA cries 11 Alarm read request signal Y18 Alarm read response signal X18 a Turn ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 when reading alarms on the specified DP Slave according to the information set in the Alarm request area Un G26432 to Un G26434 b Turning ON the Alarm read request signal Y18 clears the information in the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 Note however that the information in the following areas are not cleared when the alarm ACK request request code 1501 i
300. llowing shows how to execute the self diagnostics a When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to the Separate or Debug mode lt gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used b Set the operation mode of the QJ71PB92V to Self diagnostics mode mode 2 by either of the following methods 1 Set 024 for Operation mode change request area Un G2255 2 Turn on Operation mode change request signal Y11 c When the operation mode is set to Self diagnostics mode mode 2 the self diagnostics is automatically started During execution of self diagnostics the TEST LED is ON or flashing Upon completion of the self diagnostics the LEDs on the QJ71PB92V change as shown below storing the test result to the Offline test status area Un G2258 e When normally completed The TEST LED turns OFF e When failed The TEST and FAULT LEDs are ON 4 POINT When using the QJ71PB92V in a redundant system and performing the self diagnostic test during system operation set it to Self diagnostic mode mode 2 according to the procedure shown in Section 9 4 3 5 4 Self diagnostics SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION MMELSEC Tl cence 2 Execution result of self diagnostics a TEST LED OFF When normally completed When the TEST LED turns OFF after execution of self diagnostics this indicates z a normal complet
301. loper GX Configurator DP 1 GX Works2 Version 7 or later Version 5 to 6 Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Version 1 15R or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Version 7 01B or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Single CPU system Version 4 or later Version 4 to 6 f Version 1 15R or later Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Version 7 01B or later Single CPU system i Q02PH Q06PHCPU Version 8 68W or later Version 7 04E or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 4 to 6 i Q12PH Q25PHCPU 1a 1 Version 7 10L or later l Noravallable Multiple CPU system Version 7 01B or later Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 17T or later Version 7 03D or later Single CPU t peony me oa boll Version 8 76E or later f QO0U Q01UCPU Single CPU system Version 7 04E or later Version 1 15R or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 78G or later Single CPU system i QO2UCPU Version 8 48A or later Version 7 03D or later Version 1 15R or later Multiple CPU system Q03UD Q04UDH Single CPU system l Version 8 48A or later Version 7 02C or later Version 1 15R or later QO6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Version 7 04E or later Version 1 15R or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 78G or later Single CPU system f Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Version 8 62Q or later Version 7 03D or later Versio
302. meter settings when programs are created using GX Developer or GX Works2 are described When creating programs using GX IEC Developer refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure The following describes the QU71PB92V parameter setting procedure 1 Setting procedure Ps Start y Install GX Configurator DP on the personal computer Start GX Configurator DP and register GSD DDB files of DP Slaves y Create new parameters Select the module model Set Master Parameters Section 6 3 Set Bus Parameters KL Section 6 4 Set Slave Parameters L gt Section 6 5 Use the automatic refresh function Set the automatic refresh parameter L3 Section 6 6 Write the parameters set on GX Configurator DP to QJ71PB92V 2 in this section 1 To the next page Figure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure 6 1 Parameter Setting Procedure MELSEC TA eries gt gt gt GX Configurator DP Operating Manual GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG lA eries 1 a Is the QJ71PB92V mounted No 3 to a redundant system Set the standby master FDL address in GX Developer sei ae Pe Section 6 7 z o z mS pee aca set on GX Developer to a redundant oa GX Developer Operating Manual 7 no Q E Figure 6 1 Par
303. meters to the QCPU L Section 4 6 2 Le ol Reset the QCPU Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the QJ71PB92V lt Section 5 5 Connect the PROFIBUS cable to the DP Slave and start the DP Slave ra z g lu tf i ro 20 fal wi 8k ZS an fal Zz lt n 0 zZ w N gt gt Manual for DP Slave Start I O data exchange Did I O data exchange start successfully Check the LED status lt 37 Section 5 3 Completed 1 Start I O data exchange by either of the following methods Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 Start it from GX Configurator DP Figure 5 1 Procedures before System Operation Single CPU System No Review parameter settings PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 5 2 Procedures Before System Operation 5 ao 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM el Siete MELSEG LAY series 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system Start Mount the QJ71PB92V on the base unit Set the RUN STOP switches of the redundant CPUs in system A and B to STOP and turn ON the power supply to systems A and B Set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Debug mode 1 In Debug mode setting of Redundant parameter in GX Developer select Start with Debug mode 2 Write the configured redundant parameters to the red
304. mmRef No is stored Stored value OOH to 7EH 0 to 126 2 2H Max LenDataUnit is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 3 3H Features Supported is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 4 4H Profile Features Supported is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 5 5H Profile Ident Number is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 6 6H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 S_Type is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 2 S_Len is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 7 7H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 D_Type is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 2 D_Len is stored The stored value differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications 8 8H to 127 7FH Empty area Stored value OOOOH 7 25 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 7 4 3 INITIATE service Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE eries
305. mmunication status information to ensure the system operates safely Input X1 buffer memory 5A20H to 5B19H 23072 to 23321 An erroneous output or malfunction may cause accidents 1 The QJ71PB92V holds the input data before the communication failure 2 When the QJ71PB92V has gone down the output status of each DP Slave is dependent on the QJ71PB92V parameter setting on GX Configurator DP 3 When a DP Slave has gone down the output status of the other DP Slaves is dependent on the QJ71PB92V parameter setting on GX Configurator DP Do not output the use prohibited signal as the output signal to an intelligent function module from the programmable controller CPU Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions WARNING When a stop error has occurred to the CPU module the communication status varies depending on the error time output mode setting of GX Developer as shown below Set the communication status for when a stop error has occurred to the CPU module according to the system specifications Note that if the QJ71PB92V is mounted to a redundant system it operates as described in 1 below regardless of the setting 1 When Error time output mode is set to Hold a Since the communication with the DP Slave is continued values at the time of the CPU module stop error occurrence are held as the output data sent to the DP Slave from the QJ71PB92V b Input data received
306. mory Default not selected Not selected No swapping Selected Enables data swapping 6 11 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG lA eries b DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Screen The following window opens when the DP Slave supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 V2 function e Start procedure Click the Next button in the Slave Settings window until the DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters window will open e Setting items DP Slave Parameters Wizard DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Alarms M Update Alarm Fail Safe function enabled Stans Alam I Slave specific check of cfg_data Manufacturer Specific Alarm Diagnostic Alarm Process Alarm Pull Plug Alarm Figure 6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Screen Table6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Setting Items Item Description Check this checkbox to use the PROFIBUS DPV 71 functions This setting is available when the DP Slave supports the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Not checked Not use the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions Checked Use the PROFIBUS DPV1 functions DP V1 Support enable Check this checkbox to place the DP Slave into the Fail Safe status when the DP Master sends a clear request This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status For the Fail Safe setting refer to the manual for the DP Slave Not checked Not placed into Fail Safe sta
307. ms 2 10 100ms 2 11 1s 2 26789 68A5 F 3 Set summer or winter time 0 Set winter time 1 Set summer time w 4 Set advance notice of summer winter time switching g 6 0 Not switch between summer and winter times in an hour a as 1 Switches between summer and winter times in an hour Z i m 5 Set the time difference the time to be added or subtracted 8 a The value 0 means No addition or subtraction Es Set value 0 to 31 Unit x 0 5 hours bi amp A 6 Set the time calculation method 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference a zZ 26790 68A6x to Empty area Write 0000n E 26792 68A8H Set value Fixed to 0000H ie Ei bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 52 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 47 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26800 68B del Stored value A601H 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H b When failed Table7 48 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0n An error code is stored 3 Section 9 5 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H 7 53 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format PROGRAMMI
308. n 1 15R or later Multiple CPU system Q03UDE Q04UDEH Single CPU system QO6UDEH Q13UDEH Version 8 68W or later Version 7 03D or later Version 1 15R or later Multiple CPU system Q26UDEHCPU Q10UDEH Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Version 7 04E or later Version 1 15R or later Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 78G or later Q50UDEH Single CPU system il Not available Version 7 07H or later Version 1 31H or later Q100UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system 4 40 1 The operation mode of the QJ71PB92V cannot be changed using GX Configurator DP Version 7 01B and Version 7 03D or later Change the mode using Operation mode change request area Un G2255 2 For how to use GX Configurator DP and GX Works2 together refer to the GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 3 To mount the QJ71PB92V on an extension base unit use GX Configurator DP Version 7 03D or later 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries POINT GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A cannot be used For GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A upgrade it to Version 7 01B or later For version upgrades please consult your local Mitsubishi representative OVERVIEW 2 Wiring for using the QJ71PB92D compatible function Except for the PROFIBUS interface connector position and no terminating resistor the wiring is the same as the QJ71PB92D CONFIGURATION SYSTEM a PROFIBUS interface connector posi
309. n 6 5 3 Input data of a DP Slave which has failed in I O data exchange are not stored in the Input data area of the QU71PB92V Data stored before the fault are held in the relevant Input data area for the DP Slave 1 DP Slave corresponding to the bit that is turned OFF in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 3 24 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 4 I O data exchange area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC KE eries 1 Input data area for mode 3 Un G6144 to Un G10239 When the operation mode is Communication mode mode 3 input data from DP Slaves are stored in this area OVERVIEW a Data length setting The data length unit byte for each station is variable and assigned based on the slave parameter Slave Modules window set using GX Configurator DP For the DP Slave that has a fixed data length the slave parameter setting will be ignored b Data length range The maximum data length per module is 244 bytes and the total data length for all DP Slaves can be set up to 8192 bytes When the data length is an odd number of bytes OOH is stored to the final high byte The input data of the next station is assigned starting from the next buffer memory CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 3 address z z f Te Address 3 DEC HEX b15 b8 b7 bO a 6144 1800H 6144 1800H
310. n with the QJ71PB92D compatible function enabled For details after the operation refer to the following manual C gt gt PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual SPECIFICATIONS o Z O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 45 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM 2 a3 RA 2 N M ELSEG Q series CHAPTER5 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION This chapter explains the procedures for connecting the QJ71PB92V to PROFIBUS DP wiring and other information 5 1 Implementation and Installation This section provides the handling precautions from unpacking to installation of the QJ71PB92V For details on the implementation and installation of the QJ71PB92V refer to the user s manual hardware design maintenance and inspection for the CPU module used 5 1 1 Handling precautions The following are precautions for handling the QJ71PB92V as a unit 1 Do not drop the module case or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Do not remove the printed circuit board of each module from its case This may cause a failure in the module 3 Be careful not to let foreign objects such as wire chips enter the module during wiring In the event any foreign object enters remove it immediately 4 A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent f
311. nals from the QJ71PB92V to the QCPU Device Y represents output signals from the QCPU to the QJ71PB92V The following shows the I O signals to from the QCPU Table3 4 List of I O Signals Signal Direction QJ71PB92V QCPU Signal Direction QCPU J71PB92V X00 Data exchange start completed signal YOO Data exchange start request signal ae Diagnostic information detection reset request X01 Diagnostic information detection signal Y01 signal X02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal Y02 Diagnostic information area clear request signal X03 Use prohibited Y03 Use prohibited X04 Global control completed signal Y04 Global control request signal X05 Global control failed signal Yo05 Use prohibited X06 Extended diagnostic information read response Y06 Extended diagnostic information read request signal signal X07 YO7 X08 Y08 X09 Use prohibited YO9 Use prohibited X0A YOA X0B YOB X0C Data consistency requesting signal YOC Data consistency start request signal X0D YOD Restart request signal X0E Use prohibited YOE XOF YOF Use prohibited X10 Operation mode signal Y10 X11 Operation mode change completed signal Y11 Operation mode change request signal X12 Y12 X13 Y13 X14 a Y14 a Use prohibited Use prohibited X15 Y15 X16 Y16 X17 Y17 X18 Alarm read response signal Y18 Alarm read request signal X19 Time control start response signal Y19 Time control start request signal
312. nd take corrective actions For the troubleshooting in Section 9 1 to 9 4 refer to the following flowchart o Z E e e T o W l a O n Lu Troubleshooting 2 Zz Lu oa lt Do the LEDs indicate an error status i RA a ep or Yes Check the error indicated by LEDs and take corrective TOKENLED OFF actions lt gt Section 9 1 PRM SET LED Flashing lt FAULT LED ON is No S Unable to write the parameters from GX Configurator DP Yes Takes actions for the case where parameters cannot be written from GX Configurator DP lt 3 Section 9 2 No Yes Troubleshooting when communication with DP Slaves is Unable to communicate with DP Slaves not possible 3 Section 9 3 No Is the QU71PB92V mounted Yes to the single CPU system No For the QJ71PB92Vs used in the redundant system has the following error occurred Output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching FAULT LED of QJ71PB92V in new standby system is ON Yes When output data turn OFF or momentarily OFF in system switching 3 Section 9 4 1 and 9 4 2 No When the QJ71PB92V is used in the redundant system is maintenance to be performed on the one in the standby system Yes Perform maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system _ Section 9 4 3 No Completed Figure 9 1 Troubleshooting
313. next page PROGRAMMING Buffer memory address 26449 6751H 26450 6752H 26451 6753H 26452 6754H to 26484 6774H 26485 6775H 26486 6776H 26487 6777H 26488 6778H MELSEC KE eries Table7 38 Response Format When Failed Continued Alarm data No 1 Result 1 When E506 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 1 is stored gt Section 9 5 4 2 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 1 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 2 is stored gt Section 9 5 4 2 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 2 1 When E5064 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Detailed error code 3 is stored 7 gt Section 9 5 4 2 When a value other than E506u is currently stored in buffer memory address 26446 674En Stored value FFFFH No detailed error code 3 Empty area Stored value 0000H An error code is stored Section 9 5 4 1 When E508 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26485 6775H Detailed error code 1 is stored 1 IL Section 9 5 4 2 When a value other than E5084 is currently stored in buffer memory address 26
314. ns the request and response formats of the INITIATE service Class2_ SERVICE 1 Request format Table7 21 Request format Offset Address Description Set Value 0 OH Set a request code Set value 1412H 1 4H Set the FDL address of the DP Slave to which the network line is connected Set value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 2 2H Set a transmission timeout value Unit 10ms The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value 0 to 65535 3 3H Set Alignment The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H 4 4H Set Features Supported The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0001H 5 5H 6 6H 7 7H 1238 Set Profile Features Supported The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H Set Profile Ident Number The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 0000H b15 b8 b7 bO 2 1 1 Set S_Type The setting range differs depending on the DP Slave specifications Check the DP Slave specifications Set value Fixed to 00H 2 Set S_Len The setting rang
315. nterval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and 26 Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV1 function may take time no 4 2 1 Acyclic communication with DP Slaves a lt q O This function allows data reading writing to DP Slaves at any specific timing independently of I O data exchange Up to eight requests are executable DP Master Class 1 Power supply QJ71 Writing data to we i Reading data from any DP Slave any DP Slave AA N a I O data exchange Tl aa vn DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave o Z O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Figure 4 9 Acyclic Communication 1 Services available on the QJ71PB92V In acyclic communications there are two types of services Class1 and Class2 services The services available on the QJ71PB92V differ depending on whether or not the target DP Slave is performing I O data exchange PARAMETER SETTING Table4 3 Available Services Available Service Target DP Slave Class1 service Class2 service DP Slave performing I O data exchange Oo O DP Slave not performing I O data exchange x O PROGRAMMING O Available x Not available Whether the DP Slave supports each service or not can be checked in the GSD file For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 11 4 2 1 Acyclic commun
316. o 31 Unit x 0 5 hours 6 Set the time calculation method 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves T 54 7 6 3 Time data write request OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING MELSEC A ni 2 Response format a When normally completed Table7 50 Response Format When Normally Completed Buffer memory address Result A response code is stored 26800 68B del Stored value A602H 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H b When failed Table7 51 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0n An error code is stored _ gt Section 9 5 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCn Stored value 0000H 7 55 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 3 Time data write request PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 6 4 Program example 1 Settings The example program in this section uses the following example requests Table7 52 Details of Program Example Item Description Service name Time data write request 2 Assignment of devices in program example The program example in this section uses the following device assignments a Devices used by the QJ71PB92V Table7 53 List of
317. o 4 alarm data No 8 26448 6750H b3 0 Failed or not executed b7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 1 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 2 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 3 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 2 The ACK response completion status is stored Bit Completion status of response to alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 6 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 7 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed Completion status of response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed To the next page T 42 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING 26449 6751H 26450 6752H 26451 6753H 26452 6754H 26453 6755H to 26484 6774H T 43
318. o be selected in GX Configurator DP projects 1 When utilizing the project created for the QJ71PB92D Utilize the project without change Use the parameter set for the QJ71PB92D TT I O no 0x0 FDL 0 0371PB92D Figure 4 37 Module to be Selected in a GX Configurator DP Project 2 When creating a new project Select QJ71PB92D for the module Kal New Project Wizard Select Module Type Select Module Type CPU Series Qn C anA CRX MELSEC Module Type a371 PB92D Zl Read from PLC mamaw CCT Select QJ71PB92D EEEE NEIFETETITI PLC Project AGEE j Browse Comment Figure 4 38 Module to be Selected in a GX Configurator DP Project 4 44 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC KE eries c When no matching module is identified in GX Configurator DP The following dialog box is displayed in GX Configurator DP MELSOFT GX Configurator DP OVERVIEW No QJ71PB92 module found at the given starting I O no 0 A Do you want to select a module on the PLC S Cancel Figure 4 39 When No Matching Module is Identified in GX Configurator DP If the above dialog box appears check if e The module selected in the GX Configurator DP project is QJ71PB92D e The version of the GX Configurator DP is any other than Version 7 00A e The Starting I O number setting in the Master Settings window of GX Configurator DP is correct CONFIGURATION SYSTEM d After operatio
319. ode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 a Turn ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 when changing the operation mode to the one set in the Operation mode change request area Un G2255 The operation mode can be changed without resetting the QCPU b Turning ON the Operation mode change request signal Y11 clears the information of the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 c The Operation mode change completed signal X11 turns ON when the operation mode is changed and the result of the change is stored to the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 d Make sure that A300H Normally completed is stored in the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 and turn OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 e Turning OFF the Operation mode change request signal Y11 turns OFF the Operation mode change completed signal X11 Data exchange start request signal YOO Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 Operation mode change result area Un G2256 Operation mode change result MOV FROM instruction MOV TO instruction Set an operation mode in Check the result in Operation Operation mode change mode change result area and request area Current operation mode Figure 3 8 Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change comp
320. oeeeoeseeeeeeeaeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee ee eee e ee zs n a ES Se 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 3 4 1 1 I O data exchange 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC LAY ceries 4 1 2 Acquisition of diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information Diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on DP Slaves during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using buffer memory and I O signals The cause of errors occurring on DP Slaves can be checked on the QJ71PB92V from the diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information DP Master Class 1 The DP Slave notifies the QJ71PB92V of the diagnostic information and extended diagnostic information Power acpu 9171 supply PB92V module DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Diagnostic error occurred Extended diagnostic error occurred Figure 4 3 Acquisition of Diagnostic and or Extended Diagnostic Information 1 Procedure for acquiring diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information The following shows the procedure for acquiring diagnostic and or extended diagnostic information Generation of diagnostic information The RSP ERR LED turns ON The diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON Check the station that sent the diagnostic information This section 2 The diagnostic information sent from t
321. of Input and Output Signals Remote I O Station 5 W QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F 5 Z F arn Zujw zu Zou hee nan o zZ E m n x W m 9 Zz 5 g fo oa A Yn a On als rA 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network T 60 s 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING MELSEC Aries 2 MELSECNET H remote I O network settings a Remote master station QJ71LP21 25 settings Table7 58 Remote Master Station Settings Item Description Station No Station No 0 Transmission speed 25 Mbps MODE 4 Operation mode Online b Remote I O station QU72LP25 25 settings Table7 59 Remote I O Station Settings Item Description Station No Station No 1 Transmission speed 25 Mbps MODE 4 Operation mode Online c Parameter settings on GX Developer remote master station W Network parameters Assignment the MNET 10 H remote station network range Module No 1 W Network parameters Setting the number of MELSECNET Ether Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments Assignment method C Points Start Monitoring time 200 10ms Parameter name Module 1 _ Total st Network type MNET H Remote master Start End eee Switch screens XY setting Starting 1 0 No 0000 M station gt A station M station lt R station
322. of the Status Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Status Alarm Manufacturer Specific Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Aam Not checked Disables transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Manufacturer Specific Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function Diagnostic Alarm This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Not checked Disables transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Diagnostic Alarm Process Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Process Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Not checked Disables transmission of the Process Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Process Alarm Pull Plug Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Not checked Disables transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Pull Plug Alarm Allow ma
323. oken rotation time Setting range 256 to 16777215 Unit x Tpit Default 50000 x TBit Set a constant for controlling the GAP update time T_gud Setting range 1 to 100 Default 10 Set the highest FDL address of DP Slaves that exist on the network Setting range 2 to 126 Default 126 Set the maximum number of retries for individual data transmission Setting range 1 to 7 Default Depends on the transmission speed Target Rot Time T_tr GAP factor PROGRAMMING HSA Max retry limit DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 4 Bus Parameters 6 8 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC A ries Tsi Bit Time is a unit that expresses the time required for 1 bit data transmission as 1 The actual processing time differs as shown below depending on the transmission speed In the case of 1 5 Mbps 1 Tsi 1 1 5 x 10 0 667 x 10s In the case of 12 Mbps 1 TeiJ 1 12 x 10 0 083 x 10 s Tst is converted into ms automatically on GX Configurator DP The results of the conversion ms are displayed on the right side of the screen eeeeeaeeseeoeaeeaoeeoseoeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeaeoseoeeeeeaeoeeeeeeeeaeee eee 3 Precautions for bus parameter setting For each set value of the max T_sdr Quiet Time T_qui and Setup Time T_set set the maximum value among those of the stations connected to PROFIBUS DP including the DP Master The default value of the QJ71PB92V varies depending on the transmission speed
324. on M aLS AG lA cries 9 5 3 Error codes E4004 to E4FFu Error codes generated during acyclic Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error Code Error Description Action E400H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range 4014 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V E402H The read data length is incorrect Check if the specified read data length is correct and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E403H Read error response actions E404H The slot number is incorrect Check if the specified slot number is correct and retry E405H The index is incorrect Check if the specified index is correct and retry a Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E406H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 to ae start I O data exchange Class service of Acyclic communication was executed while A E407H Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in I O data exchange is stopped ee the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions F ene Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in A physical exec
325. on GX Configurator DP 9 28 9 6 How to Return the QJ71PB92V to Its Factory set Conditions APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries APPENDICES Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QJ71PB92V TROUBLESHOOTING The following table shows the functions added to the QJ71PB92V and the applicable function version and serial No for each function Refer to this section and check if your QJ71PB92V supports respective functions o TableAPPX 1 Function Upgrade of the QJ71PB92V Temporary slave reservation D function o Redundant system support function D QJ71PB92D compatible function R 09052 or later INDEX No restrictions Remark eeeeeeecsese eoeseeoes eos eeaeoeseeeoeeeeceoeeeceeeeeoeseeeoeeeeaoeoe eee For how to check the function version and serial No refer to Section 2 4 eeeeeeeceeoceaeeoeseeeeeeoeoeeeoeeeeeoeeeeeeeeoeoeeeoeeoeeaoevoeeeeae ee 8 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models This section compares the specifications of the QJ71PB92V and those of the former models and explains the precautions to be taken when replacing the system and programs The former models are shown in the following table TableAPPX 2 List of Former Models Model Remarks The model QJ71PB92D is compared here For replacement with the QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D compatible function refer to the following manual PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual SH 080127 Products of hard
326. on start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON the value in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 becomes 0 While communication is stopped Data exchange start request signal Y00 OFF the remaining time is held until the Data exchange start request signal YOO is turned ON again 7 Z O lt Q m Oo w a 2 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 37 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC IA ries 3 Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 Setting some values to this area can mask invalidate any data of the diagnostic information that is sent from a DP Slave during communication Initial value 02B9x 0 Validates the diagnostic information 1 Invalidates the diagnostic information Address DEC HEX b15 to bO 2080 820n See below bit Description pe bO Parameter transmission request from the DP Slave 1 b1 Diagnostic information read request 0 b2 Fixed to 0 0 b3 The DP Slave is monitored by the watchdog timer 1 b4 DP Slave entered FREEZE mode 1 b5 DP Slave entered SYNC mode 1 b6 0 Reserved 0 b7 Excluded from I O data exchange according to the parameter settings 1 b8 Unable to exchange I O data with DP Slaves 0 b9 The DP Slave is not ready to exch
327. ond format The set value 9DFF4400n represents January 15 in 1984 x 00 00 00 Yn a EO Of 0i BZ 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions 4 17 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Le eries b Request for reading time data The time data read request is used to read the time data written to a DP Slave by another time master out to the QU71PB92V This request can be used when two or more time masters exist on the same network Time master 1 Power QJ71 CPU supply a PB92V Time master 2 module Time data read request Time data Time setting Time data Time data Time data DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 15 Time Data Read Request 2 Executing time control function Execute the time control function by the following procedure a Write request data to the Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 b Turn ON the Time control start request signal Y19 c When the time control is completed the execution result is stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and the Time control start response signal X19 turns ON d Check the execution result stored in the Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 and turn OFF the Time control start response signal X19 For program examples on the time control function refer to the following
328. onfigure the network as shown in Section 2 3 2 Maximum configuration with a repeater connected nw DP Master QJ71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 61 Z Repeater 1 nA DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted g as number of modules a AF Lu Power F A a supply 2 ala module E65 i gt naw Segment 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator o zZ DP Slave DP Slave eee DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 30 o Y V J Repeater 1 E DP Slave 30 modules D Segment 2 DP Slave DP Slave AEE DP Slave 2 FDL address 31 FDL address 32 FDL address 61 J a v S DP Slave 31 modules amp Figure 2 2 Maximum Configuration with a Repeater Connected 1 When using redundant CPUs configure the network as shown in Section 2 3 Yn a EG a AZ 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 7 2 2 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE eries 3 When 125 DP Slaves are connected DP Master QU71PB92V 1 DP Slaves 125 Repeaters 4 DP Master Class 1 FDL address 0 Connection points counted as number of modules Power q QJ71 supply QCPU pBgg2v module Segment 1 L _ Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave EEPE DP Slave FDL address 1 FDL address 2 FDL address 30 XS Repeater 1 kg
329. or later Start Procedure Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information button gt H W Information button HIW Information Value 0000 Module Display format Module Name QJ71PB92 Product information 07031 0000000000 B HEX C DEC HAW LED Information HAW SW Information Item Value Item Value Item Value Value RUN 0001 READY 0001 RSP ERR 0000 _Stop monitor Figure 9 2 H W Information Screen Table9 2 Values Displayed at H W LED Information Description The LED on the QJ71PB92V is OFF 0001 The LED on the QJ71PB92V is ON Displaying 0000 and 0001 alternately The LED on the QJ71PB92V is flashing 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions 9 3 o Z E e e T mo wW l faa gt O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC IA series 9 2 When Parameters cannot be Written from GX Configurator DP The following shows the troubleshooting procedures to be taken when parameters cannot be written to the QJ71PB92V from GX Configurator DP 1 When the QJ71PB92D compatible function is disabled Parameters cannot be written Is the DP Master set to QJ71PB92V in the PROFIBUS Network window in GX Configurator DP Set the DP Master to QJ71PB92V in the
330. oreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation 5 Tighten the screws within the following torque ranges Table5 1 Screw Tightening Torque Screw Location Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48 N m PROFIBUS cable connector screw 4 40UNC screws 0 20 to 0 28 N m 1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module mounting screw if the module is subject to significant vibration 5 1 5 1 Implementation and Installation 5 1 1 Handling precautions SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM M eL 26 FY caries 5 2 Procedures Before System Operation The following diagram illustrates the procedure before system operation 5 2 1 In the case of the single CPU system 7 Start a o Mount the QJ71PB92V on the base unit E t cas AA Turn ON the power A Perform self diagnostics of the QJ71PB92V L Section 5 4 2 Perform self diagnostios of the QU71PBO2V Q E Set the PROFIBUS DP parameters on GX Configurator DP e gt Section 6 1 9 A N Use output status No setting for the case of a CPU stop error 2 Make I O assignments on GX Developer set the error time 2 output mode and write the PLC para
331. ormally completed Completion status of Completion status of response to alarm data No 4 response to alarm data No 8 0 Failed or not executed 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed To the next page T 37 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request PROGRAMMING Table7 34 Response Format When Normally Completed Continued eG Q series Buffer memory address Result 26449 6751H to The alarm data that was read by the alarm read request without ACK is stored 26484 6774H L gt Section 7 5 1 2 a 4 26485 6775H A response code is stored Stored value A501H The alarm type is stored i Alarm type Diagnosis alarm type Process alarm 26486 6776H Pull alarm A513 Plug alarm A5141 Status alarm A5151 Update alarm Manufacturer AS16H specific alarm Alarm data No 1 The alarm status and sequence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to b3 b2 b1 bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 26487 6777H 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is req
332. output data reception PTEN M100 1 D2000 0 x30 I C100 x31 Y14F Figure APPX 11 Changing Program for Input and Output Data e Changing the program for reading diagnostic information Relevant sample programs Section 7 1 7 2 7 3 and 7 4 a i TLFROWP HO K2040 D1000 K5 l A e e ee eee ee ee o i e i e e X21 PLS M1 Change the program so that each station status is read from Slave status area Diagnostic information detection Change the program so that diagnostic information is read from the each station status read at 1 HO K23057 D1000 KI l eee HO K23072 D1010 K2 PLS M1 Figure APPX 12 Changing Program for Reading Diagnostic Information AP PX 18 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES f Replacing a dedicated instruction QJ71PB92D only Relevant sample program Section 7 4 W100 H C 0C Ne ee a ga ee ee 1 Y0G t M101 PAE E E E 1 W101 I H 4 BBLKRD uo l KO J 0200 KI a E EE E J a 1 La W101 T BMOY_ K4Y100 D300 KI 2 2 __ 7 G BBLKWR uo K960 0300 KI i aoa XOC to the dedicated instruction interlock Change the buffer memory addresses of the input area and output area M100 Yoc 2 1 xoc A Lea TG BBLKRD uo 1K6144 D200 KI Va SF L Me ima M100 BHOY _ K4Y100 D300 KI wee 2 x0 2 _ H _ A f
333. output status is refreshed every time a DP Slave receives the SYNC service If no SYNC service is received the output status is held 2 UNSYNC This service ends the SYNC output synchronization mode DP Master Class 1 Power QJ71 supply QCPU pgg2v module SYNC service Uis sent to group 1 Bus terminator Bus terminator Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 DP Slave 1 Boa DP Slave 2 0 Output image memory Data are refreshed at all times by polling lt During UNSYNC execution Default gt The output image memory values are output without being changed Normal status lt During SYNC execution gt The output image memory values are output only once at the timing of the SYNC service SYNC service Issued within the same group Output to external device Figure 4 6 SYNC UNSYNC vegel 4 8 4 1 PROFIBUS DPV0 Functions 4 1 3 Global control function 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG cries b FREEZE UNFREEZE 1 FREEZE This service starts the FREEZE input synchronization mode gt In the FREEZE mode the input status is refreshed every time a DP Slave 3 receives the FREEZE service If no FREEZE service is received the input status is held 2 UNFREEZE a This service ends the FREEZE input synchronization mode DP Master Class 1 fa 3 Power QJ71 supply QCPU pgBg2v module FREEZE service is
334. p to 8 Basic model QCPU QOOCPU Up to 24 O O Q01CPU Q02CPU High Performance CO ERA model QCPU QO6HCPU Up to 64 oO oO Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Process CPU o12PHCPU Up to 64 oO oO Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Up to 11 3 main base Redundant CPU Q25PRHCPU Up to 53 O O extension base QOOUJCPU Up to 8 QOOUCPU Up to 24 Universal model a Up to 36 5 Ha QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU Up to 64 QO6UDHCPU 2 1 Applicable System OVERVIEW N z O T 5 o Le Z Q SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TA eries No of mountable 1 Mountable CPU module CPU type CPU model name Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU Universal model ________ Programmable QCPU QO6UDEHCPU Up to 64 O O controller CPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Safety CPU QS001CPU Not mountable x x 4 QO6CCPU V C Controller module QO6CCPU V B Up to 64 O O Q12DCCPU V Available base unit Main base unit Extension base unit k modules O Available x Not available 1 Limited to the range of the number of I O points in the CPU module 2 Mountable on any I O slot of the mountable base unit 3 Use the QJ71PB92V
335. pecified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V a Check if the specified write data length is correct and E442H The write data length is incorrect retry N Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E443H Write error response actions E444H The slot number is incorrect Check if the specified slot number is correct and retry E445H The index is incorrect Check if the specified index is correct and retry E Check if the specified CommRef number is correct and E446H The CommRef number is incorrect retry Turn ON the Data exchange start request signal Y00 to Tada start I O data exchange Class service of Acyclic communication was executed while E447H Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in I O data exchange is stopped a ate the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions FR Verify that the bit corresponding to the DP Slave is ON in A physical execution error detected or system switching asta E450H i i S the Slave status area Normal communication detection occurred during service execution in the redundant system Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions E451H Execution error on the protocol was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E452H
336. pected to be connected to the network in the future setting them as Reserved stations in the parameter setting eliminates the need to check the sequence program lt gt gt Section 6 5 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS 26 Fel series 1 Control master FDL address display area Un G2263 This area stores the FDL address of the control system QJ71PB92V when it is used in a redundant system The FDL address is stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON The FDL addresses for the control system are set in GX Configurator DP lt gt Section 6 3 OVERVIEW Table3 21 Control Master FDL Address Display Area Un G2263 Set Value Description CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 0000H to 007Dx 0 to 125 The FDL address of the QJ71PB92V in the control system 25 e Parameter not registered The QJ71PB92V is not mounted to a redundant system FFFFH 2 Standby master FDL address display area Un G2264 This area stores the FDL address of the standby system QJ71PB92V when it is used in a redundant system The FDL address is stored when the Communication READY signal X1B turns ON The FDL addresses for the standby system are set in the Intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer _ gt Section 6 7 7 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo Table3 22 Standby Master FDL Address Display Area Un G2264 FUNCTIONS Set Value Descri
337. placing the QJ71PB92D with the QJ71PB92V using the Details QJ71PB92D compatible function 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC TE eries 1 1 Features The following describes the features of the QJ71PB92V OVERVIEW 1 DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP The QJ71PB92V complies with IEC 61158 and operates as a DP Master Class 1 on PROFIBUS DP systems a Up to 125 DP Slaves are connectable Up to 125 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V enabling exchange of I O data up to 8192 bytes gt Section 4 1 1 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves when QJ71PB92Vs are mounted on main base units in a redundant system CONFIGURATION SYSTEM gt oO wa Diagnostic information can be easily acquired Diagnostic or extended diagnostic information of an error occurred on a DP Slave during I O data exchange can be easily acquired using the buffer memory and I O signals lt gt Section 4 1 2 SPECIFICATIONS c Supporting the global control function By sending services SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE to each DP Slave in a group synchronous control of DP Slave I O data is available gt Section 4 1 3 Table1 2 Descriptions of Services This service is for synchronizing the output status of DP Slaves FUNCTIONS In the SYNC mode the output status of a DP Slave is refreshed oe each time it receives the SYNC service While no SYNC service is received the output status is held UNSYNC This servi
338. ption 00004 to 007DxH The FDL address of the QJ71PB92V in the standby system 0 to 125 e Parameter not registered e The QJ71PB92V is not mounted to a redundant system FFFFH SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 55 3 4 14 Redundant system area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 3 System switching condition setting area Disconnected station detection Un G23648 to Un G23656 When the QJ71PB92V is mounted on a redundant system this area is used to set the switching target DP Slaves Initial value 0000H a System switching condition Un G23648 Set AND or OR as a condition for the setting in the System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 0 ORcondition If a communication error occurs on any of the specified DP Slaves the systems are switched 1 AND condition If a communication error occurs on all of the specified DP Slaves the systems are switched b System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 Set the target DP Slaves for the system switching Initial value 0000H 0 Not system switching target 1 System switching target Address DEC HEX b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 23649 5C61H 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 4 3 2 1 Each bit represents 23650 5C62H 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
339. quest and using the Alarm read request with ACK Whether the DP Slave supports this function or not can be checked in the GSD file For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave a Alarm read request without ACK Alarm ACK request Use these requests when a certain time may be required to return ACK after reading an alarm from a DP Slave e g when taking corrective actions for the DP Slave error The Alarm ACK request enables ACK to be returned for each read out alarm Alarm generation The alarm is read from the DP Slave Alarm read request without ACK Take corrective actions for the error that occurred on the DP Slave ACK is returned to the alarm for which processing is complete y Completed Figure 4 11 Procedure Using Alarm Read Request without ACK and Alarm ACK Request Alarm ACK request 4 14 4 2 PROFIBUS DPV1 Functions 4 2 2 Alarm acquisition 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries b Alarm read request with ACK This request automatically sends ACK after reading an alarm ACK is returned in response to all read out alarms OVERVIEW Alarm generation The alarm is read from the DP Slave Alarm read request with ACK ACK is returned to the alarm for which processing is complete CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Take corrective actions for the error that occurred on the DP Slave y Completed Figure 4
340. quest was detected on the DP Slave side E42FH Incorrect data type was detected on the DP Slave side Incorrect parameter in the request was detected on the DP E430H Slave side To the next page 9 5 Error Codes 9 15 9 5 3 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Error codes generated during acyclic communication o Z E e e T mo wW l a O APPENDICES INDEX Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA cries Error codes E431H to E468H Table9 6 Error codes E400H to E4FFH Continued Error Code Error Description Action E4314 Resource error was detected during read processing on the DP Slave side E432 Resource error was detected during write processing on the DP Slave side E433H The resource is already in use on the DP Slave side err tda eee ee E434H There is no resource that can be used on the DP Slave side A E OM ae ONES correctly set or not and retry The service not available for the specified DP Slave was 7 E435H For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave requested E436H Memories used for request processing are insufficient on the DP Slave side E437H The DP Slave side made this service invalid E438H The DP Slave side did not respond to the request E440H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E441H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the s
341. r codes that are output on the QJ71PB92V The QJ71PB92V error codes are classified by groups with error No The following table lists the groups of the error codes and the areas where they are stored Table9 3 Error Code Classifications Nae Storage Location Reference Error Codes Classification y Buffer memory address Section Extended diagnostic information read response Error codes generated when reading extended E200 to E2FFH area Section 9 5 1 diagnostic error information Address 23457 5BA1h Error codes generated during operation mode Operation mode change result area E300 to E3FFH SA Section 9 5 2 switching Address 2256 8D0H Error codes generated during acyclic Acyclic communication response area E400H to E4FFH cay Section 9 5 3 communication Address 25121 to 26144 6221H to 6620n Alarm response area k E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Section 9 5 4 Address 26446 to 26768 674EH to 6890n Error codes generated during execution of time Time control setting response area E600H to E6FFH Section 9 5 5 control Address 26800 68B0n F100H to E1FFH Diagnostic information of local station Local station error information area Sees QJ71PB92V Address 23071 5A1FH 1 The diagnostic information of the local station can be confirmed on the Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer For the confirmation on the Module s Detailed Information s
342. r the start command device data Tracking transfer is not needed for output signals of the QU71PB92V 1 For whether or not each QJ71PB92V function can be continued or reexecuted in system switching refer to Sections 7 9 1 to 7 9 7 Start command Output signal if of QU71PB92V P_ o Start command device data Using the start command device it are tracking transferred turns ON with the OUT instruction Figure 7 26 How to Turn ON an Output Signal of the QJ71PB92V 2 Processing after system switching Output signals of the QJ71PB92V are turned OFF in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after switching system from standby to control SM1518 This prevents the QJ71PB92V s output signals from remaining ON in the new control system after system switching ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control ae X1B XID XIF 1 it fFMOY HO K4YO K2 Turns OFF the QJ71PB92V s output signal This is the case where output signals of QJ71PB92V are Y00 to Y1F Figure 7 27 Processing After System Switching 7 67 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries b When keeping the I O data exchange function enabled after system switching 1 Initial setting The initial setting is performed in the timing of ON for 1 scan only after z Lu switching system from standby to control SM1
343. ransfer global variables for all DUT s Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project Cancel Back Default Figure 6 12 Number of Automatic Refresh Parameter Settings When Set by Block Transfer 6 21 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries b When Slave Specific Transfer is used When the automatic refresh of I O data is set by Slave Specific Transfer i e when changing the refresh target device on a per DP Slave basis the following S number of automatic refresh parameters can be set per QJ71PB92V z Max number of settings Number of connected DP Slaves x 2 3 ps 2 N a Slave Specific Buffer Devices Slave name I O Wor l Input Device Output Device z g E Slave_Nr_O01 16 16 D0 D15 D5000 0D5015 J4 Set auto refresh parameters A 6 for No of DP Slaves connected to QJ71PB92V x2 no Fe O z S Le 8 l a oO Cancel no Z O E 2 gt Set the total number E O Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access of the auto refresh parameters Enter the device addresses for buffering 1 0 and diagnostic data g z Buffer Devices mi 2 Slave Specific Transfer Edit Devices 9 a g Lra 939 28 Block Transfer EOF fe On V Comm Trouble Area D10000 to D10249 7 Extd Comm Trouble Area D10300 to D10426 lt q Upto 3 auto refresh 3 arameter
344. rd I O Word Size i P The display format is Number of words of input data number of words of output data Set the start device used for input data communications Set a value in unit of 16 points for a bit device Input Device After the start device is entered the device range is displayed with the start and end addresses Set the start device used for output data communications p Set a value in unit of 16 points for a bit device Output Device o i EEA i After the start device is entered the device range is displayed with the start and end addresses 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 18 6 6 2 Automatic Refresh Settings OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o zZ E w o a im w 3 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC IA ries 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters Write the automatic refresh parameters to the QCPU Reset the QCPU after writing the automatic refresh parameters 1 Start procedure 1 Select Download to Module in Task Panel 2 Check that the Update Autorefresh settings checkbox is selected in the Select Items for Download window Select Items for Download V Download PROFIBUS configuration Update Autorefresh settings Remove Autorefresh settings For the same module type V Select All Cancel Figure 6 11 Selec
345. reset request signal Y01 turns OFF the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 The following processing is performed at the same time that the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns OFF e The RSP ERR LED turns OFF e The corresponding bit in the slave status area Diagnostic information detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic information turns ON FUNCTIONS c When new diagnostics information is generated while the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 is ON the behavior is as follows e The Diagnostic information detection signal X01 does not turn ON e The RSP ERR LED does not turn ON e The corresponding bit in the Slave status area Diagnostic information SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION detection Un G23056 to Un G23064 of the station that sent the diagnostic 2 information does not turn ON 7 x d After the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns OFF take actions for E the error cause and turn OFF the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 2 Z g S ae als 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 7 Ss 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries e After the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 is turned OFF the QJ71PB92V checks for diagnostic information again If any diagnostic information has been genera
346. respond p executed to the same DP Slave check the execution E59EH Or because of current processing of a Class2 service the intervals and retry DP Slave cannot handle the next service For the start completion status of the DP Slave and the Acyclic communication execution intervals refer to the manual for the DP Slave E59FH No response was received from the DP Slave Check the DP Slave status and retry Any of the following functions are being executed from the Verify that the processing of the following functions is same DP Master to the same DP Slave completed and retry E5A0H e Acyclic communication Acyclic communication e Alarm acquisition Alarm acquisition e FDT DTM technology FDT DTM technology E5A1H Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative _ Hardware failure ne o E5A2H explaining a detailed description of the problem 9 22 9 5 Error Codes 9 5 4 Error codes E500H to E5FFH Error codes generated when reading alarms Q TROUBLESHOOTING M aLS AG Fe series 9 5 5 Error codes E600x to E6FFu Error codes generated when executing time control Table9 8 Error codes E600H to E6FFH Error Code Error Description Action E600H The request code is incorrect Check if the request code is correct and retry After writing clock data from another time master execute E601H No clock data have been written from another time master
347. ries 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves The following explains the request and response formats in acyclic communications providing a program example The request and response formats in this section employ offset addresses in word units The offset address refers to the n th data in word units starting from the start address of 7 15 the request instruction No area to be used Table7 14 List of Start Addresses in Request Instruction No Areas Request Instruction No Request instruction No 1 Start Address of Acyclic Communication Request Area 23809 5D01H Start Address of Acyclic Communication Response Area 25121 6221H Request instruction No 2 23937 5D81h 25249 62A1H Request instruction No 3 24065 5E01h 25377 6321H Request instruction No 4 24193 5E81h 25505 63A1H Request instruction No 5 24321 5F01H 25633 6421H Request instruction No 6 Request instruction No 7 24449 5F81H 24578 6001H 25761 64A1H 25889 6521H Request instruction No 8 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves 24705 6081H 26017 65A1H PROGRAMMING M eLS eG lA cries 1 Making a sequence program The following example program is created for executing request instruction No 1 For details on the program example refer to Section 7 4 5 gt I
348. ring to the following table TableAPPX 7 Buffer Memory Comparisons Buffer memory address Area name MELSEC TA eries Replacement precautions 2256 Operation mode change 2256 Operation mode change In the QJ71PB92V values stored in 8D01 result area 8D01 result area the buffer memory and operation specifications are different 22 22 Self di tic test stat Section 3 4 1 Se Offline test status area ae aaa ciate SF 8D2 8D2u code area Modify the relevant parts of the sequence program 6144 to 10239 0 to 959 Input data area for mode 3 Input area 1800 to 04 to 3BFu 27FFi 14336 to Buffer memory addresses have been 960 to 1919 18431 changed Output data area for mode 3 3C0 to Output area 3800 to Modify the relevant parts of the 77Fu 47FFu sequence program 22528 to 22777 Address information area for 1920 to 2039 Address information area 58001 to mode 3 7801 to 7F 7x 58F9u 23072 to 23321 Diagnostic information area 2040 to 2079 oa Communication trouble area 5A201 to for mode 3 7F8u to 81Fx Buffer memory addresses have been 5B191 changed 23328 to In the QJ71PB92V values stored in 23454 Extended diagnostic 2096 to 2110 Expansion communication the buffer memory and operation 5B20x to information area for mode 3 830 to 83Ex trouble area specifications are different 5B9Eu Section 3 4 1 23056 to Modify the relevant parts of
349. rmation non notification time setting area Un G2084 when the Data exchange start request signal YOO is OFF Values set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored eeeeeaeeeeoeaeoeaeaeaeeeoeeoeeeeeoeeeeeeeaoeoeeeeeoeaoe eases eeaeaeaeaeeee The time remaining time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON can be checked in the Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 3 36 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 6 Diagnostic information area 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG cries 2 Current diagnostic information non notification time area Un G2085 This area stores the remaining time during which no diagnostic information is notified after communication start after Data exchange start completed signal X00 turns ON initial value 0 seconds The non notification time is set in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 OVERVIEW Table3 16 Current diagnostic Information Non notification Time Area Un G2085 A countdown time remaining time during which no diagnostic information 0 to 65535 is notified is stored Unit seconds No diagnostic information is notified until the value reaches 0 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO When the time set in the Diagnostic information non notification time setting area Un G2084 has elapsed after communicati
350. rned OFF b When using Class 2 service If system switching occurs before execution of the ABORT service the INITIATE service is not completed normally in the new control system In this case after the time for the INITIATE service transmission timeout has elapsed execute the INITIATE service again 7 83 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves PROGRAMMING MELSEC KE eries 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition If a system switching occurs the function of the alarm acquisition cannot be continued ai In redundant systems do not use the alarm acquisition i To use the function pay attention to the this section and fully examine the possible operations in advance 1 After the system switching Z After the system switching only the alarms that is newly generated after the switching can be obtained Dg When system switching occurs in the redundant system the alarms that have been z3 obtained before the system switching cannot be read out in the new control system 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves 7 5 If a system switching occurs during execution of the time control function the processing z O cannot be continued a The following explains a program example for reexecuting the time control function after system switching 1 Request and response formats For the request and respons
351. rogram example If system switching occurs with Time control execution command ON the time control function may be reexecuted after the system switching To prevent reexecution perform the following while ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 is ON ON for 1 scan only after switching the system from standby to control SM1518 X27 I RST X27 Figure 7 39 Program Example for Time Control Function Time Data Write Request 7 85 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP Slaves PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Fel ceries 7 9 7 Program example for temporary slave reservation If a system switching occurs during execution of the temporary slave reservation function the processing cannot be continued The following explains a program example for reexecuting temporary slave reservation function after system switching OVERVIEW 1 Device assignments in program example The devices assignment are the same as those in Section 7 9 1 ao ie DZ 2 Tracking devices for reexecuting the function in the case of system cas switching In the program for the temporary slave reservation function data in the following devices are tracking transferred r Start command device for execution of the temporary slave reservation function q O 3 Program example F N Program example for temporary slave reservation
352. rror Code Error Description Action E200H The specified FDL address is out of the range E201H No FDL address has been specified M E202H The specified FDL address belongs to the local station G eee Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry z E203H The specified FDL address belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station E2041 No extended diagnostic information is found in the specified FDL address Change the QJ71PB92V operation mode to mode 3 and retry E205H Invalid mode When a value is set for Switch 2 of the intelligent function is module switches delete it and leave it as blank no zZ setting 9 5 Error Codes 9 13 9 5 1 Error codes E200H to E2FFH Error codes generated when reading extended diagnostic information Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC TA eries Error codes E300H to E3A3H 9 5 2 Error codes E300 to E3FFu Error codes generated when switching operation mode Table9 5 Error codes E300H to E3FFH Error Code Error Description Action a Op Check if the operation mode set in Operation mode E300H The specified operation mode is invalid change request area is correct and retry After writing parameters change the mode to E301H Parameters have not been written to the module a Communication mode mode 3 After completing the following processing change the operation mode Acquisition of extended diagnostic information E302H Unable to change the
353. rs gt Gi Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access Enter the device addresses for buffering 1 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer Input Set the I O data refresh target Block Transfer Output M Comm Trouble Area Extd Comm Trouble Area Set the refresh target in the Slave status area IV Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and masi cuo bo to D200 to D224 id master module using e AutoRefresh IV Consistency Enable the auto refresh function The auto refresh parameters are written to the QCPU at the time of parameter writing PLC code options C Data transfer only Cancel C User variables AIDUTs Contents of user library start of data transfer global variables for all DUTs Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project Back Default Enable the data consistency function Figure 7 5 Automatic Refresh Parameter Setting Example 7 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples 7 1 1 Program examples using automatic refresh PROGRAMMING M eLS 26 Cel series 2 Program example if Not needed when the initial setting is not changed S ae a a a a ne ee 5 SM402 initi i SET 4400 1 Turn ON the initial setting execution command H400 KIB KID XIF x0 Yo UO Initializes Diagnostic info jf ae aaau pees aad is caga invalid setting area z G a UO Initializes Dia
354. rsion are displayed on the Product information list or Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer The procedure for checking the serial No and function version on the Product information list screen is shown below FUNCTIONS Start Procedure To display the screen for checking the serial number and function version select Diagnostics System monitor and click the Product inf list button in GX Developer SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Product Information List QO3UDCPU O ra QU71PB92V 32pt 0000 E None 7 m None x W 3 0 Z 0 A CSY file creating D 6 a Figure 2 10 Product Information List uE lt 5 E a AZ 2 4 Checking the Function Version and Serial No 2 17 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 18 MELSEC TE eries Serial No Ver Product No e The serial No of the module is displayed in the Serial No column e The function version of the module is displayed in the Ver column e The serial No Product No shown on the rating plate is displayed in the Product No column 1 Note that is displayed in the Product No column for the QJ71PB92V since this module is not supporting Product No display 1 The Product No is displayed in the column only when the Universal model QCPU is used 4 POINT The serial No shown on the rating plate may not match with the one displayed on Product in
355. s can be set M Slave Status Area D10500 to D10524 P S Data Transfer between CPU and master module using fo C Copy Instructions AutoRefresh I Consistency A W PLC code options ifr C Data transfer only C User variables AIDUTs 2 Contents of user library start of data transfer global variables for all DUTs amp Please export the user library and import it in your PLC project a Cancel Back Default A v z Figure 6 13 Number of Automatic Refresh Parameter Settings When Set by Slave Specific Transfer z 0 O ir a no 6 gge ES Sg a HZ 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 22 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING 6 23 MELSEC Eseries 6 7 Parameter Setting by GX Developer Set output status at the time of CPU stop error redundant system support function and QJ71PB92D compatible function 1 Output status setting for the case of a CPU stop error a For the QJ71PB92V For the setting method refer to Section 4 6 b For the QJ71PB92D compatible function For how to set refer to 2 in this section 2 Redundant system support function and QJ71PB92D compatible function The following setting should be made only when using the redundant system support function or QJ71PB92D compatible function 4 POINT When setting intelligent function module switch setting set either redundant system support function or QJ71PB92D compatible function The redundant system support
356. s executed Table3 7 Areas Not Cleared At Alarm ACK Request Execution Buffer Memory Address are Description DEC HEX 26449 to 26484 f Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 1 is stored 6751H to 6774H 26489 to 26524 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 2 is stored 6779H to 679CH 26529 to 26564 6329 t0655 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 3 is stored 67A1H to 67C4H 26569 to 26604 9993 10 Abo Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 4 is stored 67C9H to 67ECH 2 to 26644 0603 10206 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 5 is stored 67F1H to 6814H 26649 to 26684 eee Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 6 is stored 6819H to 683CH 26689 to 26724 F Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 7 is stored 6841H to 6864H 26729 to 26764 Area to which alarm data of alarm data No 8 is stored 6869H to 688CH c The Alarm read response signal X18 turns ON when alarms on the specified DP Slave are read and the execution result is stored to the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 SETTINGS AND d Read the alarm information from the Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 and turn OFF the Alarm read request signal Y 18 e Turning OFF the Alarm read request signal Y18 turns OFF the Alarm read response signal X18 Remark Sooo ooo coor For details on acquisition of alarms refer to Section 4 2 2 eeeeeeeeeoeeoeoseoevoeeeeceoesoeeeeeeeoeoesee
357. s set with the Data exchange start request signal Y00 ON are ignored 2 Normal DP Slaves can be changed to Temporary slave reservations Changing Reserved stations DP Slaves set as reserved stations with slave parameters to Normal DP Slave status is not allowed For the temporary slave reservation function refer to Section 4 7 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 53 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 54 MELSEC TE cries 3 4 14 Redundant system area This area is used for the redundant system support function For details on the redundant system support function refer to Section 4 8 4 POINT 1 The corresponding bits of the Redundant system area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL address The actual order of assignment can be checked in Address information area for mode 3 Un G22528 to Un G22777 or in Documentation of I O Mapping of GX Configurator DP FDL Addr Name Model Slave_Nr_002 Order of assignment Slave_Nr_001 QJ71PB93D Slave_Nr_003 AJ95TB32 16DT 8 DI 8DO 2 When parameters have been modified deletion or addition of DP Slave s in GX Configurator DP the order of the assigned DP Slaves is changed After modifying parameters check the sequence program If some DP Slaves are ex
358. s the equipment required for the redundant PROFIBUS DP OZ nO system Table2 5 System Equipment DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V function version D or later lt _3 Section 2 4 o 8 W GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A or later z Configuration tool To mount the QJ71PB92V on an extension base unit use GX Configurator DP Version 7 03D or later DP Slave Redundant or non redundant DP Slave QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater Required when 32 or more DP Slaves are connected 2 fe PROFIBUS cable z L Section 5 5 1 Bus terminator hA E a ane Zujw zu Zou hee nan o Z E m n x W m o z 5 Fs 9 A Yn a EO oe als 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 9 Ss 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 10 MELSEC TE eries 2 Network configuration To use the QJ71PB92V in a redundant PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following conditions must be met a Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a main base unit 1 Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used Control system QJ71PB92V Standby system QJ71PB92V DP Slaves lt 126 1 2 1 Up to 124 DP Slaves are connectable 2 A redundant DP Slave may have two FDL addresses for control and standby systems If all of the DP Slaves are this type the number of connectable DP Slaves is 62 2 Number of connectable modules per segment Control s
359. screen of GX Configurator DP lt gt gt GX Configurator DP Operating Manual 2 The time differs as shown below depending on the transmission speed Table3 31 Time Corresponding to Transmission Speed aes Time Corresponding to Time Corresponding to A Transmission speed sone eek Common Processing time Transmission Speed 1 Transmission Speed 2 9 6kbps 0 9 ms 1 8 ms 500 ms 19 2kbps 0 6 ms 1 4 ms 250 ms 93 75kbps 0 18 ms 1 0 ms 60 ms 187 5kbps 0 09 ms 1 0 ms 50 ms 500kbps 0 035 ms 1 0 ms 40 ms 1 5Mbps 0 01 ms 1 0 ms 35 ms 3Mbps 0 007 ms 0 9 ms 35 ms 6Mbps 0 0025 ms 0 8 ms 35 ms 12Mbps 0 002 ms 0 8 ms 30 ms 3 66 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS eG lA cries b Redundant system switching time calculation example Shown below is a calculation example for the system switching time in the redundant system The calculation is based on the following conditions e Scan time is 5 ms e AND is set in System switching condition Un G23648 e In System switching DP Slave specification Un G23649 to Un G23656 1st to 3rd DP Slaves are set as switching targets OVERVIEW Transmission speed 1 5Mbps DP Master FDL address 0 DP Master FDL address 1 No of DP Slave 3 modules QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92V Bus terminator PROFIBUS DP Bus terminator i 0 CONFIGURATION SYSTEM
360. se prohibited 2 Ou to 81FH a os Values for masking invalidating diagnostic 3 2080 O Diagnostie informatio invalid information from DP Slaves are set in this 02B9H R W secon 8201 setting area 3 4 6 9 area W n 2081 i i i Giobal central area The global control function to be executed is 0 R W Section 8211 set in this area 3 4 9 2082 to 2083 ss System area Use prohibited 8224 to 8231 2084 Diagnostic information non This area I usedi to set the fime during which Section a ye ig ee F no diagnostic information is notified after 20 R W Z 8241 notification time setting area ee 3 4 6 fe communication start 5 A ot This area stores the time remaining time 5 2085 Current diagnostic information s ge se at Section i non notifcati n ti e atrea during which no diagnostic information is 0 R 346 825 notified after communication start a 2086 to 2253 i System area Use prohibited Kz 8264 to 8CDx ra 2254 i j i one Current operation mode area This area stores data of the currently operating 00011 R Section 2 2 th 8CEx mode 3 4 2 2 5 zu 2 2255 Operation mode change request When executing the operation mode change Section ES E request a desired operation mode is set in this FFFEx R W i o amp gt 8CFH area 3 4 3 na area 2256 Operation mode change result This area stores the execution result of the 0 R Section 8D0x area operation mode change request 3 4 3 e ra 2257 i i E Local F
361. servation cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaas 7 58 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network e a N E a a a a a a a a aa 7 59 A 10 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station ses Reena Suse E set scans that EAA as sold paeeath ine aces A AA oe sealant ite etna na 7 59 0 8 2 gt Other precautions m n icine ceeds acetal eee ed eves aad dele ae cues Ragan nae ed eee 7 66 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System ccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteenaeeees 7 67 7 9 1 W O Data Exchange Program Examples ccccccceceeeeeceeeeeseenceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaaees 7 71 7 9 2 Program example for acquisition of extended diagnostic error information 7 81 7 9 3 Program example for global Control function 2 0 2 ee cece eee eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaees 7 82 7 9 4 Program example for acyclic communication with DP Slaves cccccceeeeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeneees 7 83 7 9 5 Program example for alarm acquisition cccccceceeeeeeeeeeceecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeececncaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetes 7 84 7 9 6 Program example for time control over DP SlaVeS 0 0 0 ccceecceeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeeeeenaees 7 84 7 9 7 Program example for temporary Slave reServatiOn cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeees 7 86 CHAPTERS DEDICAT
362. sferred from DP 7 6 E e a ee Slave Read after completion Data transfer Not updated area for data of data transfer completed transferred from DP Slave Figure 4 21 Example of Input Data Consistency 4 5 Data Consistency Function 4 21 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS o Z O O Z Le SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC fe ics 2 How to prevent data inconsistency The data consistency function can be used by either of the following methods a Data consistency function by automatic refresh Next button in the Master Settings window To set automatic refresh click the of GX Configurator DP To use the data consistency function by automatic refresh select the Consistency checkbox or Master Parameters Wizard CPU Device Access Enter the device addresses for buffering 1 0 and diagnostic data Buffer Devices C Slave Specific Transfer input to pa Block Transfer Output to D1035 M Comm Trouble Area Extd Comm Trouble Area Slave Status Area Data Transfer between CPU and master module using Copy Instructions IV Consistency PLC code options C Data transfer only Contents of user library start of data transfer global variables for all DUT s Please export the user library and import it in your PLC proj
363. signal Y11 is turned OFF In the QJ71PB92V the processing is executed when the Operation mode change request signal Y11 is turned ON APPENDICES Operation mode change request signal Y11 Operation mode change completed signal X11 INDEX a Processing of operation mode change N Processing after Processing after operation mode change 2 operation mode change Processing after operation mode change is executed when Y11 is turned ON In the QJ71PB92D Processing of operation mode change 1 In the QJ71PB92V Processing of operation mode change 1 Processing of operation Processing after and mode change operation mode change Processing after operation All the processing for operation mode change mode change 2 is executed when Y11 is turned ON 1 Storing a value into the Current operation mode area Un G2254 Storing a value into the Operation mode change result area Un G2256 2 Execution of self diagnostics Returning to the factory set condition Flash ROM initialization Figure APPX 7 Operation Mode Change Request Signal Y11 Behavior Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 13 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D Area name Buffer memory address DEC Cal 9 4 3 Buffer memory Changes have been made to buffer memory addresses Change programs refer
364. sion base unit in a redundant system the module operates in the same way as used in a single CPU system However there are some restrictions For the restrictions refer to the following User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used A 13 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS General term Abbreviation Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the Type QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Master Module Description QJ71PB92V Abbreviation for the QJ71PB92V PROFIBUS DP Master module PROFIBUS DP Abbreviation of PROFIBUS DP network MELSECNET H Abbreviation of MELSECNET H network system Generic term for the QO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU QCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO03UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU CPU module QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU Redundant CPU Generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU GX Developer Generic product name for SWnD5C GPPW E SWnD5C GPPW EA SWnD5C GPPW EV and SWnD5C GPPW EVA n means version 4 or later A and V mean volume license product and version upgrade product respectively GX Configurator DP Configuration tool for QJ71PB92V Generic term of the product model
365. splays the versions of the GSD DDB file and the device Name Set the name of the DP Slave Setting range up to 16 alphanumeric characters Set the FDL address station number FDL Address Setting range 0 to 125 2 a To the next page E 9 or Oe BZ 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 10 6 PARAMETER SETTING Item min T_sdr MELSEC TA eries Table6 6 Slave Parameter Setting Items Continued Description Set the minimum response time required for a DP Slave to send a response frame to the QJ71PB92V Normally use the default value Setting range 1 to 255 Unit x Teit Default 11 x Teit Group identification number Set the group No Grp 1 to Grp 8 of the DP Slave Multiple groups Nos can also be set The set group numbers are used for the global control function SYNC UNSYNC FREEZE UNFREEZE Not checked Not belonging to the group No Checked Belonging to the group No Slave is active Uncheck the checkbox when the DP Slave is to be set as a reserved station Default selected Not checked Set as a reserved station Checked Set as a station performing I O data exchange Sync Output Check the checkbox to check if the DP Slave supports the Sync function or not in communication for initialization When the DP Slave does not support the Sync function diagnostic information is stored in the Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 of the QJ71PB92V This item can be s
366. st format refer to Section 7 5 i 2 Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un G26768 Be The execution result of alarm acquisition is stored in this area Initial value 0000n cas For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 5 25 3 4 12 Time control area This area is used for the time control 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a Oo 1 Time control setting request area Un G26784 to Un G26792 Set request data for the time control setting in this area Initial value 00001 For the request format refer to Section 7 6 2 Time control setting response area Un G26800 to Un G26812 The execution result of the time control setting is stored in this area Initial value 0000n For the response format for the execution result refer to Section 7 6 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 11 Alarm area 3 51 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 52 3 4 13 Temporary slave reservation area MELSEC TE cries Address DEC HEX 23608 5C38x 23609 5C39x 23610 5C3Ax 23611 5C3Bx 23612 5C3CH 23613 5C3D 23614 5C3En 23615 5C3FH This area is used for the temporary slave reservation function x POINT Order of assignment 1 The corresponding bits of the Temporary slave reservation area are assigned in order of the parameters set in GX Configurator DP in order of the FDL
367. status in the intelligent function module detailed settings after setting the I O assignments of the QU71PB92V 4 24 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS 26 EAseries a I O assignment setting 1 Startup procedure z m Parameters PLC parameter lt lt I O assignment gt gt O Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment 1 0 Assignment f Switch setting aJ71PBSAV 22points _ a Detailed setting s O zo eL LE gt nO Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Base mode Base model name Power model name Extension cable Bim C Detail n 8 Slat Default 12 Slot Default q S u O a Satins srouldba setassamewhen Import Multiple CPU Parameter _ReadPLC data o Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Defaut Check End Cancel Figure 4 23 I O Assignment Setting GX Developer b Intelligent function module detailed settings o Z O E O Z 5 Le 1 Startup procedure Parameters PLC parameter lt lt I O assignment gt gt Detailed setting button id 26 miz m Q 208 Intelligent f
368. struction area executed in acyclic communications 3 4 10 23809 to 24832 Acyclic communication request This area is used to set the request data for 0 RIW Section 5D014 to 6100n area acyclic communications 3 4 10 24833 to 25119 System area Use prohibited 61014 to 621FH EE This area stores the request acceptance status 25120 Acyclic communication request i Section and execution completion status in acyclic 0 R 6220n result area aa 3 4 10 communications 25121 to 26144 Acyclic communication response This area stores the execution result of acyclic 0 R Section 62214 to 6620x area communication 3 4 10 1 This indicates whether or not read write is possible from the sequence program R Read only R W Read write executable To 3 4 Buffer Memory 3 4 1 Buffer memory list the next page 3 19 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM 25 2 Z O lt Q m Oo w a ao PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Kel ries Table3 8 Buffer Memory List Continued Address rii Initial Read Reference Name Description 7 i DEC HEX value Write Section 26145 to 26415 E System area Use prohibited 66211 to 672FH 26416 to 26424 Slave status area This area stores the alarm status of each D
369. switching no system switching is performed even if a communication error occurs in another DP Slave To perform system switching again restore all of the switching target DP Slaves to normal condition The DP Slave status can be confirmed in the Slave status area Normal communication detection Un G23040 to Un G23047 gt Section 3 4 5 1 Itis any of all the DP Slaves that are specified in the System switching DP Slave specification area Un G23649 to Un G23656 Control system Standby system New standby system New control system Power supply module Power supply module Redundant CPU Redundant CPU Executes system switching Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 Communication failure Before recovery of the switching target DP Slave an error occurred at another DP Slave New standby system New control system ie Redundant QJ71 Redundant QJ71 module CPU PB92v GANSO module CPU PB92v Tracking cable Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave FDL address 2 FDL address 3 FDL address 4 Communication failure failure 2 Do not change the initial value of b8 in the Diagnostic information invalid setting area Un G2080 L
370. t Items for Download window 3 Click the oK button The automatic refresh parameters will be written to the QCPU POINT When automatic refresh parameters were written from GX Configurator DP while GX Developer was running they are not displayed in file lists such as Read from PLC Delete PLC data on GX Developer Update the file lists by the Refresh view button of the Read from PLC or Delete PLC data on GX Developer 6 19 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 6 3 Writing Automatic Refresh Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC KE eries 6 6 4 Number of set automatic refresh parameters There are restrictions on the number of automatic refresh parameters that can be set for QCPUs This section describes the number of automatic refresh parameters that can be set for QCPUs and the QJ71PB92V OVERVIEW 1 Number of automatic refresh parameter settings for QCPUs When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of automatic refresh parameter settings must not exceed the following limit CONFIGURATION SYSTEM Table6 10 Number of settable automatic refresh parameters Number of settable automatic refresh CPU type parameters 2 Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 256 Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU 256 Q02PH Q06PH Q12PH Q25PHCPU 256 g Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU 256 z Q00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU 256 QO2UCPU 1024 Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UDH Q26UDH Q03UDE Q04UDEH
371. t and response formats of the WRITE services ai Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE i 5 1 Request format Table7 18 Request Format fe Offset Address Description Set Value z Set a request code Se ae 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE F z gt 0 OH Set value 1401H ae 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE Set value 1411H 1 In WRITE service Class1_SERVICE ip b15 b8 b7 bO amp 0 1 Z 9 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave z Set value 00H to 7Du 0 to 125 2 In WRITE service Class2_SERVICE 1 1H b15 b8 b7 bO 6 1 Set the FDL address of the target DP Slave 5 Set value 00H to 7Du 0 to 125 Z U 2 Set CommRef No contained in the response format of the INITIATE service Set value 00H to 7Ex 0 to 126 a a Set the length of the data to write Unit byte g 2 2 2H mg Set value 1 to 240 Bor Set the slot No to write F ETa 3 3H Saa Set value 0 to 254 ES m wn Set the index to write Dt 4 4H Set value 0 to 255 Set the data to write o b15 b8 b7 bO WwW 5 5H Data 2 Data 1 lt W 5 5H to 124 7Cn 6 6H z lt x to a 124 7Cn Data 240 Data 239 T 125 7DH to Empty area Write 0000H 127 7FH Set value Fixed to 0000H PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T7 20 7 4 2 WRITE services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING 2 Response format a
372. t compatible 1 The watchdog timer error signal code has been changed to X1F Change the corresponding section in the sequence program AP PX 8 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries b Output signals Some output signals have been changed Change programs referring to the following table TableAPPX 6 Output Signal Comparisons Signal name Compa Replacement AJ71PB92D n QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D tibility precautions A1SJ71PB92D Data exchange start request signal YOO ON I O data exchange start Oo OFF I O data exchange stop Diagnostic information detection reset request signal g N Communication trouble detection signal reset ON Diagnostic Y01 ON Communication trouble detection signal reset i i i information oe unicati u i ignal r A lt 3 2 a in this section detection signal reset OFF Diagnostic information area clear request signal ON Diagnostic and Communication trouble area clear request signal Yo2 extended ON Communication and extended communication A 2 b in this section diagnostic trouble area clear request information area OFF clear request OFF Not used in QU71PB92V Delete the corresponding section in the sequence program Communication trouble area type selection signal Y03 Use prohibited ON Fixed type A OFF Ring type Global con
373. ted the Diagnostic information detection signal X01 turns ON and processing at a is performed Diagnostic information Diagnostic information detection detection reset reset request signal Y01 Diagnostic information Error detection detection signal X01 Reads diagnostic extended diagnostic or local station error MOV FROM information from buffer memory instruction 1 Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 Local station error information area Un G23071 Figure 3 2 Diagnostic Information Detection Reset Request Signal Y01 Diagnostic Information Detection Signal X01 Turning ON the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 does not clear the information shown below To clear the following information turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 e Diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23072 to Un G23321 Extended diagnostic information area for mode 3 Un G23328 to Un G23454 e Local station error information area Un G23071 3 3 Input Output Signals to from Programmable Controller CPU 3 3 2 Details of I O signals 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TE eries 3 Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y02 Diagnostic information area cleared signal X02 OVERVIEW a Turn ON the Diagnostic information area clear request signal Y0
374. tem Transmission Delay Time Normal value Bex 1 5 Max value Bcx2 b Input data delay time 2 Z O lt Q u 3 w a 2 Table3 27 Input Data Delay Time Data consistency function disabled Item Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Max value Scan Bcx 2 FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 3 5 Processing Time 3 63 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC TA eries 2 When the data consistency function is enabled The reading writing I O data by automatic refresh is set data consistency function enabled or dedicated instructions the transmission delay time is as shown below a Output data delay time Table3 28 Output Data Delay Time Data consistency function enabled Item Condition Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Scanx2 lt Bc Bcx3 Max value Scanx 2 gt Bc Scanx 2 Bcx2 b Input data delay time Table3 29 Input Data Delay Time Data consistency function enabled Item Condition Transmission Delay Time Normal value Scan Bc Scanx2 lt Bc Scan Bc Max value Scan Bce lt Scanx 2 Scan Bcx2 Scan gt Bc Scanx3 3 64 3 5 Processing Time 3 5 2 Transmission delay time 3 SPECIFICATIONS M eLS a6 cries 3 5 3 System switching time in redundant system This is the time taken from when the
375. the QJ71PB92D compatible function enabled e Change the module selected in the GX Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92V and write the parameters e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches 3 Section 6 7 e Change the module selected in the GX Configurator DP project to QJ71PB92D and write the parameters e Check Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches lt gt Section 6 7 FAULT ON The FDL address of a DP Slave is duplicated with that of the DP Master in parameter settings Check the parameters Section 6 3 and 6 5 Parameters in the flash ROM are corrupted Initialize the QJ71PB92V initialization of the flash ROM and write parameters again lt gt Section 9 6 An unexpected error other than the above has occurred Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 Depending on the number of DP Masters within the same network and the transmission speed setting the TOKEN LED seems to be unlit even in execution of token passing lt 37 Section 5 3 9 1 Error Check Using the LEDs and Corrective Actions Q TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Asnes 2 Checking the LED status on GX Developer The status of the QJ71PB92V s LEDs can be also checked on the H W LED Information screen H W LED information of GX Developer For checking the LED status use GX Developer Version 8 27D
376. the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to
377. this section OFF Y12 Use prohibited O Y13 Use prohibited O Y14 Use prohibited O Y15 Use prohibited O Y16 Use prohibited O Y17 Use prohibited O Alarm read request signal Y18 ON Alarm read request Use prohibited O OFF Time control start request signal Y19 ON Time control start Use prohibited oO request OFF Y1A Use prohibited O Y1B Use prohibited O Y1C Use prohibited O Y1D Use prohibited O Y1E Use prohibited oO Y1F Use prohibited O Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible AP PX 10 Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries 2 Differences in I O signal operations a Communication trouble detection signal reset YO1 and Communication trouble detection signal X01 While the Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 is ON another communication failure may occur In such cases the QJ71PB92D detects the failure again The QJ71PB92V does not detect the failure Communication failure 1 Communication failure 2 In the QJ71PB92D Communication trouble detection signal reset Y01 Communication trouble detection signal X01 In the QJ71PB92V Diagnostic information detection Even while Y01 is ON another failure is detected reset request signal
378. tion The PROFIBUS interface connector position on the QJ71PB92V is moved up by 17mm 0 67 inch compared with the QJ71PB92D If the PROFIBUS cable is not long enough extend the cable length by using an extension connector SPECIFICATIONS QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V RUN TEST RUN TEST SD RD TOKEN SD RD TOKEN READY PRM SET READY PRM SET RSP ERR FAULT RSP ERR FAULT o Z O Z Le PROFIBUS I F BUS TERMINATION nA oFF Don z PROFIBUS I F be Dn am g E QJ71PB92D QJ71PB92V im oe Figure 4 33 PROFIBUS Interface Connector Position E b Bus terminator The QJ71PB92V does not have a built in bus terminator When the bus terminator setting switch on the QJ71PB92D has been set to ON use a connector with a built in bus terminator for the QJ71PB92V For wiring specifications for the bus terminator of the QU71PB92Y refer to Section g 5 5 1 Z g S For details on PROFIBUS cables and connectors access the following website e PROFIBUS International http www profibus com eeeeeeeeoeaeeeoeeeeeeoeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee z ae 4 9 QJ71PB92D Compatible Function 4 41 4 FUNCTIONS 4 42 MELSEC TE eries 3 Procedures before system operation In the Intelligent function module switch setting enable the QJ71PB92D compatible function The following shows how to enable the QJ71PB92D compatible function
379. to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869H to 26688 6840H 26768 6890H Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Normal completion the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750H is ON 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 3 Alarm read request with ACK T 44 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING b When failed Table7 38 Response Format When Failed Result M ELSEG seres Buffer memory address 26446 674En An error code is stored gt Section 9 5 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave whose alarm was read is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK response completion status are stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 1 The read completion status of the alarm data is stored Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 1 alarm data No 5 0 Failed or not executed b4 0 Failed or not executed 1 Normally completed 1 Normally completed Read completion status of Read completion status of alarm data No 2 alarm data No 6 b1
380. to F10FH 9 5 6 Error codes F100 to F1FFx Local diagnostic information of the QJ71PB92V Table9 9 Error codes F100H to F1FFuH Error Code LED Status Error Description Action FDL address No of a DP Slave is Check the FDL addresses of the DP Master and F100H FAULT LED ON duplicated with that of the DP Master in the DP Slaves and set correct parameters without parameter settings duplication Check the following and correct the setting so that one or more DP Slaves can exchange O data No DP Slaves are set up for I O data ls the slave parameter Slave is active F101H FAULT LED ON exchange checked In the temporary slave reservation haven t all of DP Slaves been specified as reserved stations F102H Replace the QJ71PB92V F103H If the same error occurs again please consult your FAULT LED ON Hardware failure f Bee A wt F104H local Mitsubishi representative explaining a F105H detailed description of the problem PRM SET LED i F106H Parameters have not been written to the Write the parameters flashing flash ROM Initialize the flash ROM and then write the The parameters or operation mode read parameters and operation mode Bm FAULT LED ON from the flash ROM are corrupted If the same error occurs again replace the QJ71PB92V Initialize the flash ROM F108H FAULT LED ON ie wel Pine a e A If the same error occurs again replace the i QJ71PB92V e Change the module selected in the GX PRM SET LE
381. tor DP to a remote I O station QJ71PB92V parameters cannot be set via a remote master station 4 FDT DTM technology To use the FDT DTM technology first connect the FDT CommDTM to a remote I O station The FDT DTM technology cannot be used via a remote master station FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 1 Applicable System 2 5 2 1 1 Precautions for use on MELSECNET H remote I O stations 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION M ELSEG Q series 2 2 PROFIBUS DP Network Configuration 2 2 1 Basic configuration of the PROFIBUS DP network This section explains the basic PROFIBUS DP configuration for using the QJ71PB92V as a DP Master Class 1 1 System equipment The following table shows the equipment required for the PROFIBUS DP system Table2 4 System Equipment System Equipment DP Master Class 1 QJ71PB92V Configuration tool GX Configurator DP Version 7 00A or later DP Slave QJ71PB93D ST1H PB etc Repeater Required when 32 or more DP Slaves are connected PROFIBUS cable Bus terminator ar Section a 2 Network configuration In the PROFIBUS DP system configuration the following conditions must be satisfied a Number of connectable modules in an entire network When repeaters are used DP Master DP Slaves lt 126 1 Including the QJ71PB92V b Number of connectable modules per segment DP Master
382. trol request signal Y04 ON Global control execution request oO OFF Yo05 Use prohibited Extended diagnostic information read request signal wa ON Extended Use prohibited o diagnostic information read request OFF YO7 Use prohibited Oo Y08 Use prohibited O Yo09 Use prohibited Compatible A Partially compatible x Not compatible To the next page Appendix 2 Differences between the QJ71PB92V and Former Models AP PX 9 Appendix 2 3 Precautions for replacing programs TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDICES INDEX APPENDICES TableAPPX 6 Output Signal Comparisons Continued Signal name QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D Compa tibility AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D MELSEC TA eries Replacement precautions YOA Use prohibited O YOB Use prohibited Data consistency start Dedicated instruction valid request signal signal ON Data consistency ON Data consistency by dedicated by dedicated voc instruction instruction Use prohibited m o enabled enabled OFF Data consistency OFF Data consistency by dedicated by dedicated instruction instruction disabled disabled Restart request signal YOD ON Restart request O OFF YOE Use prohibited O YOF Use prohibited O Y10 Use prohibited oO Operation mode change request signal Y11 ON Operation mode change A 2 c in
383. tus Checked Placed into Fail Safe status Fail Safe function enable Check this checkbox when the parameter check method for the DP Slave is different from that of the PROFIBUS standard Slave specific check of This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function cfg_data For the parameter check method refer to the manual for the DP Slave Not checked Checks parameters based on the PROFIBUS standard Checked Checks parameters by the DP Slave specific method To the next page 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 12 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION o zZ E w o a im w 3 PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries Table6 7 DP V1 V2 Slave Parameters Setting Items Continued Item Description Update Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Update Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Not checked Disables transmission of the Update Alarm Checked Enables transmission of the Update Alarm Status Alarm Check this checkbox to enable transmission of the Status Alarm This setting is available when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Not checked Disables transmission
384. uals related to this product are listed below Please place an order as needed Related Manuals Manual number Manual name model code GX Configurator DP Version 7 Operating Manual SH 080579ENG Explains the overview installation method screen operations etc of GX Configurator DP Version 7 13JU54 Sold separately GX Configurator DP Operating Manual CommDTM Explains the overview installation and operating methods etc of MELSOFT PROFIBUS SH 080582ENG 13JU55 CommDTM Sold separately PROFIBUS DP Interface Module User s Manual Explains the overview of the QJ71PB92D compatible function system configurations SH 080127 specifications functions procedures before system operation programming and dedicated 13JR22 instructions Sold separately 1 Refer to it when using the QJ71PB92D compatible function COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals e QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection e Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures No ad
385. uence No are stored b15 b8 b7 to aLS eG el series b3 b2 b1 bO 0 3 2 1 1 Alarm details category is stored 00 No additional information 01 Error detected and alarm notified from the corresponding slot 26452 6754H 10 No error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 11 Error occurred after alarm notification from the corresponding slot 2 Whether individual ACK is required or not is stored 0 No ACK return from the user is required 1 ACK return from the user is required 3 Sequence No is stored Alarm data No 1 Stored value 0 to 31 The alarm data are stored b15 b8 b7 bO 26453 6755 Alarm data 2nd byte Alarm data 1st byte 26453 6755H to 26454 6756x Alarm data 4th byte Alarm data 3rd byte 26484 6774n to 26484 67741 Alarm data 64th byte Alarm data 63rd byte 26485 6775n to Empty area 26488 6778H Stored value 0000H 26489 6779h to Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0 26529 67A1h to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9 to 26608 67F0H 26609 67F 1h to 26648 6818n Alarm data No 4 Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 Same as alarm data No 1 26649 6819H to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26689 6841H to 26728 6868H Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26729 6869H to
386. uired 3 Sequence No is stored Stored value 0 to 31 4 26488 6778H The slot No is stored Stored value 0 to 254 26489 6779h to Alarm data No 2 Same as alarm data No 1 26528 67A0n 26529 67A1H to Alarm data No 3 Same as alarm data No 1 26568 67C8H 26569 67C9H to Alarm data No 4 Same as alarm data No 1 26608 67F0H 26609 67F 1H to Alarm data No 5 Same as alarm data No 1 26648 6818n 26649 6819H to Alarm data No 6 Same as alarm data No 1 26688 6840n 26689 6841H to Alarm data No 7 Same as alarm data No 1 26728 6868n 26729 6869h to Alarm data No 8 Same as alarm data No 1 26768 6890n 1 Data are stored only when the ACK response completion status is Normally completed the corresponding bit in buffer memory address 26448 6750H is ON 7 5 Program Example for Alarm Acquisition 7 5 2 Alarm ACK request T 38 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS PROGRAMMING b When failed Table7 35 Response Format When Failed M ELSEG series Buffer memory address Result 26446 674EH An error code is stored 3 gt Section 9 5 4 The FDL address of the DP Slave that returned ACK is stored 26447 674FH Stored value 0000H to 007DH 0 to 125 The alarm data read completion status and the ACK
387. ulation method is stored 0 Adds the time difference 1 Subtracts the time difference b When failed Table7 45 Response Format When Failed Buffer memory address Result 26800 68B0n An error code is stored Ce Section 9 5 5 26801 68B1H to Empty area 26812 68BCH Stored value 0000H T 51 7 6 Program Example for Time Control over DP Slaves 7 6 1 Time data read request PROGRAMMING M ELS 26 Fel ceries 7 6 2 Time data write request UTC format This section explains the request and response formats of the time data write request ai UTC format i 5 1 Request format Table7 46 Request Format fej Buffer memory address Description Set value 7 26784 68A0H Set a request code ae ae Set value 1601H bz gt Set the UTC second year month day hour minute second Be 26785 68A1H to The set value 9DFF4400H represents January 1st in 1984 00 00 00 26786 68A2h Set value 9DFF4400H to FFFFFFFFH 26787 68A3h to Set UTC nanosecond ms to ns setting 26788 68A4n Set value 00000000H to FFFFFFFFH z Set the clock status z i b15b14 to b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3b2 b1 bO g 6 5 0 4 3 o 2 0 1 1 Set the synchronous setting with the time master 0 Not synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 1 Synchronize the time setting with that of the time master 2 Set the time resolution minimum unit 00 1ms 2 01 10
388. unction module detailed setting 32 O Zuni Ee ie Eon Recalls i PLE 1 0 response Control PLC ues ie GEER time O ofpe PLC Hea fma ora QJ71PB92V ome E 8 8 9 m N x im 3 MEE E ES eU A 0 Z settings should be set as same when using multiple CPU Cance Figure 4 24 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error GX Developer g n 6 ae z5 Se a AZ 4 6 Output Status Setting for the Case of a CPU Stop Error 4 25 4 FUNCTIONS MELSEC TE eries 2 Output status for the case of a CPU stop error a When Error time output mode is set to Clear The QJ71PB92V stops I O data exchange when a CPU stop error occurs Due to stop of I O data exchange no output data is sent to DP Slaves Input data received from a DP Slave before stop of I O data exchange are held in the buffer memory of the QJ71PB92V I O data exchange is stopped A stop error Q f occurred DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Figure 4 25 When Error time output mode is Set to Clear x POINT Whether or not output data are output from each DP Slave to external devices after stop of I O data exchange differs depending on the setting of the DP Slave For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave b When Error time output mode is set to Hold The QJ71PB92V continues I O data exchange when a CPU stop error oc
389. undant CPUs in systems A and B 3 Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON gt User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used Perform self diagnostics on the QJ71PB92Vs in systems Aand B f lt gt Section 5 4 Set the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Backup mode 1 In Debug mode setting of Redundant parameter in GX Developer select Do not start with Debug mode 2 Write the configured redundant parameters to the redundant CPUs in systems A and B 3 Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON User s manual for the redundant system for the CPU module used z 2 Set PROFIBUS DP parameters in GX Configurator DP o OS Section 6 1 Vv Set the standby master FDL address in GX Developer iab Section 6 7 AA Connect PROFIBUS cables to the QJ71PB92Vs in systems Aand B KE Section 5 5 Connect PROFIBUS cables to DP Slaves and boot them cS Manual for DP Slave Set the RUN STOP switches of the redundant CPUs in systems Aand B to RUN Reset the redundant CPUs in systems A and B at the same time or turn the power OFF and then ON 1 To the next page Figure 5 2 Procedures before System Operation Redundant System 5 3 5 2 Procedures Before System Operation 5 2 2 In the case of the redundant system SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE
390. undant CPU in Backup mode check that the same operation mode is active in the QJ71PB92V in system A and the one in system B If the mode is different between them a malfunction may occur in system switching 6 2 Operation Mode Setting 6 PARAMETER SETTING M eLS eG cries 6 3 Master Parameters Set the QJ71PB92V s transmission speed FDL address and other parameters 1 Start procedure a Right click the QJ71PB92V icon in the PROFIBUS Network window Master Settings xO FDL 0 QI71PB92 Master Settings v Sort by FDL address Right click the QJ71PB92V Figure 6 2 Master Settings Screen Start Procedure 2 Setting items DP Master Parameters Wizard Master Settings Name PROFIBUS Master Baudrate 1 5 Mbps X Bus Parameters FDL address 0 0 125 Starting 1 0 number 000 0x0 OxFE0 Error action flag I Goto Clear State Min slave interval MV Calculate time 66 1 65535 IV Use Min slave interval for Target Token Rotation Time T_tr Polling timeout 50 1 65535 I Slave watchdog IV Calculate time 1 65025 Estimated bus cycle time ms Watchdog for time sync 0 65535 Cancel Default Figure 6 3 Master Settings Screen Table6 3 Master Parameter Setting Items Item Description Set the name of the QJ71PB92V Setting range up to 16 alphanumeric characters Set the transmission speed of the PROFIBUS DP Setting range 9 6 kbps to 12
391. uration example Q25HCPU Remote master station QJ71LP21 25 a QX42 Leo lC o els MELSECNET H remote I O network Remote O station QJ72LP25 25 Bus terminator Bus terminator Figure 7 20 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange When Mounted on a Remote I O Station 7 59 7 8 Program Example When Mounting the QJ71PB92V on a MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 7 8 1 Program example for the I O data exchange function When mounted on a remote I O station PROGRAMMING M eLS 2G Fel series 1 Modules are installed in order from slot 0 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 1 0 Assignment a gt Sit Tye Modelname Points Star f Q25HCPU ee 5 o o QJ71LP21 25 11 0x42 B4points v o e y O Figure 7 21 I O Assignment in Program Example Remote Master Station Table7 56 Assignment of Input and Output Signals Remote Master Station ae Be QJ71LP21 25 X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F QX42 X20 to X5F no 2 The QJ71PB92V is to be installed in slot 0 of the base unit as shown in the figure with the start I O No set to 00H S 5 a 120 Assignment g Lo sit Type Modelname Ponts Start oO Remote 1 0 Remote 1 0 v QJ72LP25 25 cS Se o o 0J71PB92V OOo M Figure 7 22 I O Assignment in Program Example Remote I O Station z 5 Table7 57 Assignment
392. us not and retry E540H The FDL address of the target DP Slave is out of the range E541H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a non configured station E5424 The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs Check if the specified FDL address is correct and retry to the local station QJ71PB92V E543H The FDL address specified for the target DP Slave belongs to a reserved or temporarily reserved station T Check if the alarm data returning ACK is stored in the E544H The alarm type is incorrect Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un 26768 and retry Check the detailed error codes 1 to 3 and take corrective E545H Alarm ACK request error response f actions E546H The slot number is incorrect Check if the alarm data returning ACK is stored in the E547H The sequence number is incorrect Alarm response area Un G26446 to Un 26768 and retry E550H Physical execution error was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E551H Execution error on the protocol was detected A i corrective actions E552H Execution error on the application was detected E560H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side P ve aaahuahees E561H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side SRS AA RR AA POSE St cca E562 Modu dJetecied on the DPS id correctly set or not and retry SeN CUO ee eee For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E563H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available 9 20 9 5
393. ution error detected or system switching ae E410H nae the Slave status area Normal communication detection occurred during service execution in the redundant system Un G23040 to Un G23047 and then retry Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take corrective actions E411H Execution error on the protocol was detected Check the detailed error codes 2 and 3 and take E412H Execution error on the application was detected corrective actions E420H Read error was detected on the DP Slave side E421H Write error was detected on the DP Slave side E422H Module error was detected on the DP Slave side E423H Processing on the DP Slave side is not available E424H Application error was detected on the DP Slave side Request not supported error was detected on the DP Slave E425H side E426H Incorrect index was detected on the DP Slave side E427H Incorrect data length was detected on the DP Slave side Check if the request data supported by the DP Slave is E428H Incorrect slot number was detected on the DP Slave side E429 i daa deid Sne DPS id correctly set or not and retry A NCO OO CAA YPO WOS COIREA ON NS ma AVe Sice For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave E42AH Access to an access disabled area was attempted from the DP Slave side E42BH Access is not available on the DP Slave side E42CH The access was rejected on the DP Slave side E42DH Incorrect access range was detected on the DP Slave side E42EH Incorrect re
394. value 00H to 7D 0 to 125 z 2 In READ service Class2_SERVICE 5 1 1H i b15 b8 b7 bO o 1 The FDL address of the DP Slave is stored Stored value 00H to 7DxH 0 to 125 2 The CommRef No is stored z Stored value 00H to 7En 0 to 126 5 The length of the read data is stored Unit byte m 2 2h Stored value 1 to 240 The read slot No is stored mf 3 3h fd Stored value 0 to 254 96 The read index is stored a a z 4 4H j gugu Stored value 0 to 255 325 The read data are stored g a fi When the read data length is shorter than the length specified in the request format Os are stored in the 7 g A empty area When the read data length is longer than the length specified in the request format only data of the specified data length are stored g b15 b8 b7 bo 7 5 5H to 124 7 5 SH to 124 7CH 5 5H Data 2 Data 1 i lu 6 6H Data 4 Data 3 z i to 7 124 7CH Data 240 Data 239 125 7Dh to Empty area g 127 7FH Stored value 0000H A Yn a On ao a 2 7 4 Program Example for Acyclic Communication with DP Slaves T 18 s 7 4 1 READ services Class1_SERVICE Class2_SERVICE PROGRAMMING MELSEC TE cries b When failed Table7 17 Response Format When Failed Offset Address Result 0 0H An error code is stored lt gt Section 9 5 3 1 1H 1 In READ service Class1_SERVICE b15 b8 b7 bO o J o
395. vices in the I O Data Exchange Program Example D100 to I O data exchange start command D195 Output data b Devices whose data are tracking transferred by DP Slave control programs Devices which are specified as conditions for writing output data are tracked Table7 72 Tracking Transfer Devices in the DP Slave Control Program Example Device Description Device Description Conditions for write to output data 1st word X31 Conditions for write to output data 2nd word c Devices whose data are tracking transferred by programs for reading diagnostic information Data in the following devices are tracking transferred e Start command device by which the Diagnostic information detection reset request signal Y01 is turned ON e Start command device by which the Diagnostic information area clear request signal YO2 is turned ON Table7 73 Devices Tracked in the Program Example for Reading Diagnostic Information Device Description Device Communication error detection reset command X22 Description Communication error area clear command 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System T 76 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONS SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION PARAMETER SETTING bas PROGRAMMING DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS eee i i i ee Cl PROGRAMMING 5 Program examples a
396. ware version B and software version F or later are compared here For versions earlier than the above refer to the following manual to check differences PROFIBUS DP Interface Module Type AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D User s Manual IB 66773 Products of software version B or later are compared in this manual For versions earlier than the above refer to the following manual to check AJ71PB92D differences PROFIBUS DP Interface Module Type AJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D User s Manual IB 66773 QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D Appendix 1 Functional Upgrade of the QJU71PB92V AP PX 1 APPENDICES MELSEC TE eries Appendix 2 1 Specification comparisons The following compares the performance specifications and functions between the QJ71PB92V and former models 1 Comparisons of performance specifications PROFIBUS DP station type TableAPPX 3 Comparisons of Performance Specifications ftom QJ71PB92V QJ71PB92D A1SJ71PB92D AJ71PB92D DP Master Class 1 IEC 61158 compliant DP Master Class 1 EN50170 compliant Transmission specifications Electrical standard EIA RS485 compliant Data link method characteristics Medium Shielded twisted pair cable Network topology Bus topology Tree topology when repeaters are used Between DP Masters Token passing method Between DP Master and DP Slave Polling method Encoding method NRZ Transmission speed Transmission distance 9 6kbps 19 2kbps 93
397. wing shows how to recover the QJ71PB92V in the new control system when its FAULT LED is ON Start While the redundant system is operating in Backup mode check that the QJ71PB92V is running in the following status QJ71PB92V in new control system Normally operating QJ71PB92V in new standby system FAULT LED ON Check the LEDS and the error code of the QJ71PB92V in the new standby system and take corrective actions S Section 9 5 Request the QJ71PB92V restart Maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the new standby system is not performed Yes y Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Separate mode in GX Developer 1 v Set the new standby system CPU to RUN y In the device test of GX Developer turn Restart request signal YOD OFF gt ON gt OFF to restart the QJ71PB92V in the new standby system Did the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the new standby system turn off Yes Y Set the new standby system CPU to STOP y Change the operation mode of the redundant CPU to Backup mode in GX Developer x1 4 y Completed Figure 9 7 When the FAULT LED of the QJ71PB92V in the New Control System is ON Perform maintenance of the QJ71PB92V in the new stand by system lt _ gt Section 9 4 3 1 For how to change the operation mode of Redundant CPU refer to the user s manual for the redundant system
398. x one alarm of each type Check this checkbox to acquire alarms one by one for each type when the DP Slave detects multiple types of alarms This item can be set when the DP Slave supports this function This item is fixed to be selected depending on the DP Slave status Not checked Acquires alarms in order of occurrence Max 8 alarms Checked Acquires generated alarms one by one for each type Max 6 alarms 6 13 6 5 Slave Parameters 6 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC TE eries 6 6 Automatic Refresh Parameters Set the automatic refresh parameters by which data in the QJ71PB92V buffer memory are gt automatically transferred to QCPU devices 3 6 6 1 Automatic refresh parameter setup procedure The following describes the automatic refresh parameter setup procedure 3 qo 26 nO Are the I O data of all NO 2 DP Slaves to be refreshed to the 2 same devices of the QCPU h i 8 N In the CPU Device Access window set the I O data refresh target for gt Section 6 6 2 Block Transfer X 2 In the CPU Device Access window 2 select the Slave Specific Transfer 73 gt Section 6 6 2 9 radio button to set the I O data refresh target P In the Slave Specific Buffer Devices 4 gt window set refresh target devices storing 73 gt Section 6 6 2 Ze I O data of each DP Slave ane cara 939 lt Aa v E 36 In the CPU Device Access window Oo
399. xplains program examples for continuing I O data exchange in the case of system switching The following system configuration is used as an example for explanations in Sections 7 9 1 to 7 9 7 1 System configuration example Q25PRHCPU QJ71PB92V 7 Qx41 Bus terminator Bus terminator DP Slave DP Slave Figure 7 31 System Configuration Example for I O Data Exchange When Mounted on a Redundant System 1 Modules are installed in order from slot 1 as shown in the figure and the following start I O Nos are to be set 120 Assignment slot Type Modelname Points Start Po yee jee 25PRHCPU re 1 foro IPL v Q25PRHCPU Opoint P24 inteni UT IPB ZV 0000 3 22 Figure 7 32 I O Assignment in Program Example Table7 64 Assignment of Input and Output Signals QJ71PB92V X00 to X1F Y00 to Y1F QX41 X20 to X3F T 71 7 9 Program Examples for Use in the Redundant System 7 9 1 I O Data Exchange Program Examples PROGRAMMING MELSEC Ke ories 2 Settings a QJ71PB92V settings gt W gt Table7 65 QJ71PB92V Settings es Control master FDL address FDL address 0 S FDL address 2 Standby master FDL address FDL address 1 g 20 a
400. y 4 FUNCTIONS M eLS eG lA cries 4 3 PROFIBUS DPV2 Functions POINT i 1 To utilize PROFIBUS DPV2 functions use a DP Slave that supports the PROFIBUS DPV2 For details refer to the manual for the DP Slave 2 When using the PROFIBUS DP2 function set a Min slave interval value z greater than the bus cycle time calculated from Pt Tsdi and Lr lt 57 Section 5 3 5 1 Dg If the Min slave interval is less than the value calculated from Pt Tsdi and 26 Lr the processing of the PROFIBUS DPV2 function may take time no 4 3 1 Time control over DP Slaves q S This function allows the QJ71PB92V to operate as the time master and set the time of z each DP Slave DP Master Class 1 Time setting Power QJ71 supply QCPU pgg2vy z module 5 2 rd E a a n gt 0 DP Slave DP Slave DP Slave Sas Zou hee naw Figure 4 14 Time Control Function 1 Requests available on the QJ71PB92V 9 For whether the DP Slave supports this function or not refer to the manual for the DP E n Slave a D a Requests for writing time data D Table4 6 Request for Writing Time Data Request Name Description Sets the year month day hour minute and second and writes the Time data write request i time data g Writes time data in UTC seconds Time data write request UTC year month day hour minute sec
401. ystem QJ71PB92V Standby system QJ71PB92V DP Slaves Repeaters 1 lt 32 1 A repeater are counted for both segments 3 x Max no of repeaters Up to 3 repeaters can be used for communication between the QJ71PB92V and any DP Slave 4 Number of connectable DP Slaves per QJ71PB92V Up to 124 DP Slaves can be connected to a single QJ71PB92V lt b lt Mounting the QJ71PB92V on an extension base unit The conditions of when the QJ71PB92V is mounted on an extension base unit are the same as those of when the module is used in a single CPU system or multiple CPU system L gt Section 2 2 1 2 3 Redundant System Configuration Redundant CPUs Only 2 3 1 PROFIBUS DP network configuration 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC TE cries 2 3 2 PROFIBUS DP network configuration examples QJ71PB92Vs mounted on main base units 1 When using only non redundant DP Slaves a Maximum Configuration With No Repeater Connected DP Master QJ71PB92V 2 DP Slave 30 Gonirolsystem DP Master Class 1 y FDL address 0 Power Redundant supply Cpu module QJ71 PB92V Bus terminator Tracking cable DP Slave FDL address 2 DP Slave FDL address 3 XX Connection points counted Standby system as number of modules DP Master Class 1 FDL address 1 Power supply module Redundant QJ71 CPU PB92 V Segment

PROFIBUS-DP Master Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents